the-ideas-suite

Eliminate trigger foods to beat fatigue and feel lighter this summer

Wed, 08 Apr 2026 02:40:29 GMT

Summer is around the corner, but many of us are running out of steam between work, kids and endless to-do lists. If you’re feeling flat or foggy, the problem might not be your schedule, it could be your diet. Now, a new analysis reveals that cutting a few everyday foods could help you feel re-energised just in time for summer.

The analysis – from FoodFit , Australia’s leading food-compatibility testing service – reveals that removing foods that trigger common symptoms such as headaches and bloating can deliver major results within just three to four weeks.

Each year, FoodFit receives upwards of 5000 symptomatology reports from natural health practitioners. From its analysis of 2856 reports in the last year, bloating, tiredness and rashes/itchy skin were the top three symptoms plaguing Australians due to an incompatibility with a food.

FoodFit customers who eliminated incompatible foods experienced, on average, a 72 per cent reduction in bloating in the third week, an 80 per cent drop in brain fog in four weeks, a 60 per cent reduction in fatigue in the first week and an 80 per cent reduction in the fourth week, a 60 per cent reduction in sinus symptoms, hayfever and headaches within just four weeks.

The findings from FoodFit’s aggregated client data of show that even subtle dietary reactions can have a massive impact on how we feel day-to-day. Participants also reported large improvements in behavioural symptoms (80%) and digestive concerns such as diarrhoea (80%) and constipation (60%) over the same period.

Dennis Hodges, founder and CEO of FoodFit, says the results show how quickly the body can reset when trigger foods are removed. “Many people resign themselves to live not feeling their best. They accept bloating after lunch, afternoon fatigue or a foggy head as normal, many attributing it to just getting older or being busy,” says Dennis. “Our data proves that by identifying and removing just a handful of incompatible foods, people can dramatically improve how they feel within weeks.”

In FoodFit’s recent analyses of 2856 symptomatic Australians, four in five (85%) were incompatible with basic supermarket foods. The top five biggest offenders were full cream milk (95.5%), white bread (95.2%), wholemeal bread (94.9%), multigrain bread (94.8%) and skim milk (93.8%). Even A2 milk, pasta and cow’s milk cheese were flagged in more than 84 per cent of cases. Other common triggering foods are onion and garlic, cashews, tomato, corn products such as tortillas, strawberries and pineapple.

FoodFit’s program uses a simple at-home test to measure the body’s compatibility with over 500 foods and additives, creating a personalised report that identifies potential triggers. Participants then follow a guided elimination plan to help the body recover, reduce inflammation, and restore energy.

Top tips from FoodFit for feeling your best this summer:

1. Do something: If you experience unexplained symptoms, get a food compatibility test.
2. Tune in: Listen to your body, notice how you feel after meals and pay attention to patterns.
3. Go back to basics: Simplify your meals, avoid hidden additives.
4. Hydrate often: Drink at least two litres per day. Water helps your body flush out irritants.
5. Give it time: It takes around four weeks to feel the full benefits of removing trigger foods.

“It’s not about cutting out whole food groups, following restrictive or fad diets. It’s about finding what works for your individual body, once you do, you’ll notice the difference fast and be ready for a summer full of energy and feeling the best version of yourself.”

About FoodFit

Founded in 1985, FoodFit (originally known as Naturopathic Services) is an Australian provider of food compatibility testing and practitioner-led health tools and programs designed to identify and eliminate foods that may be aggravating the body at a cellular level. Unlike allergy or intolerance testing, FoodFit’s approach focuses on supporting the body’s natural healing by temporarily removing incompatible foods and restoring overall balance. On average, 5000 Australians a year have undertaken the FoodFit Compatibility Program, which is administered exclusively through trained healthcare practitioners across the country. Learn more at www.foodfit.com.au . Find a practitioner here: https://foodfit.com.au/consultants .

ENDS

From headaches in Millennials to joint pain in Gen X: how food reactions impact each generation

Wed, 08 Apr 2026 02:33:02 GMT

Gen Alpha most likely to break out in rashes and behavioural issues – with strawberries the top trigger
Gen Z can react to coffee and garlic, with bloating and headaches common symptoms
Boomers react most commonly to pineapple, with IBS a top symptom

 Top 10 incompatible foods by generation (after bread and milk):

A new analysis of 2856 Australians has revealed the top ‘triggering’ foods and the symptoms they cause in each generation. The data, compiled by FoodFit – which has conducted more than 250,000 tests for ‘food incompatibility’ since 1985 – reveals that common foods such as strawberries, garlic, pineapple and even coffee can trigger symptoms such as rashes, fatigue, bloating, headaches and irritable bowel syndrome. FoodFit’s latest indepth analysis has identified the top 10 triggering foods and their associated symptoms for each generation.

Food incompatibility is a lesser-known form of food reactivity. Symptoms flare up when ordinary foods temporarily disrupt an individual’s current cellular or inflammatory state, showing up as bloating, rashes, brain fog and headaches. Unlike allergies, which trigger a blood-based immune response, or intolerances, which stem from enzyme deficiencies, incompatibility aggravates existing imbalances.

And FoodFit’s latest data – where it aggregated 2856 hair sample tests conducted in the 2025 financial year – reveals those imbalances show up differently across the generations. The findings highlight that food incompatibility is inherently bio-compatible and what causes a reaction in one individual may be completely tolerated in another. It’s never a one-size-fits-all outcome.

Each year, FoodFit receives upwards of 5000 symptomatology reports each year from natural health practitioners. Armed with hair (and sometimes saliva) samples, FoodFit tests them against more than 600 whole foods and household products and then guides individuals through a six-month elimination process to reduce inflammation and restore balance. Many foods can be reintroduced once the body resets.

Dennis Hodges, Founder and CEO of FoodFit, says: “Our reports reflect people who had no diagnosed allergies or intolerances, but were suffering unexplained symptoms and underwent FoodFit testing through their naturopath. We aggregated these results to identify a real-world snapshot of how food incompatibility is troubling different age groups.

“A food like strawberries or coffee might be fine for one person but can cause issues in another, depending on their cellular state at the time and life stage. For kids, it could be rashes, a teenager could suffer from unexplained headaches, compared to an older Australian who could be dealing with irritable bowel syndrome.

“We’re not saying strawberries, coffee or garlic are bad foods. We’re saying they may not suit the impacted individual’s system right now. A Boomer’s food incompatibility can look different from a Gen Z’s. That’s because our program works on a bio-compatibility basis. It recognises that every body is different and there is no universal trigger list. Our testing uncovers that – and gives people a roadmap back to balance.”

FoodFit’s analysis found the top 10 symptoms and incompatible foods (after bread and milk) across each generation.

Gen Alpha (under-12s). FoodFit’s analysis found that the top symptoms in Gen Alpha are skin and behavioural issues. Rashes and eczema top the list (11.6%), with constipation, hyperactivity and sleep issues close behind. Their main food foes? Strawberries (64.7% of this cohort), tomato paste (50.4%) and corn tortillas (46%).
Gen Z (age 13–28). This generation experiences symptoms linked to poor digestion such as bloating, headaches, diarrhoea and constipation. The foods most likely to cause them are corn tortilla (50.5% of this age group), chlorella (47.4%) and coffee (46.3%).
Millennials (age 29-44). The ‘cognitive crisis’ generation, where brain fog, tiredness and poor sleep are among the top complaints. These are fuelled by incompatibility with chlorella (48.7% of this cohort), strawberries (43.6%) and garlic (42.9%).
Gen X (age 45-60). This is where physical deterioration begins – and it’s the first time joint pain makes the top 10 list of symptoms. However, bloating, brain fog and tiredness top the list. These are aggravated by strawberries (50.8% of this age group), tortillas (49.2%) and chlorella (47.5%).
Boomers (over-60s). Irritable bowel syndrome is the top symptom after bloating, followed by reflux and flatulence. Boomers fare worst with foods often seen as healthy: pineapple (52.9% of this group), garlic (50%) and chlorella (50%) all appear in the top list of incompatibilities.

FoodFit’s Compatibility Program is available exclusively through qualified practitioners and involves testing for 600 foods and household items, plus a six-month guided elimination plan, at a one-off cost of $299.

About FoodFit

Top 10 symptoms by age group:

Bloating, brain fog and fatigue? The real culprit might be your morning toast

Wed, 08 Apr 2026 02:05:39 GMT

New data from 2,856 symptomatic Aussies link everyday pantry staples to a raft of unexplained symptoms
Milk and bread top the charts, affecting 95% of tested individuals
Bloating, tiredness and rashes/itchy skin revealed as the most common symptoms among sufferers

It’s not you, it’s milk. Or bread. Or possibility the 82 other foods your body’s quietly begging you to stop eating. New national data has revealed the surprising everyday foods thousands of Australians are unknowingly incompatible with. And it’s not about allergies, intolerance or even sensitives, it’s about a lesser known but increasingly widespread issue: food incompatibility.

Australia has a well‑documented food‑reaction problem. Around 1 in 4 people believe they have some form of food intolerance, while food allergies affect up to 10 per cent of children and four per cent of adults. [1] Yet a third and largely overlooked issue is food incompatibility: a temporary mismatch between what you eat and your body’s current cellular or inflammatory state.

According to FoodFit – a leading Australian food compatibility testing service operating since 1985 – the issue for most people isn’t a diagnosed food allergy or intolerance. It’s an incompatibility that flares when common foods aggravate an already imbalanced system.

Each year, FoodFit receives upwards of 5000 symptomatology reports each year from natural health practitioners. From its analysis of 2856 reports in the last year, bloating, tiredness and rashes/itchy skin were identified as the top three symptoms plaguing Australians. [2]

Digestive issues like bloating, constipation, diarrhoea and flatulence dominated the top symptoms. But FoodFit’s analysis also flagged sinus problems, brain fog and headaches. On average, respondents were incompatible with 82 foods, many of them pantry staples.

Dennis Hodges, founder and CEO of FoodFit, says these symptoms are showing up in people with no diagnosed food allergy, no formal intolerance and often no clue what’s causing their discomfort.

“These aren’t just people who can’t tolerate lactose or gluten. These are people reacting to common foods like milk, bread and pasta but for reasons that have nothing to do with classic intolerances. Our testing identifies foods that are temporarily aggravating an imbalanced system. And that’s a massive difference,” says Dennis.

Unlike allergies, which trigger a direct immune response in the blood, or intolerances, which involve enzyme or metabolic deficiencies, food incompatibility which can be triggered by inflammation, stress and even environmental load.

In FoodFit’s recent analyses, four in five (85%) of symptomatic individuals were incompatible with basic supermarket foods. Among the top 10 offenders were full cream milk (95.5%), white bread (95.2%) and wholemeal bread (94.9%). Even multigrain bread, skim milk, A2 milk, pasta and cow’s milk cheese were flagged in more than 84 per cent of cases.

Also, unlike traditional allergy testing, FoodFit’s Compatibility Program doesn’t rely on blood samples or histamine markers. Instead, it uses hair and saliva to test over 600 whole foods and household products and then guides individuals through a short-term, practitioner-led elimination process to reduce inflammation and restore balance. Dennis says that many foods can be reintroduced once the body resets.

“Rather than diagnose allergies, our program helps people pinpoint which foods may be disrupting their system right now,” Dennis explains. “We’re not saying milk or bread are bad. We’re saying that your body, at this moment, may not be processing them well. This test isn’t the cure, but it’s the start of figuring out what’s throwing your system off.”

The million-dollar question is why more people are struggling with foods that, on the surface, appear perfectly acceptable. Dennis believes that these staples aren’t what they used to be.

“We’re eating out of season, relying on produce grown in depleted soils and consuming foods that are hybridised, irradiated or fumigated to extend shelf life. Add environmental stress and a modern diet that lacks diversity and you’ve got a recipe for incompatibility.”

About FoodFit

Dennis Hodges, founder and CEO of FoodFit, says these symptoms are showing up in people with no diagnosed food allergy, no formal intolerance and often no clue what’s causing their discomfort.

The million-dollar question is why more people are struggling with foods that, on the surface, appear perfectly acceptable. Dennis believes that these staples aren’t what they used to be.

Top 10 symptoms reported to FoodFit from a sample of 2856 individuals, July 2024-July 2025:

Bloating
Tiredness
Rashes/Itchy Skin
Constipation
Brain Fog
Diarrhoea
Flatulence
Sinus/Hay Fever (up from 10th place in the previous 12 months)
Sleep Disorders
Headaches/Migraine (down from 7th place in the previous 12 months)

Top 10 incompatible foods from the same sample:

[1] https://www.foodauthority.nsw.gov.au/consumer/life-events-and-food/allergy-and-intolerance

[2] The 12 months to 30 June 2025

CORPORATE TRAVELLER

Fri, 03 Apr 2026 06:44:19 GMT

Corporate Traveller is Flight Centre Travel Group’s global business travel management and solutions provider for SMEs.

Corporate Traveller sought a PR program to boost brand awareness within Australia’s business sector, promote the company as a market leader, differentiate the brand from competitors, and boost its share of voice on business travel in the media.

In the first 12 months of PR, The Ideas Suite secured 550 media placements for Corporate Traveller in major news sites such as The Australian, Herald Sun, AFR and The Daily Telegraph. The coverage reached a (repeat) audience of 245 million, with $2.5 million in PR value.

The Ideas Suite designed a PR program that would position the brand as an SME and business travel thought leader with its finger on the pulse of trends in the sector. We drew on Corporate Traveller’s aggregated customer booking data, surveys, and whitepapers to deliver strong content to key media outlets. We also maximised media coverage of the Flight Centre Corporate’s annual Illuminate conference in October 2021, the first time the event had been fully virtual due to COVID-19 restrictions.

INSUREANDGO

Thu, 02 Apr 2026 07:44:12 GMT

InsureandGo is one of Australia’s leading travel insurance brand and at the time, owned by Mapfre Group, a large insurer with Headquarters in Spain.

InsureandGo Australia chose The Ideas Suite to generate a strong PR program in Australia that would boost brand awareness and maximise major media coverage.

The Ideas Suite secured 15 media stories and 33 media placements in January on the back of Nadal’s media interviews – which included Sunrise, Today, 7 News, Nine Now, The Australian, Australian Financial Review and the Herald Sun. The media placements reached a (repeat) audience of more than 24.4 million with a PR value of more than $1.8 million.

During the 2020 Australian open, The Ideas Suite was tasked with promoting InsureandGo’s ‘Go There’ campaign with Rafael Nadal, through a series of one-on-one top-tier media interviews with Nadal in one day in Melbourne.

WORLDFIRST

Wed, 01 Apr 2026 08:15:52 GMT

WorldFirst is an award-winning global leader in international money transfers. WorldFirst briefed The Ideas Suite to design and implement a social influencer campaign that would engage the local expat community.

We developed the eponymous campaign name and hashtag #myWorldFirstexperience, and targeted expats on social who had high following and/or engagement rate. We offered them a uniquely Australian experience under $300 that is a ‘world first’ for them, in exchange for social media posts. The experiences could be eating kangaroo at a restaurant overlooking Sydney harbour, climbing the Harbour Bridge, surfing lessons at Bondi Beach, or seeing and Australian Ballet or a Bangarra performance at The Opera House.

We engaged 5 influencers, resulting in 13 posts with a 474,000 following and 1.68% engagement rate, as well as 6 Instagram stories with a 640,000 audience and a 30 per cent engagement rate.

DAVIE GROUP – THE OODIE

Wed, 01 Apr 2026 08:10:22 GMT

The Davie Group is one of Australia’s largest and fastest-growing online retailers. Founded by entrepreneur David Fogarty, the company offers 12 brands, including The Oodie, Calming Blankets and Pupnaps.

The Ideas Suite developed 12-month PR programs for the company’s top selling brands, The Oodie and Calming Blankets, as well as the Davie Group corporate brand. The programs were designed to boost awareness of Davie Fogarty’s success in business, The Oodie and Calming Blankets brands as well as their market differentiation and popularity.

In the first nine months, The Ideas Suite achieved 363 pieces of media coverage in outlets that included 9 News, Daily Mail, Sunrise, Daily Telegraph, Pedestrian, Nova Radio, News.com.au and Courier Mail.

We also secured Davie Fogarty a spot in the AFR Rich List, where he ranked 38.

Our media coverage reached a (repeat) audience of 537 million, achieving $5.8 million in PR value.

GEMINI

Wed, 01 Apr 2026 08:05:08 GMT

Gemini, founded in 2014 by NY-based twin brothers, Cameron and Tyler Winklevoss, is a world-leading cryptocurrency platform that enables individuals and institutions to securely buy, sell and store cryptocurrencies in more than 50 territories.

The Ideas Suite won the Gemini account after a competitive multi-agency pitch.

Reporting to the Gemini APAC leadership team in Singapore, The Ideas Suite’s drove a PR program that included creative story ideas derived from surveys, thought leadership pieces, Gemini news announcements.

During our 9-month PR program, The Ideas Suite generated 185 media placements including the Australian Financial Review, Daily Mail, The Age, Sydney Morning Herald and The Australian. The coverage reached a (repeat) audience of 171 million, with nearly $2 million in PR value.

MENULOG

Wed, 01 Apr 2026 08:00:05 GMT

Menulog is Australia’s largest online and mobile takeaway website.

The Ideas Suite drove an always on press office function for Menulog.

In a 12 month period, The Ideas Suite secured 306 print and online media placements, reaching a (repeat) audience of more than 177.6 million. Key media outlets included Good Food, The Australian, The Daily Mail, The Age, Elle, The Australian Women’s Weekly, The Canberra Times, The Sydney Morning Herald and major metro papers Australia-wide.

COMPARE THE MARKET

Wed, 01 Apr 2026 07:53:04 GMT

Comparethemarket.com.au is Australia’s most recognised comparison website for financial products, particularly health insurance.

The Ideas Suite provides an always on press office function for comparethemarket.com.au.

Since The Ideas Suite joined comparethemarket.com.au in January 2014, 3,867 media stories were generated, including 83 major television pieces. Highlight coverage included Channel Nine News, Today, Network 10 News, Channel 7 News, The Australian, news.com.au, Sydney Morning Herald, and The Daily Telegraph. Coverage reached a (repeat) audience of 859.5 million.

HOTELSCOMBINED

Wed, 01 Apr 2026 07:48:26 GMT

HotelsCombined is the world’s leading hotel price comparison platform, finding Australians the best price guaranteed by comparing all the top travel sites.

The Ideas Suite provides HotelsCombined with an always on press office program.

In the first six months, The Ideas Suite secured 1,577 media placements for HotelsCombined across print, online and broadcast, reaching a (repeat) audience of 277,591,234. The editorial coverage during this time equated to more than $3M in PR value, and key media outlets included The Today Show, Daily Telegraph, Herald Sun, News Corp’s Escape and The Huffington Post.

HATCH

Wed, 01 Apr 2026 06:48:13 GMT

Hatch is a leading global engineering company specialising in mining and metals, energy, infrastructure and urban solutions. The company draws on more than 9000 specialist employees in 150 countries to tackle some of the world’s toughest challenges.

Hatch sought a PR program in Australia to promote its capabilities and expertise in Australia, and position the company as a leading global expert in infrastructure, energy and metals.

In the first 18 months of working with Hatch, 630 media stories were generated. Highlight coverage included Channel 7 News, ABC Radio, Herald Sun, Courier Mail, The Australian, and Daily Mail. Coverage reached a (repeat) audience of 358 million and a PR value of $6.1 million.

The Ideas Suite developed a PR program that publicised Hatch’s people, expertise, thought leaders, contribution to Australia’s major projects, and its agenda in major media and important trade media. We have also targeted the Governments, big business and property development markets in Australia via our PR plans as well as promote Hatch Australia’s capabilities, services and its products and position the company as the infrastructure, energy and metals industry leader and expert in the country.

INSTANTSCRIPTS

Wed, 01 Apr 2026 06:38:42 GMT

InstantScripts is Australia’s leading online telehealth and prescription service, that has enabled more than 500,000 Australians access prescriptions online for more than 300 common medicines that can be delivered to their door or local pharmacy.

InstantScripts sought a PR program that would position the company as Australia’s leading telehealth and prescription service making primary healthcare more easily accessible for urban, regional and rural Australians.

In the first 12 months, The Ideas Suite generated 357 pieces of media coverage with 67 backlinks. These include Channel 9 News, news.com.au, Yahoo!7 and Australian Financial Review. The coverage reached a (repeat) audience of over 113 million, with the major print and broadcast coverage achieving $2.5 million in PR value.

The Ideas Suite designed a PR program that would promote InstantScripts’ strong growth, position the brand as a primary healthcare thought leader, publicise the company as a great place to work for doctors, and grow brand awareness across Australia’s major media outlets.

MONEY.COM.AU

Wed, 01 Apr 2026 06:33:53 GMT

Money.com.au is an independent online marketplace that provides intelligent insights and financial tools to empower Australian consumers. Money.com.au also offers financial products for businesses and consumers from leading lenders.

Money.com.au sought a PR program that would raise awareness of its brand, and deliver a steady stream of backlinks from high-traffic media sites. As the people at Money.com.au were offshore, The Ideas Suite commissioned well known business and consumer financial adviser Helen Baker to be the face of the brand in the media.

In the first eight months, The Ideas Suite generated 644 pieces of coverage with 91 backlinks in media such as Daily Telegraph, News.com.au, Sunrise, Ch 10 News, Business Insider and Yahoo!7 Finance. The coverage reached a (repeat) audience of 593 million, with the major print and broadcast coverage achieving $532 million in PR value.

The Ideas Suite then developed a content strategy comprising Money.com.au surveys of consumers and businesses and listicles that help the public improve their financial know-how. To encourage backlinks and drive traffic to the website, we developed and embedded whitepapers into our media stories.

AUST PAYROLL ASSOCIATION

Wed, 01 Apr 2026 06:29:28 GMT

The Australian Payroll Association is Australia’s leading network in payroll training, consulting and advisory for employers. It offers end-to-end payroll process reviews, compliance auditing, specialist recruitment services, payroll qualifications and training courses, and a membership program.

Australian Payroll Association sought a PR program that would increase awareness of its brand and services among its target market of large organisations. To that end, The Ideas Suite was required to secure regular media coverage in trade, business and news media that would position APA as a thought leader in the payroll industry. The Ideas Suite also offered the media APA’s expert commentary when major employee underpayment incidents that reached the media.

In nine months of PR, The Ideas Suite achieved 394 piece of media coverage in outlets that included Australian Financial Review, The Australian, Sydney Morning Herald, The Age, news.com.au, The Today show, ABC Radio and Qantas Talking Business.

Our media coverage reached a (repeat) audience of 345 million, with the major print and broadcast coverage achieving $4.5 million in PR value.

WORLDFIRST

Wed, 01 Apr 2026 06:22:36 GMT

WorldFirst is a global leader in international money transfers. Since 2004, more than 200,00 individuals and businesses have used WorldFirst to transact more than $100 billion.

WorldFirst asked The Ideas Suite to create a PR program that would grow its brand profile, raise its share of voice in the media, position it as the leading service in international money transfers.

In 12 months of PR, The Ideas Suite generated 309 media placements, including The Daily Telegraph, Sydney Morning Herald, A Current Affair and Sky News. The total coverage reached a (repeat) audience of 222 million, with $5 million in PR value.

WESLEY

Wed, 01 Apr 2026 06:17:39 GMT

Wesley Hospital Ashfield and Kogarah is a leading Sydney mental health hospital owned by Wesley Mission. The Ideas Suite was briefed to amplify Wesley Hospital’s annual Elephant in the Room street campaign, designed to raise awareness about mental health issues during Mental Health Week, in October.

We amplified the previous year’s campaign by:

Engaging social influencers to raise awareness of the event.
Inviting celebrities and mental health leaders to the event.
Inviting media to the event.
Sending event photos to influencers and the media.

We ensured any third-party involvement was on a volunteer basis.

We engaged 24 social influencers, resulting in 31 posts to an audience of 360,277. We secured 13 media placements, which reached a (repeat) audience of more than 2.3 million.

To the event, we attracted the NSW Waratahs, Australian Mens Sevens, Olympians, National Cricketer Sarah Coyte, and TV personalities Hoda Kobeissi (‘MasterChef’) and Sam Webb (‘Neighbours’, ‘Survivor’), the NRL West Tigers mascot, and the CEO of the NSW Mental Health Commission.

POINT HACKS

Wed, 01 Apr 2026 06:12:47 GMT

Point Hacks is an independent platform that brings together one of Australia’s biggest active communities of airline rewards enthusiasts, attracting 300,000 unique visitors a month.

The Ideas Suite was briefed to boost Point Hacks’ profile through the media, and position the brand as the go-to frequent flyer platform for Australians seeking the best tips and latest updates on frequent flyer programs and point maximisation.

In the first 6 months of PR, The Ideas Suite secured 183 media placements for Point Hacks, including seven appearances on morning TV – such as Today and Weekend Sunrise – and major news sites such as News.com.au and Daily Mail. The coverage reached a (repeat) audience of 238 million, with $3.8 million in PR value.

+HEMP

Wed, 01 Apr 2026 06:05:57 GMT

+hemp is Australia’s first true hemp water. The Ideas Suite was briefed to develop and implement a low-budget 3-month PR campaign to launch the new product to the consumer market.

In 3 months, The Ideas Suite secured 90 media placements across print, online and broadcast media. This coverage included Today Tonight, Your Money, News.com.au, Yahoo!7, The Sydney Morning Herald and Daily Mail, as well as a promotion on hit105 FM Brisbane that gave us 5 brand mentions on air and 5 tagged Instagram stories. The combined coverage reached a (repeat) audience of 59 million with a PR value of $1 million.

KANEBRIDGE

Wed, 01 Apr 2026 05:17:40 GMT

Kanebridge is one of the leading Australian property development and investment firms that offers project management, financing, wealth advisory, mortgage broking, property sales and marketing services.

With the launch of its newest project, Marsden Central – a masterplanned community in Sydney with Australia’s fastest internet – The Ideas Suite ran a media campaign to increase public awareness of the development.

We generated 146 pieces of media coverage across print, broadcast and online media over a five-week period. This included 7 News Sydney, 9 News Sydney, Sky News, Daily Telegraph and Realestate.com.au. Coverage reached a (repeat) audience of more than 11.6 million, and major news coverage achieved $216,763 in PR value. Social coverage reached an audience of more than 2.9 million.

The Ideas Suite developed media stories about Marsden Central’s super-fast internet and smart-home automation, as well as buyer case studies, and invited media and VIPs to the public launch event.

MENULOG INFLUENCER ENGAGEMENT

Wed, 01 Apr 2026 05:11:50 GMT

Menulog is Australia’s largest app for online takeaway orders.

The Ideas Suite promoted a Menulog activation at the Melbourne Night Noodle Markets through a social influencer program. Influencers were required to tag and link back to menulog.com.au

The Ideas Suite sourced props for influencers on the day, and secured 15 foodies to attend the Melbourne event. We offered influencers vouchers to make their food orders at the markets on the day. A total of 15 placements was secured, to a combined audience of 1.3m people. The total engagement of this campaign was more than 2300.

PRODUCTREVIEW.COM.AU

Wed, 01 Apr 2026 05:07:13 GMT

ProductReview.com.au is Australia’s most trusted online review platform for more than 60,000 products and services. It attracts 35,000 reviews each month – and a total of 1.06m reviews – that help millions of monthly visitors make better buying decisions.

The Ideas Suite was briefed to run a 2-month campaign for ProductReview.com.au to announce its 2017 award winners, with the goal of maximising media coverage.

In a five-week period, The Ideas Suite secured 108 media stories – including four TV appearances. Highlight coverage included the Today show (twice), Sunrise, Channel 9 News and News.com.au. Coverage reached a (repeat) audience of 110 million, with the print and broadcast coverage achieving $1.5m in PR value, and a social media audience of 5.5m.

TrueLocal

Wed, 01 Apr 2026 04:47:49 GMT

TrueLocal is a trusted Australian local business directory and review platform providing millions of Australians access to local business listings and reviews Australia-wide. TrueLocal is owned by Sensis, Australia’s largest online marketing services company.

TrueLocal engaged The Ideas Suite after a competitive PR pitch to implement an always on press office function.

In the first 12 months, The Ideas Suite secured over 160 media stories in national and state media outlets, achieving a (repeat) audience reach of 25.5 million across print and online titles. These included feature stories in tier-one media such as NewsCorp’s MoneyHQ, The Herald Sun, Yahoo!7 Finance, The Sydney Morning Herald, The Age and WA Today. With a focus on small business media and local media, The Ideas Suite also secured publications including The Fairfield Champion, Penrith Press and Gold Coast Bulletin, and lifestyle and trade publications.

Red Balloon

Wed, 01 Apr 2026 04:43:56 GMT

RedBalloon is Australia’s most recognised online booking and gifting service for experiences.

The Ideas Suite provided an always on press office function to meet a specific brief for RedBalloon.

Over eight months, The Ideas Suite secured 130 media placements across print, TV, radio and online outlets, reaching a (repeat) audience 28.3 million. Highlight coverage includes: Ch 9 and ABC TV, Qantas Inflight Radio, The Australian Women’s Weekly; regular monthly coverage in national and state metropolitan newspapers; and product placement in consumer lifestyle media.

Ochre Health

Wed, 01 Apr 2026 04:23:48 GMT

Ochre Health is a network of 31 medical clinics that focuses on providing healthcare in urban, regional and remote communities throughout NSW, QLD, VIC, TAS and the ACT. In partnership with more than 150 doctors, Ochre Health has improved healthcare significantly in Australian communities.

The Ideas Suite provides Ochre Health with an always on local press office program.

In the first six months of PR, The Ideas Suite secured 314 media editorial placements, reaching a total (repeat) audience of 18.5 million. Major local media coverage included Sunshine Coast Daily, Lithgow Mercury and Parkes Champion-Post

CouriersPlease

Tue, 31 Mar 2026 11:40:38 GMT

CouriersPlease is a leading parcel delivery service. It offers a network of POPStation (Pick/Post your Own Parcel) parcel lockers comprising more than 3500 lockers in 45 locations and more than 1000 POPShop retail outlets to enable consumers and businesses to pick up or post their parcels more securely and out of hours.

The Ideas Suite provides an always on press office program for CouriersPlease.

In the first 9 months, The Ideas Suite secured 259 pieces of media coverage. Highlight coverage included the Today show, smh.com.au , theage.com.au and NineMSN. The coverage reached a (repeat) audience of 29.4 million, with the print and broadcast coverage achieving $896,000 in PR value, and a social media audience of 427,000.

GAVL

Tue, 31 Mar 2026 11:26:59 GMT

Gavl is the world’s market leader in real estate auction live streaming and bidding technology. Australian-owned, Gavl has the fastest live streaming technology in the world. Since December 2016, it has attracted more than 3.5 million views across 5000 auctions.

The Ideas Suite provides an always on press office program for Gavl.

In the first seven months, we achieved a total of 91 pieces of media coverage for Gavl across print, online and broadcast. Highlight coverage included the Today show, Australian Financial Review, Forbes magazine, Herald Sun, Realestate.com.au and Domain. The media coverage reached a (repeat) audience of almost 44 million. The total PR value of print coverage alone was more than $500,000.

ALI Group

Tue, 31 Mar 2026 06:51:26 GMT

ALI Group is the leading provider of loan and mortgage protection to Australian property buyers. ALI Group has protected more than 160,000 Australians against death and terminal illness, serious medical conditions and involuntary unemployment – with almost $42 billion provided in cover and almost $65 million paid out in claims.

The Ideas Suite was briefed to run a 4-month campaign to raise awareness of mortgage holder vulnerability in relation to potential redundancy and serious illness, which could negatively impact the ability to continue mortgage repayments. We developed a public awareness campaign, based on an independent survey of mortgage holders, highlighting these issues and how ALI Group’s key product offerings provided protection from financial hardship.

In a four-month campaign period, The Ideas Suite secured 190 media placements, including Sky News Real Estate, News.com.au, The Daily Telegraph, Domain, ABC Tropical North, Mortgage Business and the Real Estate Conversation. The media coverage reached a (repeat) audience of more than 136 million and an equivalent advertising value of $2.7 million.

HOW PR AND SEO HARMONISE WITH ONE ANOTHER

Thu, 26 Mar 2026 03:27:19 GMT

PR (public relations) and SEO (search engine optimisation) at one time could be considered completely alien to one another in terms of their specific goals and strategies. Now, in today’s digital landscape, the lines between digital PR and SEO begin to blur, with practitioners looking to leverage the best elements of both disciplines in order to achieve success.

Businesses that have engaged the services of an SEO agency are increasingly realising the need to supplement their digital strategy with quality PR work. This is because, as evidenced by Google’s latest algorithmic updates, digital success relies on a sincere and well-managed online reputation rather than on the presence of purely technical optimisation signals.

So, how did this change occur?

This change comes out of necessity, as Google begins to openly place more importance on the authoritative quality of web content rather than its exact match relevance to keyword terms. This means that, in order to get a high ranking in Google’s results page, you need to be developing and distributing high quality, authoritative content that earns you links on other domains.

In this way, the need for authoritative links and high quality content has bound PR and SEO together.

The shared goals of PR and SEO

Creating content that is accurately targeted to the right audience works not only to boost your brand awareness but also encourages people to organically share said content around the internet. Both of these end goals are shared by both PR and SEO practitioners.

The positive connections PR consultants are able to create with influential bloggers and publications are invaluable for any SEO practitioner. This explains why it’s more common to see PR and SEO experts working together on projects that seek to leverage high quality content in exchange for inbound links.

Put simply; PR and SEO , while having different metrics of success, both deal with the management of positive brand awareness through cooperation with other entities.

Managing the intersection of PR and SEO strategies

Communication is critical in any kind of relationship and this is no different when it comes to PR and SEO. This is especially important in circumstances where a PR team must work closely with their SEO counterparts and there is a risk of accidentally doubling up on similar tasks.

Because so many PR and SEO functions go hand in hand, it is advantageous to have adequate correspondence between the two teams. For PR and SEO to work harmoniously, one hand must always know what the other is doing.

Using PR and SEO in concert

As the lines between PR and SEO continue to blur, practitioners are using this knowledge to attract higher quality links to their domains. In recent years, social media platforms such as Twitter and Instagram have become extremely important as vehicles for generating organic buzz around websites.

Inbound links from highly authoritative publications are still highly sought after; however, there is still a lot of opportunity to build relationships with bloggers and social media audiences that also have a valuable impact.

Ultimately, PR and SEO make for a strong collaborative mix of tools and strategies that can rescue even the most obscure brands. As search engine algorithms continue to get smarter and more human-like in how they evaluate web content, the importance of where, when and how that content is distributed becomes ever more important.

This means that while SEO deals with the creation of and optimisation of content, PR manages media coverage and secures the best places for that content to be shared. It’s clear that using PR and SEO in tandem is recommended achieving success in a marketing landscape that’s rewarding quality over quantity.

The Ideas Suite can help you develop a public relations strategy that drive more traffic to your brand. We also help businesses get website hyperlinks included in online articles.

To find out more about how to get these types of stories into your own PR program, call us on (02) 9279 3330 .

FIVE TYPES OF STORIES THAT GIVE YOU THE BEST RETURN ON INVESTMENT

Thu, 26 Mar 2026 03:16:35 GMT

As a public relations agency, we’ve been working hard for more than a decade to deliver media coverage programs for our clients . During this time, our public relations programs have helped secure media coverage across every channel – from TV to radio, trade publications and major newspapers. Along the way, we’ve received feedback from our clients about the best types of coverage that gets them traffic and leads. So, we know a few tips and tricks to help drive traffic to your brand.

Here is our list of the top five types of stories that generate a great return on investment:

1. Customer case studies

Case study stories are powerful lead generators in the media for brands. They provide a ‘human element’ to the story, and show the public that there are real people using a brand, getting real results. They also provide a photo opportunity, or someone to interview on TV, which gets larger editorial space and more airtime.

One of our clients’ websites crashed when we secured a case study story about one of their customers in The Daily Telegraph . The client was a mortgage brand and their customer was able to save $30,000 over the life of their loan after they switched over to our client’s services. The story directed so much traffic to the client’s website, that by midday after the story was published, the client’s website had crashed. Over the years, case study stories have proved to be the single most effective media story for return on investment results.

2. Major radio interviews

Radio is becoming more popular, with more people tuning into commercial radio in 2017 than ever before, according to GfK radio ratings. Radio interviews and recordings for news bulletins are a great way to spruik your brand and get your call to action across the airways. We often secure interviews for our clients on AM and FM radio across the country, and we train them on how to seamlessly get their brand message across. Community radio has also been known to work for clients that have a local focus.

3. Evening current affairs programs

Current affairs programs such as ‘Today Tonight’ and ‘A Current Affair’ have solid audiences and can offer great opportunities for businesses. These shows don’t just chase after the bad guys, they can broadcast positive stories about ways to save money or a new service that is helping consumers solve a problem. These stories are known to drive incredible traffic to brand websites.

4. Localised media placements

If your business services a hyper-local area, community radio and local newspaper placements are a great way to target your audience and drive traffic back to your brand. After we locked in a community radio slot for one of our clients, a naturopath, she booked in five to seven new appointments each time she had a radio interview.

To find out more about how to get these types of stories into your own PR program, call us on (02) 9279 3330

INHOUSE OR AGENCY? WHAT TO CONSIDER WHEN YOU’RE APPLYING FOR A JOB IN PR

Thu, 26 Mar 2026 03:01:47 GMT

For those seeking to work in public relations, not only are there varying roles within the industry, but there is the option to work ‘agency side’ or ‘client side’. The PR industry in Sydney is filled with long-term ‘agency people’, those that have always worked in-house, and some who have tested both sides of the fence to see where the grass is greener. Therefore, there is a long-running debate in the PR and communications industry: “Which is better: Agency or in-house?”

Inevitably, there are major differences between agency and in-house roles, with pros and cons for each in terms of work-life balance, culture, pay and career progression. We list them below.

In-house roles

Pros:

Working in-house, a PR manager is closer to their organisation’s marketing program and its stakeholders. This enables them to learn – and be involved with – various aspects of the organisation, and get PR ideas approved more easily.
In-house roles within larger organisations tend to attract higher salaries than agency roles.
Working in-house can provide a PR manager with better work-life balance and more incentives and rewards.
Working for a well-known brand directly can look very good on a CV.
In-house PR managers often have the opportunity to bring onboard and work with external agencies, who become their outsourced team.
Many mid-sized companies who have an internal PR function have only one or two PR people in their marketing team. This gives the PR manager the opportunity to take on a high level of responsibility, and to shape the PR function.

Cons:

A ‘client side’ PR manager works only on the one brand. This may be a con for those who love variety.
Working on the one brand will also mean they’ll be working only on the PR disciplines that are relevant to that brand – for example, media coverage and stakeholder communications. This may be a disadvantage for those who want to grow their PR skills across different disciplines – such as social media, events, activations and crisis communication.
If a PR manager is the only PR person inside the organisation, there is a risk he or she may feel isolated within the organisation, and will feel the need to continually educate other departments about the value of PR, and how it is measured.
Running a PR program for a single organisation for some time can feel repetitive if the company isn’t innovating in its marketing or its industry
In a small in-house PR department, the opportunities for promotions can be slim.
There are few ‘client side’ PR roles available and they are highly competitive.

Agency:

Pros:

Working ‘agency side’ will give a PR consultant exposure to a variety of brands and industries, and a variety of PR disciplines. This enables the PR consultant to grow quickly in a relatively short space of time.
An agency can move PR consultants between accounts annually to avoid the PR work from feeling staid or repetitive for its consultants.
Many agencies offer bonuses to their staff for bringing on leads that turn into business for the agency.
PR consultants in agencies have a strong team of peers with which to brainstorm ideas, collaborate on strategies, share challenges, and generally discuss day to day issues.
The fluid structure of an agency allows for quicker career progression with ample opportunity to rise through the ranks – and sometimes very quickly. The independent environment will mean PR consultants will manage and mentor juniors as they progress.
PR people with an agency background are in high demand for in-house roles. That’s because clients know that agency people have worked hard, have a record of getting things done quickly, have a proven record of delivering results, and are guaranteed to deliver under pressure.

Cons:

Consultants in PR agencies need to operate at a fast pace, work hard to achieve results, and thrive on some stress. While the experience of working in such an environment is great for one’s PR career, this isn’t for everyone.
As agencies hold multiple clients the demand for work to be completed according to various deadlines presents a lesser opportunity for work-life balance. Agency working weeks can be long and may require late nights in the office from time to time.
Agency salaries are often lower overall than those on ‘client side’, especially for junior roles. However, this is outweighed by the potential career growth rate available in an agency.

At The Ideas Suite , there is always the opportunity to work on something new and exciting. As a boutique Sydney PR agency, we only work with selected clients that we are devoted to. With a minimum of three PR consultants on every account, there is the opportunity for each consultant to invest their time strategically across several clients, as well as collaborate creatively with hard-working, like-minded and self-motivated individuals. We balance a lot of plates, but as an agency that cares wholeheartedly about its staff, when it comes down to what you’re looking for in a career, the opportunity to experience different roles as you climb the PR ladder is hard to pass up

HOW TO CHOOSE THE RIGHT PR AGENCY FOR YOU

Thu, 26 Mar 2026 02:53:20 GMT

PR covers a broad range of communication skills and channels. As such, PR agencies have different specialties – from press office to crisis communications, from activations to social media. Understanding the type of Public relations your brand largely needs, and the market in which you operate, is the first step to ensuring you choose the right PR agency.

If you are looking to grow brand awareness and credibility, an agency that offers you an always-on press office – with social media integration – would be a good fit. Alternatively, you may require a PR agency with the capabilities to launch a full-scale campaign activation to publicise a new product, event or announcement. Or perhaps you need a combination of services, in which case you would choose an agency that can devise a program that not only incorporates a multi-layered PR program, but one that can also guarantee coverage.

The ability to guarantee coverage comes from the agency having previous experience in the space in which your brand operates. The ability for a Public Relations agency to demonstrate success through previous work and results is a good approach to gauging how a particular agency would fit with your brand. At The Ideas Suite, we demonstrate to potential clients our ability to secure results across selected sectors such as travel, e-commerce, health and finance, through the documentation of our results and collection of client case studies including HotelsCombined , Compare the Market and Ochre Health medical centres .

The Ideas Suite is one of the leading Sydney PR agencies that is consistently achieving outstanding results for clients thanks to our relationships with the media, skills in developing a story, PR planning process, and our ability to work autonomously.

Developing rapport with an agency early on is crucial when deciding which agency to partner with, but so too is the understanding that your brand will be looked after and cared for. Choose an agency that doesn’t focus on client volume so much, but rather the attention and team they will give to your PR account. The agency you choose should make your brand feel valuable, not only just at the start but throughout the PR program. Ensure the agency will reliably provide insights and feedback that are honest and useful, and will adjust PR plans in accordance with those recommendations.

Your account should also be serviced by an experienced consultant who has achieved PR results in your industry. For instance, as The Ideas Suite is a boutique agency, principal Julia Nekich dedicates her time to the business and oversees all clients as Account Director. Her in-depth understanding of media through her 10+ years’ experience in public relations and several years in media and publishing is also invaluable to the agency’s accounts.

Don’t be afraid to ask the hard-hitting questions when searching for a new PR agency. For instance, how many accounts will the Account Manager be working on besides your account? What PR results has the agency achieved in your industry? How much of your own time is needed in the PR program? How will the agency report to you? And will the agency lock you into a fixed-term contract?

At The Ideas Suite, we carefully select the clients we work with to ensure we remain press office specialists in the areas of digital disruption, e-commerce, property, travel, health and finance. We don’t lock clients into contracts, and our PR budgets are less than the salary of an internal PR manager. Our self-motivated and dedicated team works around the clock to deliver content, media coverage and results we know our clients’ value.

HOW TO GET THE MOST FROM YOUR PR AGENCY

Thu, 26 Mar 2026 02:45:40 GMT

You might be meeting with public relations agencies to source the one that’s right for your brand. It’s at this time – not after you’ve hired an agency – that you should understand how you can get the most out of them.

While it’s important to look at the range of PR services that your prospective agencies offer, it’s easy to overlook equally important factors such as whether they create strong PR strategies, strong content strategies to ensure media coverage, and detailed PR plans – and do they deliver regular communication, a reporting structure and KPIs. These will make your PR agency responsible for their deliverables and accountable for their results. The last thing any brand wants is for an agency to wait to receive news that they can simply draft into a media release and pitch to media – and if there is no news within the company, they do nothing. Agencies should also find ways to create news.

At the start of any public relations program, a PR agency should develop a detailed month on month PR plan – which clearly shows the scope of work against your PR budget, and exactly what media coverage they will secure, how, and with what message. The PR plan should show how it will meet your brand’s PR and marketing aims, be aligned with your marketing plan, be relevant to your target markets, and be aligned with your positioning and be newsworthy for media.

Having a plan in place provides everyone in your organisation – from investors, to the board, to the marketing team – with an overview of planned PR activity. At the same time, a PR plan should be ‘fluid’ – it should be able to be regularly revised and updated to keep it relevant as your brand grows.

Organising weekly WIP calls with your agency, particularly at the beginning of the program, allows for open communication to discuss the previous and upcoming week’s activity, feedback on what is happening with the PR, what’s working well, and allow for any concerns to be addressed. Once the PR plan has been implemented for some time and the agency is working fairly autonomously on the PR, moving to a fortnightly WIP is beneficial to keep everyone across everything.

Monthly accountability reports and a media results analyses allow you to see the work delivered by your PR agency, and to see the results you’re achieving through PR. It’s important for your PR agency to have a reporting structure as this makes them accountable for their work and provides a measure on activity. It allows everyone to assess the PR and see what is working for the company. By reviewing monthly reports, realistic KPIs can be developed and set, such as securing TV coverage every quarter or getting major news coverage every month.

When you hire a PR agency, your inhouse people should not be busier because you have taken on a PR function. Your agency should not be asking you to deliver news to them every month or asking you to write articles for them. Instead, your agency should be developing newsworthy and relevant stories to come to you with. It’s also a good idea to choose an agency that doesn’t lock you into a fixed-term contract – by having, for instance, a PR service agreement with a 30-day notice period, a PR agency needs to work hard to deliver results every month to keep you on.

As one of Sydney’s most reputable PR agencies , The Ideas Suite doesn’t offer clients fixed contracts and we are transparent in the work we do, and how we secure results. At the start of any PR program, we create a PR plan that our clients approve before we go any further. The plan includes media angles we’ve developed and outlines target audiences for each activity. We have a monthly and quarterly reporting structure that allows both the client and our agency to review our outputs and results each month. Regular WIP calls are also organised for the same time each week or fortnight, to allow both parties to discuss relevant activity.

HOW MUCH MEDIA COVERAGE SHOULD YOU EXPECT FROM YOUR PR BUDGET?

Thu, 26 Mar 2026 02:39:14 GMT

Most brands want their message to appear everywhere in the media when they commission a PR agency. The key to regular media coverage across a broad range of outlets is a targeted strategy that can translate into a schedule of newsworthy media angles. If you are after news media coverage – TV, newspapers, major online sites and radio – your public relations agency will first have to deliver a solid content strategy and content plan suitable for these channels.

How is a content plan developed? A good PR agency can derive newsworthy PR content from your brand assets – such as customer data, website blogs, customer databases, and your own thought leaders. From here they can identify trends, consumer behaviour, opinion pieces – and turn these into months and months of newsworthy media angles, keeping in mind the media targets that are valuable to your brand.

It is important to remember that your PR agency can’t guarantee a specific number of media results. Unlike advertising, they are not buying space. They are pitching story ideas to the news, and the choice is made by the media as to how and if they will cover the story.

A skilled PR consultant, however, should know what is newsworthy and how to create media angles that are on the media agenda regularly. Property, jobs and household savings, for instance, are three themes that get constant press coverage. If your PR plan can tap into these three newsworthy topics, your brand is more likely to get coverage.

It’s also important to remember that certain types of stories may achieve better results than others. News that your business has received significant funding, or the launch of an innovative product, for example, may secure more media coverage than content from your website blog. The key is creating the most newsworthy angle for each story and knowing the right media to target.

Audience is another thing to remember when thinking about media coverage. Lots of media placements targeting a small audience (or the wrong audience) may not be as useful as one piece of coverage targeting a large audience – such as TV news. Quality is better than quantity.

With a strong PR plan and content strategy, your PR agency should be able to deliver at least a dozen media placements every month, depending on your budget. As one of Sydney’s most reputable PR agencies, The Ideas Suite in some months achieves 15 pieces of coverage for a client, while in other months it’s over 50 – which balances out over the PR plan.

At The Ideas Suite, we develop strong PR content strategies and thoroughly plan our PR activities in order to achieve the best results for our clients, no matter their budget. Some of our results include:

1,603 pieces of media coverage for HotelsCombined in a year.
314 pieces of media coverage for Ochre Health medical clinics in just 6 months.
445 pieces of media coverage for Menulog in 11 months.

WHY YOUR PR AGENCY SHOULD BE YOUR SOCIAL AGENCY

Thu, 26 Mar 2026 02:30:49 GMT

We live in the Golden Age of Digital – but it’s an assessment that does not go far enough. The truth is, we live in the Golden Age of Content . It’s a competitive marketplace because content is everywhere we turn, and a brand’s role is to forge a strong path through the clutter that will carry a consumer all the way into its open arms.

The problem is that increasing number of communication channels means brands need specialists in each area to cast the widest – and most effective – net. A brand often appoints specialists in research, media buying, advertising, content production, SEO, PR, social media and more to do so. Having specialist agencies will ensure it has the best of the best in each key area – but does that make for too many chefs in the kitchen and result in a diluted brand message? The reality is also that managing multiple agency relationships requires additional inhouse resources.

It is impossible for an agency to be everything, but by the same token, an agency should be able to skilfully design and implement a strategy across two interrelated channels. Two such channels are the media and social media. If content is king, it’s public relations specialists that are the storytellers. PR people have the ability to turn a message into news and relate it back to a brand. It makes sense, then, that the PR agency that creates news also makes good social media content. Public relations specialists have spent years honing their skills in communicating with different audiences and stakeholders, and they were the people who jumped into social media with two feet while others were still dipping a toe in the water. They were ready and willing to go wider and deeper into the 360-degree world of communications, to enable brands to utilise as many channels as possible. A brand can also expect to pay less for a reputable agency to manage both its PR and social than it would for two specialist agencies.

Brands want to feel reassured their chosen agency can deliver PR results, but also trust that the PR agency will wave that red flag if something won’t work. Being at the forefront of the changing media landscape, a PR consultant knows a stunt is not going to get the same PR mileage today as it would have 10 years ago. That doesn’t necessarily mean the stunt shouldn’t happen. Chances are that there’s an audience on social media ready to lap it up.

So, what should a brand look for in a combined PR and social media agency? The agency’s people should be great at storytelling, creating engaging content, have exemplary skills in the area, meticulous attention to detail and responsiveness, a continuous flow of ideas to engage social audiences, and be able to speak the brand’s language. Another skill that a PR agency has that is often overlooked: it is believed that 40 per cent of complaints are made online . It’s the PR agency that can monitor and manage complaints and rogue customers. Crises often start with complaints online, and it’s PR people who are most adept at crisis communication.

They say you can’t have the best of both worlds, but the bottom line is this: a PR agency can do PR and social and bring numerous benefits to the agency’s brand strategy.

WHY INCLUDE THOUGHT LEADERSHIP IN YOUR PR PROGRAM?

Thu, 26 Mar 2026 02:25:59 GMT

Media relations is one of the larger pieces of the public relations pie because it gets a brand into communication channels with high-volume audiences, and it is often more powerful for a third-party (journalist) to write about a brand favourably than for a brand to talk about itself in advertising.

A strong media relations program might comprise company announcements and the findings from a brand’s own research. To take it to another level, however, thought leadership is a strong tactic. In the hands of a highly qualified expert and a skilled PR agency, a thought leadership program can have media calling a company for comment several times a week.

If the thought leader can back up their commentary with research and some evidence, they will earn trust and respect from their audience and particular journalists. To ensure the media will continuously use the thought leader for commentary, the PR agency will need to build up an industry expert as a media commentator over time. Journalists trusting their insights puts them on the front foot and ahead of the competition.

A thought leader doesn’t necessarily have to be the company’s CEO, but it is advisable that they are in a leadership position at the organisation. That person will need to be somewhat agile, have passion, and enjoy the limelight – but most importantly, this person needs to have opinions and insights on the industry they operate in.

If you are interested in committing to thought leadership as a PR strategy, work with your PR agency to identify the most effective thought leader and ensure they receive in-depth media training and coaching to prepare them for stardom.

You should not put forward more than one person from your organisation as an industry thought leader in the media. Thought leadership can also be used beyond PR – it is the perfect content to push out on your business’ own B2B blog or through LinkedIn’s Pulse.

If your goal is to become an overnight sensation, it might not be the strategy for you. Your profile as a thought leader takes time to gain momentum but when it does, the PR result is worth its weight in gold.

A thought leadership program builds up over time and complements PR programs that utilise research. As a leading Sydney PR agency , we roll out thought leadership PR strategies for many of our retainer clients here at The Ideas Suite. One client’s commentary was featured as the cover story of Sydney’s major metropolitan paper The Daily Telegraph, which caused a chain reaction: he was interviewed on 2GB and by Channel 7 News that very same day. This is the kind of magic that a thought leadership strategy can offer you.

A DAY IN THE LIFE: THE INTERN EDITION

Thu, 26 Mar 2026 02:20:58 GMT

Interning is by no means making and fetching coffees like the movies might suggest! Interning gives you the opportunity to gain experience on the tasks that a junior PR practitioner would do. Every agency will have different internship programs, but all have the same goal and purpose: to help prepare you for PR success (a PR consulting career).

So what does a typical day look like for an intern – and how do you excel in your work experience program and impress the company you’re with?

Every day is completely different, but the first and most important thing to do each day is to make a list of all the tasks to be completed and prioritise them. My usual first task of the day is to join the team in the daily media review. Now onto task 2: media monitoring. Some interns may see this as a tedious task, but it is actually interesting to see the types of results we get during and after a campaign! Media monitoring involves searching for coverage relevant to your clients and placing information regarding the coverage on a document. It must be done accurately in order to effectively measure the success of a story or campaign.

It’s not quite lunch time yet…time for another task! I have been given an urgent task to do: quickly help draft some social media posts. I scroll through Instagram, create a few potential captions and the task is complete. After lunch, I commence a more challenging task: drafting a media release. As an intern, writing a media release is still relatively new and challenging. But as they say, practice makes perfect! I dedicate a few hours of my time to draft and edit this media release and move on to my final task of the day: research. Researching can be exciting as it is not often you research the same thing. You may be asked to research anything from past campaigns to finding influencers for upcoming campaigns. Researching will likely involve lots of reading and possibly even watching videos!

Interns are not always at an agency full time, so it is extremely important to let your team members know the status of the tasks they give you. At the end of each day, I let each team member know which tasks I have completed and ask what must be prioritised for the following day. I farewell my colleagues and look forward to another day.

Each day is new, exciting and filled with plenty to do! You will never be bored as someone will always have a task for you. If, for some strange reason, you find yourself with nothing to do, be proactive and just ask. But most of all, enjoy your internship and make the most of it as a learning experience.

HOW PR CAN MEET YOUR SEO GOALS

Thu, 26 Mar 2026 02:18:20 GMT

The shifting media landscape means we’re looking at screens more and pages less. These days, major brands are more worried about SEO and online branding and reputation than they are about column inches, and that means the role of the PR agency is changing.

Everyone’s goal is to sit on the first page of Google paired with the right message. As a result, outlets are investing a lot more into their own SEO, which has a direct result on the placement of your brand search results.

Of all the PR tips out there, this one is paramount: A proactive, ‘always on’ press office program can give you an online presence beyond your website and social media on multiple high-traffic websites. We’re talking about the sites with monthly unique traffic in the millions that populate the first few pages of Google under your brand’s search name. These sites are considered authoritative because they have a large audience.

We are experts in securing coverage for our clients on the top news sites in Australia. We’ve seen first-hand how one news.com.au story with the right messages can draw hundreds of customers to our clients’ websites. Knowing how important it is to understand the key focus areas of our clients, we work closely with them to develop a strategic PR campaign or plan based on their overall business goals.

First and foremost, the role of a PR consultant is to sell in news. If your goal is to promote a new product or service within your business, let your PR team craft the best possible story with a strong news hook and let them consult with your SEO team on what’s needed to help drive traffic. The best PR campaigns have the potential to drive traffic to dedicated pages on your website so why wouldn’t you utilise it to do so?

At the end of the day, when it comes to SEO and PR success, Google is smarter than most of us and prioritises good marketing like media coverage. No PR agency or consultant can guarantee you improved SEO off the back of PR efforts, but it can work effectively in tandem with your SEO strategy to ensure you have the best web presence to attract leads.

THE IDEAS SUITE REBRANDS

Thu, 26 Mar 2026 02:15:22 GMT

We are celebrating our 10th anniversary this year, and have undergone a brand refresh of our logo, a new website and new internal marketing collateral.

Our logo has been completely overhauled to look more modern and a gold accent has been used to convey excellence and the premium service you receive from our team.

Video backgrounds on homepages are a design trend for websites, with major brands such as Lexus, Cue and Nike showcasing video on their sites, as well as Facebook now allowing some pages to upload cover videos rather than static images. We also drive video content through our clients’ social media strategies. With this in mind, we cast a model and engaged a videographer to shoot unique footage that was distinctly ‘PR’ with our direction. Our website is now full-screen and mobile responsive.

We’ve also updated our credentials presentation document and other marketing collateral. To congratulate us on our 10th anniversary or to get in touch about our service, please contact us today.

THE IDEAS SUITE LAUNCHES SOCIAL MEDIA

Thu, 26 Mar 2026 02:12:54 GMT

We quietly launched The Ideas Suite’s social media arm in mid-2016 with our Senior Account Manager, Alannah Green, appointed as the agency’s Social Media Manager.

Prior to The Ideas Suite, Alannah managed the social media accounts for Cartoon Network Australia, New Zealand and Asia; Warner TV Asia; Oh!K TV Asia and Toonami Asia, where she grew likes organically by more than 650% across these pages in less than six months. She also managed the accounts for MTV PR Australia and New Zealand as well as the Australian Subscription Television and Radio Association, Dally M and Australian Museum Eureka Prize award nights and opening events.

Julia Nekich, Principal and Founder of The Ideas Suite , says: “The role of PR is changing and few boutique PR agencies run social media management in-house. Our clients were seeking a greater digital footprint and social presence on top of their press office results, and didn’t want the additional work of onboarding and directing multiple agencies. Alannah’s experience in PR-driven social media allowed us to expand and fill this gap in the market.”

Social media provides businesses with a channel that allows for two-way communication with customers as well as a channel that enables them to speak with their target market directly. Additionally, our clients know and trust us as skilled crisis management experts, and entrust their public-facing communications to our agency in these instances.

Providing social media strategy and management to our current portfolio of PR clients as well as new clients on both a retainer and project basis, our social media work spans the hospitality, fashion, travel and real estate sectors.

For further information about how social media managed by The Ideas Suite can help your business, contact us today.

GUIDE TO GETTING STARTED ON THE SPEAKING CIRCUIT

Thu, 26 Mar 2026 02:06:23 GMT

If an important part of your PR is to showcase your knowledge and expertise in front of a business audience, then speaking engagements can be an important part of the program your PR agency designs. Consider speaking at events run by industry associations that represent target businesses; trade shows that attract them (but you may need to purchase a stand), chambers of commerce, and networking events. If you are a consumer-facing business, expos may be a good avenue, but you will very likely be asked to buy a stand before you are considered as a speaker, unless you have a strong public profile.

Large blue-chip organisations regularly run events for their own clients and look externally for speakers. Your PR agency should also approach these. Speaker bureaus are another a good avenue, but you must already have a strong public profile to be considered by them.

DO YOU SEEK PAYMENT?

Normally, if you have a strong public profile and your speaking engagement will attract ticket sales for the event, you will likely receive some payment by the event organiser. If you are paid, however, the event organiser might control of your speech or presentation, and events that pay might not attract your own target audiences. Decide what’s most important to you: to get in front of your target audience with your own message, or to be paid to speak about a prescribed topic to an audience that are not potential customers.

When an opportunity without payment arises, the event organiser will usually allow you to market yourself more openly at the event in return for donating your time – in the form of flyers placed on seats, book sales, logo placement and even a couple of promotional lines in your presentation. Often this kind of PR can be more beneficial for a business than payment.

HOW YOU CAN GET STARTED

There are a few things that any event organiser or speaker bureau will ask for when you, or your PR agency, approach them as a potential speaker:

a good bio outlining your qualifications and experience in your industry
3-5 speaking topics
testimonials from individuals who have heard you speak
video footage of you speaking at a previous event
your fees (for speaker bureaus only)
your own book (even if self published) will help open doors.

FOUR TIPS TO SECURE A SPEAKING ENGAGEMENT:

Know who your target market is. To maximise results for your business, it is important to know your target audience.
Source organisations and associations that hold events for this particular target market. Your PR agency will look for industry associations, organisations, networking groups and event organisers that create events targeting this same audience.
Know what you want to speak about. Offer the event organisers three topics that you can speak about. If you are serious about these events bringing you leads, then make sure your speaking topics relate to your business service offerings. You are then positioning yourself as an expert in this service.
Structure your presentation. It is a good idea to back up your talk with a PPT presentation or visuals, to create more interest and illustrate your points. Allow 10 minutes for questions or a forum, if the event will allow it.

The Ideas Suite is one of the rare Sydney PR agencies that has a track record of speaking engagements secured for brand spokespeople. Call us today on (02) 9279 3330 to arrange a speaker program for your company.

HIGHLY TARGETED MEDIA LIST OR BROAD LIST?

Thu, 26 Mar 2026 01:59:10 GMT

A comprehensive, targeted and up-to-date media list is the foundation for any PR campaign that focuses on media coverage.

A media list doesn’t begin with the media contacts – you must firstly have a good understanding of who your campaign is targeting. Define your audience by its demographic and geographic: high-net worth individuals Australia-wide? Urban working women in capital cities? Average-income mums and dads in regional areas? Job-seekers in Sydney and Melbourne? This is insight your marketing department should have. If you don’t have marketing, know who buys or uses your product or service and what they would be reading, watching or listening to.

Your media list should comprise those media outlets that target the same readers, viewers or listeners that your PR campaign does.

KNOW YOUR MEDIA CHANNELS AND CATEGORIES

There are numerous media channels, and categories (genres) within these channels. Within the four major media channels of print, TV, radio and online, you will need to assess whether the following categories should be included in your campaign: women’s, men’s, IT, finance, business, residential property, commercial property, economics, parenting, food, health, wellness, fitness, early general news, current affairs, interior decorating, bridal, fashion, beauty, cars, hospitality… the list goes on.

A public relations campaign works best when its PR consultants know the media outlets in depth and the topics its journalists or producers prefer to report on. This comes with experience, staying on top of what’s being reported in media outlets, knowing who is doing the reporting, and their opinions.

RELEVANCE

While compiling your media list, ensure that your PR campaign messages are relevant to the media contacts you are targeting. There’s nothing that irritates a journalist or producer more than receiving a press release that is unsuitable for their readers, is too promotional, or contains news that is not covered by that media outlet. It is not a good media relationship-building exercise either.

For instance, if you are raising awareness about a new tech gadget, there’s no point adding radio to your list, as the product can’t be showcased through radio (unless it is a well known brand and you want to run a promotion, or you are attaching a celebrity to the brand name). Likewise, there’s no point adding hard-news contacts if there aren’t any hard news angles. You will need visual mediums: tech and consumer magazines, tech newspaper supplements, online tech and consumer media.

SMALL, TARGETED MEDIA LIST OR LONGER LIST?

There are some schools of thought that a small, targeted media list is most effective. Butthe aim of any PR campaign is to saturate the market with its messages, so wide not develop a list that’s as wide as possible?

Having said that, pitching to a broad media list doesn’t mean you simply broaden your list. It means creating PR messages that will be relevant to a broad list. Even so, you may then need to create tailored press releases for each media category. Say your PR campaign is targeting women’s print media, morning TV, current affairs TV, and talkback radio. It may be difficult to generate interest with one blanket pitch. Tailor the press release for each category to maximise relevance to their audience and news style.

Could contributor pieces help meet your PR goals?

Thu, 26 Mar 2026 01:53:20 GMT

Bylined articles (or, even better, a regular column) in well-known target media sites are an attractive PR tactic for many businesspeople, and for good reason:

Bylined articles help grow your personal brand
It assists in growing awareness of your business and services
It helps position you as an ‘expert’ on the topics you write about
Linked back to your website, they can increase the Google ranking of your site
They help cement your credibility and that of your business
They help back up your credentials and impress customers – many businesses add published stories to their websites and marketing collateral
It can often be the first step towards regular speaking engagements or your own book!

ARE BYLINED ARTICLES FOR ME?

Article contributions are not for everyone. You do need to enjoy writing, have a flair for it, and have a strong opinion on a topical issue in your industry. You also need to ensure you have the time to write them. Yes, you can get your PR agency to edit them, but the content and opinion needs to come from you, as the media are often interested in knowledge-driven, opinion-driven pieces by qualified individuals. Don’t expect the media to pay for an article – paid articles are usually reserved for high-profile people whose presence in the media helps lift the media profile too and attracts eyeballs.

WHICH MEDIA OUTLETS TO TARGET

Your PR agency should target the media outlets whose readership matches your own target audience. For your own benefit, the media should also be open to listing a brief author’s bio and website link alongside his/her name. And know the media outlet: your articles will need to match its focus, tone and style.

WHAT TO WRITE ABOUT

Think about why you want a published article in the first place. If it’s to generate leads, it might be a good idea to share strategies and tactics – linked directly to your customer benefits – about your goods/services. Perhaps add your own case study example at the end, showing how you did it. It might sound like you are giving away too much, but this kind of free prescriptive information (ie, value to readers) is what the media is looking for if they are to give you editorial space.

If the purpose of the article is to grow your profile as a leading expert in your field, then focus on thought leadership articles. Know the topical issues that are being reported on in your industry – and stick to issues within your industry. The media won’t consider you qualified to speak about an issue that you don’t specialise in through your work or business. To get interest and cut through, have a well-qualified point of view that is a bit different from the mainstream.

Whichever type of article you go for, it’s important that you don’t blatantly promote your business in it. It’s not an ad, and many editors will reject an article that is promotional. Your brand is promoted through the bio and web URL – and perhaps your photo – that runs after your article. It’s a worthwhile tactic for your PR agency to include in their program for your company.

The Ideas Suite is a Sydney PR agency that has tried, tested and honed media strategies for a range of brands for 10 years. We have a deep understanding of the angles, themes, topics and types of spokespeople that get cut through in the media. Talk to us about securing a good media presence for your company.

BENEFITS OF INFLUENCERS FOR YOUR BRAND

Thu, 26 Mar 2026 01:46:57 GMT

The market of brand influencers has exploded and become so saturated in recent years that it’s important to sift through and differentiate between influencers who can benefit your brand and those who won’t help your brand in any way.

There is an interesting relationship between influencers and their followers, unlike anything we’ve seen before. They’ve developed strong relationships with their audience and built up a level of trust that is favourable for brands. At The Ideas Suite , we recommend consumer brands work with influencers on Instagram as its visual nature allows for minimal effort and ease for followers to engage with content.

Many people look at the number of followers an influencer has as the deciding factor on whether they’ll be an effective influencer for your brand. While followers in the thousands may look impressive, the key is to look for high engagement among the follower base. This gives you an indication of the power and strength an influencer has with their followers, and will therefore enable your brand to work with someone that has a strong connection with their audience. It can be tempting to engage an ‘A-list’ influencer when a mid-level influencer with a smaller following but strong engagement can get your brand more engagement.

In a saturated influencer market, finding genuine influencers has never been more important. Find people who really love your brand and products, and be weary of those just working for a pay cheque, looking for a freebie or seeing this as an opportunity to simply grow their social page or their own profile. The influencer you want should relate to your target market and also have followers who align with your brand. There’s no point in engaging with a high-fashion influencer with a following of similar tastes if your brand sits within the fast fashion space. You’ll be wasting your efforts on an audience whose values and interests are opposite to your product offering.

In your search for influencers, look at the quality of an influencer’s content and see whether it fits with your brand. A great match between influencer and brand will look more authentic to their followers and create greater trust in the product being advertised. You also want to make sure that their style of content and brands they work with don’t overshadow or hide your own brand. You want your brand to be the core focus rather than drowning in a sea of other things.

While many influencers are still happy with gifting, a large majority of A-list influencers ask for payment. It’s important to weigh up the dollar worth of sponsoring an influencer, by looking at their engagement and who they’re reaching. We recommend you work with experienced social influencer specialists such as The Ideas Suite, if you’re seeking to run a successful influencer campaign based on product gifting. We are able to use our experience and knowledge of influencers in the market to provide you with proven best results.

The social and public relations advantages from using influencers are immense. Some brands actually use their influencer programs in their product look books. This can be a great way for businesses who are just starting out or have minimal budget, to have beautiful images that showcase their products. Not only can it cut down on budget by not having to hire a photographer and model, it also allows your customers to see the products on everyday people and in a real-life context.

Some considerations when working with influencers:

Pitch widely among the right influencer categories. This can be a good way of getting your brand out there to the highest audience possible
Be selective. If you’re working with a small budget, target a few influencers who really align with the brand and have great engagement.
Influencers aren’t just for big businesses. Even small businesses who don’t have a high budget can benefit from influencer marketing.

PR AND STORYTELLING: USING A STORY TO BUILD YOUR BRAND

Wed, 25 Mar 2026 09:16:28 GMT

There are few things more compelling than a well-told story. Regardless of whether it is a favourite movie, riveting novel, thoughtfully-crafted Facebook post or stunning theatre production, a good story has the power to remove your sense of time and momentarily sweep you into another world.

For companies, having an evocative and compelling brand story and, vitally, communicating this effectively to key audiences and customers, is an invaluable asset. The narrative of your company’s values, beliefs and mission can provide a stronger connection to your customers, and help your business stand out in a crowded marketplace.

What makes a good brand story? There are several elements central to every thrilling narrative that can be incorporated into your brand communications. Every compelling story has a hero, and your brand’s could be a CEO, founder, ambassador or groundbreaking product. Another element central to all good stories is a narrative structure, comprising a beginning, conflict and resolution. Your brand story should speak to your company’s founding, history, objectives and core values, as well as its unique journey to pioneer a product or service that provides the solution to a need or problem. Finally, in today’s advertising landscape, where customers are relentlessly bombarded with brand messages online and offline, consistency, and having a seamless message that translates coherently across channels, is a game changer. Your social media pages, website, shop-front and media outreach are all chapters in a brand story read by customers.

PR can be an invaluable tool in helping you tell a consistent and intriguing brand story, providing multiple benefits for your company’s relationship with customers, employees and other stakeholders. A tailored PR strategy can help bring your brand story to life through a variety of tactics and communication channels. From drafting a media release detailing a company announcement or the launch of a new product, to securing speaking engagements or event sponsorship, PR can ensure you get the right message in front of your target audience.

In addition, PR can also strengthen your existing marketing arms, and, unlike traditional advertising avenues, has the added benefit of providing credibility to your brand message, delivering it through news content and channels that customers already trust.

PRINT, ONLINE AND BROADCAST MEDIA – WHICH ARE THE MOST EFFECTIVE OUTLETS FOR BRANDS?

Wed, 25 Mar 2026 09:10:34 GMT

Achieving positive editorial coverage with a strong brand message across major media outlets is often an important marketing goal for brands. If a news outlet deems a brand’s story interesting or relevant to their audience, they will publish the story across their print, online or broadcast media platform. Featuring in editorial content can only be achieved for a business by developing strong relationships with news outlets. It is not something which can be purchased, such as paid advertising.

So which media outlets is best for brands to pitch their story to?

BROADCAST MEDIA

On radio, a brand’s story must be portrayed wholly through audio. The time slot for a radio story is often short, and with no visuals to accompany it, so the story must be extremely sharp to grab the attention of a listener.

In contrast, TV obviously depends on visuals so requires the pitch to include exactly what the brand can offer to shoot. If a brand cannot offer a radio outlet engaging and relevant audio, and likewise a TV outlet with eye catching footage, it probably isn’t the right choice of medium for them.

ONLINE MEDIA

Maintaining a strong online presence helps a brand improve their search engine optimisation (SEO). Online media can include unlinked mentions of a brand or backlinks to the brand on a well-known website such as a news outlet, press releases and securing major feature stories, or even an influencer mentioning a brand on social media.

One of the major benefits of online media is its capacity to reach a wider audience. If a business is trying to expand into broader markets, online media is a great choice. Further, digital features or backlinks can help increase website traffic. The chances of someone clicking on a link which takes them directly to a brand’s website is far more likely, as opposed to someone reading a billboard or newspaper and then getting on a device and searching for the brands website.

PRINT MEDIA

Believe it or not, print is not dead! In fact, print media still plays a significant role in the public relations mix. From newspapers and magazines, consumers still rely on print media as a trusted and reliable form of communication.

Print is one of the oldest mediums to exist and has traditionally provided consumers with credible and reliable news and information. Incorporating print media into a brand’s public relations strategy can help consumers develop a sense of trust in a brand and held uphold a brand’s reputation. This may be beneficial for a brand seeking to build their reputation or recover from a reputational crisis.

Online content can be extremely distracting for users. Many consumers do not completely take in the information they’re being presented, due to the distraction of having multiple browser tabs open and busy audio and visuals. Print media can help slow down the information process and allows the consumer to take in the information in more detail. In this sense, print media can be extremely beneficial if a brand’s information is complex or lengthy as it can allow the user to process the information in more depth. Print can also be beneficial for a brand seeking out a specific niche market – for example, depending on the age demographic, a brand may find that a newspaper targets older demographics better, or perhaps a billboard strategically placed near a construction site aims to target local trades people whilst they work.

If your brand is seeking exposure in major media outlets in Australia, Sydney PR agency The Ideas Suite has strong media contacts and the skills to package your story to grab their interest. Contact us today.

WHY BRANDS ARE BEST TO STAY POLITICALLY NEUTRAL

Wed, 25 Mar 2026 09:03:20 GMT

Social media platforms and digital technologies have allowed people to share their political beliefs faster, more easily and to a larger audience than ever before. Increasing political views online are no longer just reflected through traditional media outlets, but the general public through online forums, chat groups, media sites and social media platforms. Politics ultimately evokes emotion in humans. This means expressing one’s political views can see them gain significant media traction and attention, and quickly put them in the spotlight.

Some brands might therefore ask: If sharing political views can achieve such high levels of attention and media traction, should my business do the same?

The short answer is no . Participating in political conversation is risky for a brand’s reputation and credibility.

One of the major dangers in involving your brand in politics is the potential for the facts to be wrong. It can be easy to accidentally leave out information or misinterpret the facts, especially with the amount of fake news around. Recovering from this sort of crisis can be extremely lengthy and costly, to the point a business may never fully recover.

Taking a political stand can also instantly alienate sections of the community and see customers boycott a product or service if the brand’s political position does not align with their own. Many audiences automatically have a negative view towards politics in general, so when political messaging is incorporated into a brand’s marketing or public relations strategy, customers are going to become suspicious of the brand’s level of credibility. Some customers may see a brand taking a political stance as manipulative, brainwashing, opportunistic or exploitative.

Whilst taking a political stance is generally not a good idea, it is important to remember there is a big difference between supporting politics and maintaining corporate social responsibility. For example, it would not be wise for a brand to support or promote a political party, politician or celebrity in favour of environmental change. However, promoting the good work the brand does in reducing its global footprint, such as using recyclable packaging, would be well received by the public.

In summary, the safest option for a brand is to stay apolitical. If a brand does decide to involve itself in politics, the views should be relevant to the brand, extremely well researched and cautious of its audience.

If your brand is seeking public relations advice, contact Sydney PR agency The Ideas Suite today.

MEDIA VS PUBLIC RELATIONS: WHAT’S THE DIFFERENCE?

Wed, 25 Mar 2026 08:53:23 GMT

Whether you’re looking at implementing a business marketing strategy or trying to decide what degree to study at university, it helps to understand the part media relations plays in a public relations strategy. To help save time, money and confusion, we have explained the two.

PUBLIC RELATIONS

Public relations is the process of managing all communications elements between an organisation and its audiences. These could include, but are not limited to, any relevant stakeholders such as customers, prospective customers, employees, investors, unions, governments and suppliers. A public relations strategy encompasses many different processes and activities to help publicise a brand’s story, mission or goals. For example, some of the activities which a public relations agency such as The Ideas Suite can offer an organisation include:

Media Exposure and Media Management
Media Training
Issue and Crisis Management
Promotions
Social Media
Advertising
Social Media Promotions
Social Influencer Engagements
Sponsorships
Email Campaigns
Stakeholder Announcements
Stakeholder Issues and Crisis Management
Copywriting

These activities help an organisation connect with their customers and stakeholders and build credibility within their markets. One of the greatest advantages of an effective public relations strategy that includes these types of activities is the ability to gain new customers. Successful public relations activities can significantly increase market reach and help customers discover more about a brand, which ultimately builds greater trust in the brand.

Media Relations

Media relations can be just one single element of a wider public relations strategy. Media relations focuses on delivering news and current affairs through media outlets such as radio, television, newspapers and online news platforms. Media relations involves developing effective relationships with media outlets to help promote an organisation to the public. This can play a crucial role in building brand awareness, increasing credibility and establishing relationships with new customers. If a newspaper, radio or television outlet believe your service or product is interesting enough to publish a story on it, the public is likely to as well.

Another benefit of a strong media relations program or campaign is increased online business traffic and improved search engine optimisation (SEO). An effective public relations strategy which incorporates media relations can help increase the amount of times the public visit a company’s website or social media pages. Often media outlets will publish a story which provides a link to the social media or website referred to in the article. This is known as backlinking. When a member of the public clicks on that link, they are taken straight to the website or social media page which, in turn, increases the company’s online traffic. Improved search engine optimisation increases the visibility of an organisation’s website or social media page when people search for specific terms.

Effective media relations can also be extremely beneficial and play a crucial role in crisis management. In the unfortunate event of an organisational crisis, if the crisis is not controlled effectively through the media, the organisation is at risk of serious reputational damage. Having strong relationships with the media can help control the message portrayed to the public.

A public relations agency such as The Ideas Suite can help an organisation gain media exposure and effectively manage media relations. We have extensive relationships with the media and meet regularly with journalists and producers. Our media releases are designed for high-volume coverage in major media to specifically match a brand’s audience.

WHAT ARE THE BENEFITS OF PARTNERING WITH A PR AGENCY?

Wed, 25 Mar 2026 08:45:22 GMT

I’m sure we can all agree that no matter what industry, the overarching goal of any business is increased profitability. One of the key factors to increased profitability and driving success is customer satisfaction. If customers are unhappy with the product or service they are receiving, a business will likely fail.

So how do we achieve optimum customer satisfaction?

While there are many elements to customer satisfaction, one of the most important elements to gaining and retaining customers is trust. An effective public relations strategy can help any business build trust through third-party promotion or publicity. If a customer sees a product or service endorsed by another company, by another person, online, on display or through the media, they will develop confidence in the brand and be convinced to make a purchase.

One of the easiest and most successful ways to implement an effective public relations strategy is by hiring a public relations agency such as The Ideas Suite. Here at The Ideas Suite, we seek to improve brand reputation, brand awareness and relationships with key business stakeholders. Businesses can be assured they have a structured public relations plan which includes media pitching strategies, daily reporting, multiple media and social media monitoring points and help with generating marketing and content ideas.

In an increasingly digitalised world, customers expect timely updates, information and news about a brand’s offerings. Hiring a public relations agency relieves the pressure for business owners and ensures the work is left to the professionals. A public relations agency provides expertise and the right resources to drive success and achieve the bottom line. One of the key benefits of hiring a public relations agency is having access to a wide range of up-to-date media contacts, something which brands themselves simply won’t have. Channeling a business’s message to the correct media outlets is crucial in reaching the right markets and demographics. Furthermore, understanding how to write a story and pitch to the media is a critical skill which a public relations agency offers. If the media feel they are simply being sold a product or service, they will not publish the story. The story needs to be newsworthy, while still promoting the brand.

In an ideal world, a business would run smoothly without any issues or hiccups along the way. The reality, however, is often far from that. The pandemic has shown that no matter how prepared a business is, unexpected issues can arise. During times of crisis, having a public relations agency on hand ready to react and respond to a crisis ensures a business is prepared for any events that could threaten the organisation’s reputation, including the relationships with its stakeholders. A public relations agency can help craft communications that assuage all impacted stakeholders and ensure the message is received clearly and accurately. This can also help avoid any unnecessary or negative media attention, such as false or misleading information. Often crises can occur online, particularly on platforms such as social media. This is due to the nature of citizen journalism and the unregulated and uncontrolled nature of the platforms. PR agencies can monitor these channels regularly by setting up media monitoring tools to quickly pick up on any irregularities or issues occurring across a business’s online activity.

WHY A PR INTERNSHIP IS ESSENTIAL BEFORE GRADUATING A COMMS DEGREE

Wed, 25 Mar 2026 07:02:16 GMT

By Gillian Morgan, Account Executive at The Ideas Suite

Let’s be real. If you’re studying a communications degree, you would probably already have an idea of the competitiveness of securing a job after graduation. Many universities provide the opportunity for students to take part in an internship alongside uni, whereas some will encourage you to seek experience on your own.

You might be thinking: Surely, I can get a job with a PR agency once I have my degree in hand?

Not only will that be difficult but solely relying on your degree to propel you into the workforce is unlikely to prepare you for what you’ll actually be expected to do in a grad position.

Isabella and I will be talking about our internship experiences and giving you advice on preparing yourself for the comms industry.

ISABELLA’S PR AGENCY INTERNSHIP LESSONS

Isabella has just finished her communications degree at the University of Technology Sydney and has been working part-time at The Ideas Suite while on the last legs of her degree. In her second year of her studies, Isabella interned at a boutique PR agency in Sydney for some hands-on experience. Isabella said that the best thing her internship did for her was give her the opportunity to network. “I cannot emphasise enough how important building a professional network is. All my recent opportunities are from networking and if you are able to give yourself that head start before you graduate, life will be so much easier when it comes to finding a job.”

Isabella also says that through her internship she has learnt the importance of attention to detail “University will teach you to be a good writer, but I believe experience will teach you to become a great one,” she says.

MY OWN PR AGENCY EXPERIENCE

I am currently in my third year of my journalism/communications dual degree and majoring in public relations. With the advantage of carrying dual citizenship and having great contacts, I took part in a full-time internship overseas in Singapore for six months in my second year of uni. Working in a different country was not only a big adjustment to my lifestyle but an interesting introduction to the operation of the media overseas.

There are many negative preconceptions about internships and the amount of knowledge and quality experience you are likely to receive. Hence, why I chose to do my internship full-time. If you are only interning once a week over a couple of months, employers are likely to not invest as much time into involving you in their operations and you may get stuck with tasks such as tidying up or doing the coffee runs. However, if you dedicate to full-time work over a shorter time period (I suggest over the mid-year or Christmas break, so it doesn’t interfere with studies) your employers and team are more likely to teach you the back-end systems and involve you in accounts as well as allow you to be part of client meetings.

Below, I list some of the things you might learn as an intern in a PR agency:

Time management and organisational skills when meeting deadlines
Media monitoring
Writing blogs and simple media releases
PR results reports
Social media content creation
How to source and compile media coverage
Agency operations
Contributing to brainstorming meetings
Liaising with media and influencers
Supporting clients with launches and other events
Generating media contact lists
Proofreading and editing media releases

TIPS FROM JULIA, THE IDEAS SUITE AGENCY DIRECTOR

Julia has been working in the PR industry in Sydney for 17 years and here she shares some of her tips as an employer.

Julia says that employers can be a little reluctant to employ uni graduates without prior PR experience, as there is often a lack of agencies resources to train graduates from the ground up. In some cases, graduates may have not had adequate experience in certain programs and office skills, and therefore may not be confident in general office procedures, using Microsoft Office, keeping records, corresponding confidently and effectively, and contributing to meetings.

A majority of consultancies operate from Windows, while uni students are more likely to have been working from Macs over the course of their degree. So having familiarity with a Windows PC and applications is a must when applying for a role in communications.

Internships also teach you good email etiquette and phone manner which ultimately helps build confidence when communicating with journalists and other industry professionals.

Another thing that is important to note is the laws when it comes to internships. Australian companies cannot legally offer unpaid internships – only when it is required to fulfil a university subject. For anything beyond that, your employer is required to pay you minimum wage with casual loading. Beware of agencies that try to get around this law.

HOW TO GET VALUE OUT OF YOUR INTERNSHIP AT A PR AGENCY

Sometimes internships can be a little unfulfilling in terms of the work load you are given. There is no point doing an internship that doesn’t teach you anything, so it is important to take initiative when you do go out on your internship. You can do this by asking for more responsibility. Learn how to use the necessities such as Excel, PowerPoint, Word and other platforms your agency may use such as media monitoring and media contact databases.

It also might be helpful putting your hand up for the PR Agency’s own social media account management. You may find that many agencies get so busy, they forget to make time for their own brand. This will not only show your initiative and be a big help to the team, but it will help familiarise you with content creation – another great skill to have.

It’s a good idea to also ask for deadlines when given tasks, as well as proofreading or editing tasks. This will help you become a more efficient worker and have a sharper eye for detail – two things that employers will look for in interviews.

IT’S NOW TIME TO GET OUT THERE!

Hopefully, this has given you the confidence boost you need to get out there and seek your first or next internship. Remember, we all have to start somewhere and the experience you develop before you finish your studies will not only help you get your foot in the door but build your confidence and connections within the industry.

Crafting narratives in a digital world: The evolution of Public Relations (PR)

Wed, 25 Mar 2026 06:55:32 GMT

PR has evolved successfully to meet the challenges and opportunities of digitisation. In what was a traditionally one-way communication channel, PR has progressed to a multi-channel marketing promotions activity approach that captures ever-larger audiences.

Even in the early 2000s, PR relied on the distribution of media releases and statements to TV, print newspapers, print magazines, and radio. Getting a positive front-page newspaper article was a PR agency’s ultimate goal and meant the PR campaign had been highly successful.

Now, online media has created a 24-hour news cycle that is hungrier for content and can reach global audiences. The goal for PR agencies has transitioned from a front-page newspaper story to a brand story that goes ‘viral’ across multiple media outlets.

At the same time, social media has created a real-time two-way communications platform between brands and their target audiences. This enables customers to give brands direct feedback, good or bad, which brands can use to improve their services and build customer relationships. A brand’s goal on social media is a high audience engagement rate that includes likes, shares, and positive comments.

Let’s take a look at the evolution of public relations and how it’s transported us into the future media landscape.

Data-driven PR results

Measuring the success or impact of PR strategies once depended on column inches in print media and TV and radio viewer and listener estimates. Since the revolution of digital media, data insights and analytics have enabled brands and PR professionals to track the success of their campaigns. Data analytics have been able to measure website traffic, media engagement, coverage and many more. This has allowed for the ability to review processes and find a brand’s most successful campaigning channel due to using data analytics as an indicator of success.

PR’s integration with content marketing

PR professionals have integrated content marketing into their processes and across multi-channels to devise captivating and relevant content that coincides with the brand’s objectives. This integration has made brand awareness more effective by conveying stories and positioning them as thought leaders. At The Ideas Suite, we believe PR is becoming more about the overall way to effectively communicate with your audience.

The rise of influencers

The rise of social media opinion leaders or influencers has changed PR dramatically as these new media channels have recently become more desirable for brands. Leveraging influencers trusted and authentic audiences to communicate brand messaging to increase brand awareness and audience redefine PRs collaboration with key opinion leaders in the media.

The importance of crisis communication

The audience for crises has widely grown due to the rise in social media, which directly impacts the business due to the potential increase in a negative impact. Crisis management and strategies are now an essential part of modern PR. PR teams will work with companies by compiling a crisis communication plan with strategic messaging, rapid response, and monitoring the media to maintain trust with the public.

Corporate social responsibility and PR

Consumers today are looking for brands to go beyond their means and incorporate CSR where they can. PR professionals now work with brands to ensure their messaging and brand purpose align with their philanthropic efforts to convey positive and deeper connections with consumers.

The Ideas Suite to proud to be involved with our very own CSR projects and initiatives too and embrace the opportunity to make a difference through pro bona work.

The Ideas Suite: The dynamic evolution and future of PR

The public relations landscape has undergone profound transformation over the past decades, brought about by technological advancements and shifts in consumer expectations. Today, with the prolific presence of digital media and the immediacy of social platforms, the PR industry has been redefined – and will continue to be – by its adaptability and strategic prowess.

The Ideas Suite stands as a testament to this evolution, with its roots firmly grounded in traditional PR practices and its vision aimed squarely at the future. It’s not just about publicity or mere press releases. It’s about understanding a brand’s core essence, their unique challenges, and formulating strategies that make a tangible difference to their business objectives. It’s about ensuring that stories don’t just gain traction but resonate, create connections, and drive actions.

Learn more about our comprehensive PR services to see how we can best help your business.

If you’d like to us to help you develop an effective PR strategy, contact our team to get started .

The 7 benefits of public relations agencies working with innovative brands

Wed, 25 Mar 2026 06:44:00 GMT

For Public Relations (PR) agencies collaborating with innovative brands, there are numerous benefits for both parties. The partnership can be mutually beneficial. PR activities can enhance the positioning and image of the brand in market, while on the other hand, enhance the reputation of the agency.

Let’s take a look at the 7 benefits of public relations working with your innovative brands.

Visit our PR results page to see what innovative brands we’ve helped shape.

1. Compelling storytelling opportunities

It is no surprise that innovative brands and businesses often have unique and engaging stories to share about their success journey. Audiences resonate with brands that have developed unique value-add products or services that address a market gap or meet a consumer demand – which often makes for compelling narratives in the media. PR agencies can work with these innovative brands to strategically create engaging content and spark conversations in the media to elevate the brand’s visibility and credibility.

2. Enhanced media coverage

With compelling stories comes media interest. PR agencies can capitalise on the curiosity the media and their audience have with the brand, and strategically pitch stories to relevant media outlets to secure high-impact coverage. This type of exposure for the brand means a broader audience can be reached, positioning the brand as an industry leader, driving positive perceptions. This is the cornerstone success story of The Ideas Suite. With our extensive network of journalists and media representatives, we have the right contacts no matter what industry our clients are in.

3. Thought leadership and expertise

Brands that have internal subject matter experts who can provide thought leadership, can boost the brand’s credibility. PR agencies can position the brand’s key figures as experts within their field and develop thought-provoking and newsworthy commentary in the form of articles, whitepapers, case studies and social media posts to elevate the brand’s authority and foster trust. This commentary can be used to highlight the brand’s insights and vision and position them as key contributors to their industry.

4. Differentiation and competitive edge

PR agencies can use innovation to promote a brand’s unique qualities from other competitors. Effective communication of unique brand value allows brands to have a distinct market position and be a market leader to consumers. By PR professionals highlighting a brand’s differentiators, it allows them to have a competitive edge against other brands in the industry.

5. Audience engagement and connection

The alignment of brand innovation values with PR agency’s campaign development will allow customer needs and aspirations to flow into an engaged and well-connected audience. Innovative brands often spark engagement with audiences due to them seeking something new and not on the market yet. PR agencies leverage this innovation for audience captivation.

6. Long-term reputation building

Innovation success improves brand reputation and market position. Strategic communication channels with audiences established by PR efforts can be a positive force of change. Over time, this leads to greater brand recognition and consumer loyalty.

7. Partnership opportunities

Partnerships with other businesses or opinion leaders can amplify brand impact and brand visibility. Innovation allows this to be more possible due to businesses wanting to align themselves with new innovative approaches. This could lead to potential partnerships, affiliate collaborations, joint ventures, co-marketing, and co-branding. Innovation can promote more opportunities for businesses. This is where having the right PR agency like The Ideas Suite, can be the perfect choice – leveraging their network of extensive contacts to support and promote your brand.

Innovation & PR: An Integrative Force

In a rapidly evolving marketplace, innovation is the lifeline for brands striving to maintain relevance, capture attention, and drive growth. But even the most groundbreaking innovation can lose its lustre if not communicated effectively.

At The Ideas Suite, it’s not just about leveraging our vast network and experience. It’s about understanding the essence of each brand, crafting tailored strategies, and ensuring our client’s unique value propositions shine through in an ever-crowded marketplace.

Our strategies go beyond mere coverage – they build thought leadership, foster deep audience connections, fortify long-term reputation, and open doors for collaborative opportunities.

With our help, we can amplify your stories, differentiate from your competitors, engage more deeply with your audiences, solidifying your place as industry leaders.

Get in touch with us to see how we can help your innovative brand stand out among the crowd.

The secret sauce of powerful storytelling: How to leverage your company’s data & expertise

Wed, 25 Mar 2026 06:30:46 GMT

An effective way to build connection, authenticity and trust with your audience is through primary data and real expertise.

Just the notion of a fireside chat makes you want to nestle back into a comfy armchair, and quieten down to hear the crackling flames. You’re all ears … ready for the story to begin. Eager anticipation.

Imagine if your business could get that kind of attention from your target market with the messages you want them to know. It’s something you might be struggling to get your public relations agency in Sydney, Brisbane or Melbourne make happen for you.

Enter the power of storytelling.

What a powerful storytelling is … and isn’t

When you craft compelling narratives around your brand and your latest ‘news’, you’re hitting the sweet spot.

Data and facts on their own can fade, but can translate to powerful content.

People remember stories up to 22 times more than facts alone, according to Stanford University . That’s because stories stick; they’re the fabric of humankind.

Narratives humanise your business. A well-told tale is the connective tissue linking your brand name, logo, slogan, unique value proposition and latest offering. It also tethers your back story into the present and loops in the future.

Hard sells, time-limited offers and blatant calls to action are one dimensional – and can be a turnoff. On the other hand, stories resonate and motivate. They tap into human emotions and can nurture stronger client and customer relationships. Stories can inspire loyal customers and foster brand advocates.

And, there’s a secret sauce to the powerful storytelling that gets organic media attention.

The role of expertise

An effective way to build connection, authenticity and trust with your audience is through authentic expertise. And relevance. Here are some examples:

Voice of hope in a crisis: When asbestos was detected in mulch in school yards, parks, hospital gardens across Australian capital cities and regions, The Ideas Suite offered a point of difference in thought leadership with one of its clients. An asbestos expert with two decades’ professional experience ( back story ) from EDP Consultants, part of the global RSK Group, explained how the asbestos got there ( back story again ), that the mineral is in a third of our homes ( the present ) and why we needed whole-of-community vigilance to stop it at the source ( future focus ). The words of John Batty, Managing Director of EDP consultants, were carried in stories across national and metropolitan print, online and broadcast media. It was reactive media commentary on a hot topic.
Economic stats don’t have to be boring: When inflation and interest rate rises were adding to economic uncertainty in Australia in late 2023 ( back story ), there was a media appetite for cut-through insights. The Ideas Suite worked with non-bank commercial asset finance lender Metro to survey 200 business owners about what was holding back their growth. The results showed two thirds of SMEs needed extra or updated assets to grow, but high vehicle and equipment prices were holding them back ( present ). Metro’s CEO Phillip Crossman was able to unpack the survey results by business size and state breakdowns, and do a little crystal ball gazing ( future focus ). Here, Metro’s data-driven insights were able to break into the day’s business news.
Didn’t see that coming: The surge in renewable energy infrastructure projects ( back story ) was driving a regional business travel boom ( present ) as at the end of 2023. That was due to the fast-growing mining industry, spurred by extraction of critical minerals for the green economy. That unusual finding – an increase in ‘bleisure’ travel – came from the business travel bookings data of Flight Centre’s Corporate Traveller, a PR client of The Ideas Suite. Its Global MD Tom Walley unpacked the stats and ventured forth with his forecast ( future focus ) of the trend continuing. This media release linked to a whitepaper allowing journalists to do a deeper dive into the figures to tailor their coverage to their readers.

The necessary planning and resources behind every story

Apart from scaping the back story, present and future scopes, stories need something new, unusual, significant, and should be about people as much as possible.

These other elements help elevate your story: narrative plot, intrigue, an obstacle, conflict and tension, according to recent research into brand storytelling in the age of short attention spans.

(You’ll struggle even on a slow news day to have the media pick up your news of opening a new branch/division, unless you can build a strong narrative around it.)

Part of your PR agency’s due diligence is to conduct mainstream and social media audits before honing a strong news hook. That involves searching online for what competitor brands are saying about an issue and how another expert – such as our client – can bring more value to the discussion.

The Ideas Suite employs award-winning former journalists from national, metropolitan, and regional news organisations. We intimately understand what it takes to weave a compelling story into a media release or thought-leadership piece and fashion it for specific media.

Our story started with the vision of Julia Nekich, a former Sydney Morning Herald writer, to help brands – big and small – achieve consistent media coverage through well-told stories. That approach is nested in a specialty of strategy PR communication. Since 2007, The Ideas Suite has established itself as a bespoke full-service public relations agency with consultants and writers in Sydney, Melbourne, Brisbane, regional Queensland and regional NSW.

Let us help you light the spark of strategic story telling through data-driven insights and your expertise.

5 tips for writing high-performing media releases

Wed, 25 Mar 2026 06:17:04 GMT

Phones ringing, newswires pinging, emails topping up by the minute –

Newsrooms can be hectic, and it is not unusual for journalists and editors to be spread thin across multiple mastheads and platforms.

So how do you get their attention?

There are five key elements to writing a media release that gets noticed

Take a look at our media releases to help you master the art.

Find your angle: anchor your announcement to the news cycle

It is not a journalist’s job to promote you or your brand. You need to give them a good reason to do that indirectly.

This means identifying a unique story angle and anchoring it to current news. A good angle is the most unique, interesting, or inspiring part of your story. It could be a thought-leader viewpoint that supports or disputes the consensus on an issue. Or it could be an inspiring staff story aligned with a national calendar event such as R U OK Day or International Women’s Day.

Aim for an angle that has not been covered before or has not been covered in the same way. At The Ideas Suite, we do a media audit before choosing a release angle, ensuring our story has not been recently covered in the media or by competitors.

It also helps to anchor your story to current news or events, making it relevant to a broader audience and giving journalists more reason to run it. We do extensive research to identify the most up-to-date news, policy changes and third-party research that will support your story, strengthening its worth, relevance and reach within your industry and beyond.

Find out more about our PR services.

Use data where possible

Data gets attention. Original results from your brand’s own primary research – such as surveys and your customer data – can identify emerging market trends. Supporting your data with statistics from reputable third-party sources such as the Australian Bureau of Statistics may suggest why these trends are emerging and strengthen the angle and its relevance. It’s a good idea to footnote any third-party statistics you bring into your story, so that journalists can easily cross-check the information in your media release. The easier your story is to verify, the better the chance it has of being picked up.

Grab the media’s attention in the first few sentences

You have minimal time to capture a journalist’s or editor’s attention. They will skim stories, only reading them through thoroughly once they have decided to run it. Short, attention-grabbing headlines and concise but impactful bullet points highlighting three stand-out messages from your story could mean the difference between it being binned or picked up by multiple media outlets. Ensure your media release’s first paragraph summarises the main points of the story.

Avoid advertorials

Advertorials and news stories are not the same. Advertorials look like a media story but overtly sell a product or service.

If your media release does this, it could be ignored or sent to a media outlet’s advertising department, and you might be contacted to take out paid advertising.

Editorial content impacts, educates, or inspires a broader readership and, most importantly, does not overtly sell a product or service. So how do you insert your company into this kind of story? It is all about positioning.

Here are three examples of what that means :

You can position yourself as a thought-leader in your field by offering opinion pieces, solutions or commentary on a broader story or issue.
Data-based stories derived from your company’s surveys and analysis position your brand as one with its finger on the pulse of market trends.
Sharing major changes in your company such as an ‘Australian-first’ product or service, a new partnership, an acquisition, or an expansion positions your company as a rapidly growing and evolving company.

Only mention your products or services subtly at the end of a media release and only if it flows with the story.

Read our recent article on ‘The Secret Sauce of Powerful Storytelling’.

From perfect pitch to pristine publish with The Ideas Suite

Crafting a high-performing media release is both an art and a science, requiring a strategic blend of newsworthy angles, compelling data, attention-grabbing introductions, and a clear distinction from advertorials.

By anchoring your story to current events, leveraging original and third-party data, captivating journalists in the initial sentences, and positioning your brand subtly yet effectively, you can significantly increase the chances of your media release being picked up and widely shared.

At The Ideas Suite, we specialise in creating media releases that stand out in crowded newsrooms, ensuring your story not only gets noticed but also drives meaningful engagement and impact. Let us help you tell your side of things with precision and creativity.

Don’t let your story go unnoticed. Partner with us today to create compelling media releases that make an impact.

Get in touch.

When is the right time to launch a PR campaign?

Wed, 25 Mar 2026 02:27:17 GMT

Is your industry booming, but your business is not?

Do you feel like your brand is invisible or, worse, getting too much negative attention?

These are sure signs you need to add public relations (PR) to your marketing kit. PR is a cost-effective brand management tool that uses free media coverage, cross-promotional partnerships, speaker engagements and events to talk to your target audience, raising awareness of your brand and controlling how it is perceived.

So, when is the right time to start a PR campaign?

Here are five key indicators that it is time to launch:

1. You are establishing a new business: let people know who you are

When you start from the ground up, it is hard to get noticed among established businesses similar to yours. If you have an innovative product or service, you need to differentiate it from competitors and promote that difference broadly to gain traction. If you are selling your product or service state-wide or nationally, a PR campaign can use an extensive, far-reaching range of methods to build awareness of your brand and manage the image you put out into the world from the start.

Here are a few tips to help run an effective PR campaign from HubSpot.

Helping your brand get back in full swing with the power of PR

Public relations is key to helping your brand truly thrive. Whether your business is falling under the radar, your reputation has gone astray, or your brand simply needs a shake up, PR can make a world of difference to how your brand is put across to your audience.
At The Ideas Suite, we can help you improve your brand’s standing at the right place and at the right time.

Offering a range of PR services from social media management, media relations, to content development, we’ve got every tool in the shed to get the ground up and running.

Discover our PR services for further information on how we can help build your brand back up.

2. Your competitors ramp up publicity: don’t let your brand disappear

You switch on the morning news or open the latest industry magazine and there they are again: your competitors. They have boosted their marketing and suddenly their adverts, experts and brand stories are everywhere. When competitors saturate the market or new competitors burst onto the scene, you must act to prevent your company from disappearing in the flooded market. That is why The Ideas Suite monitors its clients’ competitor activities and plans a schedule of multi-media pitches, blogs and posts that keeps its clients visible.

3. The market is healthy, but your business is not: focus on your image

While PR is not a sales tool, sales can be a byproduct of it. PR moulds and manages your image and spreads the word across your target audience. When a consumer needs a service or product such as the one you offer, you want your reputable company to come to mind. When a media outlet needs an expert for an industry-related discussion, you want them to think of your people first, giving your company the airtime that could potentially lead to more sales.

Read our blog ‘What are the Benefits of Partnering with a PR Agency?’

4. You are launching something new: use a holistic approach

Whether you are launching an innovative new project, service or division, PR should be part of the marketing mix. While marketing focuses on selling the new product or service, PR manages the overall company image in relation to what you are launching. It will identify and promote stories that position your brand as evolving and solution focused, and that differentiate it from competitors. So, if there is something exciting happening in your company, make it a priority to get PR on the ground.

5. Your reputation has taken a hit: take back control

It happens to the best of us: a handful of customers complain, and word quickly spreads; your company is targeted in a cyber-attack; private company information is leaked. PR manages crisis like this, ensuring that media coverage is balanced, accurate, that your company has a say and that the story is wrapped up quickly.

Are you making these 10 common grammatical mistakes in your writing?

Wed, 25 Mar 2026 02:14:09 GMT

While journalists and PR professionals aren’t the arbiters of correct English language usage, we are quick to spot grammatical errors.

Here’s why we think it’s important to get your grammar top notch when writing in professional and business contexts to:

boost your professional image, and credibility
improve the clarity and understanding of your message, and
support others’ perceptions that you’re competent and have the expertise you claim.

But we’re not the only ones on the get-your-grammar-right-please bandwagon.

Research shows that over time businesspeople have become more ‘bothered’ by errors in others’ writing. Some even think they grammatical errors reveal much larger problems with an employee, except where the writer’s first language is not English.

Quick typing spelling errors in emails might be forgivable, but not in documents, presentations or contracts. In fact, for external documents, having errors made people feel embarrassed for their company even if it was a co-worker’s mistake.

The main bugbears included using the wrong words, run-on sentences, fragments (think split infinitives), word-ending errors, misspellings and unnecessary quotation marks. And yes, older people are hassled by grammatical errors more so than those newer to the workforce. Another study found impoliteness in emails was offensive, too. Just so you know.

Here’s our list of the top 10 most common mistakes; not in priority order

Incorrect use of apostrophes:

It’s (it is) easy to confuse possess apostrophes (the cat’s tail) with contractions (it’s sunny).

Mixing up ‘your’ and ‘you’re’:

The first is possessive; the second is a shortened form of ‘you are’.

The subject and verb don’t agree:

What can trip up people is hearing sports reporters say, ‘the team are winning’, but ‘team’ as a subject is singular, and so should be the verb used with it. ‘The team is winning’ is correct. Other collective nouns include choir, jury, ministerial cabinet, and regiment.

Overusing passive voice:

We’re not fans of the passive voice (think ‘the dog was walked by the man’ v ‘the man walked the dog’). Often, you’ll hear or read ‘the course was delivered online’, but it leaves you thinking ‘who did the delivering?’. Consider instead, ‘X delivered the course online’.

Confusion between ‘effect’ and ‘affect’:

Effect is typically a noun and means ‘result’, but ‘affect’ is more likely used as a verb and means ‘to influence’.

Using ‘fewer’ and ‘less’ interchangeably:

If you can count the nouns (people, animals, media release, for example), use ‘fewer’. But, if you can’t count the nouns (salt, sauce, grass, etc.) then ‘less’ is the go.

Getting in a tangle with tenses:

Aim to be consistent. For example, not ‘the business has launched its new service yesterday’, but the business launched its new service yesterday’,

Ignoring the elegance of parallel construction (sigh):

Aim to express a group of ideas in a similar form, such as ‘The strategic plan included a policy, procedures, and to rolling out an implementation plan’. Try instead: ‘the strategic plan included a policy, procedures and an implementation plan’.

Run-on sentences:

This is where you join two sentences, which don’t belong together. Incorrect: The new marketing campaign is exciting it has the potential to reach a wider audience. Correct: The new marketing campaign is exciting. It has the potential to reach a wider audience.

Fragmenting a sentence.

This happens if your sentence lacks a main clause. For instance, ‘because she was early.’ Is an incomplete sentence.

Curious to learn more?

Check out the timeless guide, The Elements of Style, by Strunk and White . Chances are writers you know would have heard of it. This guide is baked into journalism courses and traineeships around the country.

Helping you find the right words with The Ideas Suite

For over a decade, The Ideas Suite has been helping businesses craft clear and effective communication.

For expert PR services to refine your writing and communication, visit our PR Services page.

If you have any questions or need assistance, feel free to contact us .

When to Switch PR Agencies

Wed, 25 Mar 2026 01:57:42 GMT

Is your PR agency the right fit for your business now and going forward? This checklist will help you decide if it’s time to switch.

Have you recently felt your current public relations agency isn’t the right fit for your brand anymore?

This guide will help you assess if it’s time to move on from your current PR agency or stick with them. We’ll also suggest what to do next.

Revisit your PR goals

Before diving in, let’s revisit the reasons you initially outsourced PR.

Chances are your business has started with a PR freelancer, then a consultant before signing on to a PR agency. As you shifted to the latter:

Did their budget and performance metrics align with your needs back then?
Why did your current agency initially seem like the perfect choice?
What were your expectations, and were they clearly communicated?
Have you been able to adjust the agreement as your needs evolved?
How does your agency track and report on its progress toward your goals?

To help you stay up to date on the latest insights of the PR industry, read this recent survey provided by IBIS World.

Reasons to Consider a PR Agency Switch

Several factors can prompt a brand to ditch their PR agency:

How to Choose the Right PR Agency

They Have a Deep Understanding of Your Business

Find an agency that takes the time to gain an in-depth understanding of your specific needs, industry, and business challenges. This ensures that the PR strategy is tailored to address your unique concerns and goals.

Proven Methodology

Look for an agency with a refined and tested PR methodology. This includes market and competitor research, original content strategies, detailed PR production plans, and effective media pitching strategies that deliver measurable results.

Strong Results Track Record

Select an agency that has a history of delivering strong PR outcomes for a diverse range of clients, from digital disruptors to global companies and local service providers. Their ability to drive successful campaigns across various industries is a key indicator of their expertise.

Dedicated Client Focus

Opt for an agency that works with a limited number of clients at a time. This ensures they have the resources and attention necessary to achieve outstanding results for your brand.

For further information on keeping up with current PR and media trends, take a look at the following research conducted by Australian Communications & Media Authority.

Get Under the Hood of Your PR agency

If you’re ready for a new agency, it is time for due diligence. Refine your agency selection criteria and approach. Here’s a quick checklist as an overview:

What success stories can the agency demonstrate?
Do they have data to back up their claims?
Search a couple of the agencies across Google News: has the agency achieved good media coverage for them?
Review the agency’s staff profiles.
Request details on the metrics they use and how they will report on their progress for you.

Be sure to partner with a PR that’s a right fit now and going forward.

Reach out to us today to get started.

Our founder/director, Julia Nekich , who still takes a hands-on role with her boutique team’s work since establishing The Ideas Suite shingle more than 17 years ago, is here to make your business a real brand.

The Ideas Suite ranks among the top Sydney PR agencies

The Ideas Suite has partnered with DesignRush, a globally recognised platform that connects brands with leading agencies.

The Ideas Suite ranks among DesignRush’s top PR agencies in Australia (see our listing on DesignRush ), showcasing our commitment to delivering tailored, high-impact public relations strategies, and our strong results.

Missed Goals

Consistent failure to meet campaign goals suggests a need for a new approach.

Lack of Proactivity

Your agency should actively monitor your industry and the media, and identify opportunities for exposure.

Communication Issues

Are you chasing your agency for communication materials, results, replies to emails, or updates on projects? this could point to a breakdown in communication.

Bait and Switch:

Losing access to the experienced point of contact who sold you on the agency is a red flag.

Unproductive Meetings

Meetings should be focused and result in actionable plans. they should also present impromptu opportunities to upskill and cross-skill your experts in how to do media interviews well.

Missed Deliverables

Skipped deadlines and lost opportunities are unacceptable.

Handballing Work Back to You

Good PR agencies aren’t overwhelmed if you give them lots of content changes, including conflicting ones. they’ll be experienced enough to balance the opposing views.

Evolving Needs

As your business grows, your PR needs may change, requiring a new agency with a better fit.

Weak Performance Incentives

Long contracts driven by fees without strong performance incentives can be problematic.

Stagnant Skills

An agency lacking skilled writers across content areas you need can hinder your brand awareness efforts.

Limited Journalistic Insights

Staff without journalistic experience may struggle to secure media coverage and build a contact network you can leverage off.

Desire for Freshness

You might be ready for a new perspective on your PR strategy.

Consolidation Needs

If you have multiple agencies for different aspects of marketing and public relations, include crisis and reputation management, for instance, consolidating might be beneficial. A drawcard, too, is if an agency can do data collection, analysis and interpretation in house or has a reliable contact to do this week.

Even a couple of those points above could be a deal breaker, nudging you to test the water with a different agency.

What if you stay the course; do nothing? As New York Times bestselling author Ryan Halliday writes in his book Courage is Calling: Fortune Favors the Brave, “You’ve still made a choice; you’re opting for the status Quo”. Is that good enough for your business or organisation?

Media promotions: the little-known PR tactic to maximise your product placement strategy in the media

Wed, 25 Mar 2026 01:43:00 GMT

Years ago, brands would engage PR agencies to secure placement of their products across popular magazines.

These products would be shown in the upfront pages of magazines – with titles such as ‘Our top picks this month’ or ‘Best beauty buys’ – or across fashion or home-decor spreads. PR consultants would be proud of the thick ‘clippings’ reports they would deliver to clients each month.

The digital transformation of our media landscape over the last decade, together with the growth of social media – resulting in a shrinking pool of print publications – has made it more challenging for PR agencies to secure traditional product-placement opportunities.

Brands and PR agencies have had to adapt their strategies to ensure their products still receive adequate exposure.

The phenomenal rise of social media influencers has offered brands with a wonderful – albeit more costly – opportunity for product exposure. Influencer marketing has allowed brands to leverage the reach of popular influencers who can showcase products organically in their content to their large volume of followers on Instagram, YouTube or TikTok.

But a little-known tactic that The Ideas Suite offers is a very cost-effective way of achieving outstanding product exposure: media promotions.

What are media promotions?

Media promotions are usually in the form of product giveaways – and they cost nothing other than the product giveaway itself!

If your brand sells popular products or experiences that are of broad appeal to the general public – such as hotel accommodation, packaged snacks or non-alcoholic drinks – you have a good chance of securing promotions in popular FM radio outlets and online media. All without paying for advertising.

At The Ideas Suite, we strategically develop a ‘product package’ and key messages with our client and offer these to media outlets whose audiences align with the brand’s target audience. The most effective outlets will be popular FM radio stations and online consumer media outlets.

Armed with the product package, radio programs will create the giveaway and usually promote it multiple times on air and through their social media platforms. If the radio outlet often goes out on the streets through their ‘truck’, the product can also be given away to the public in this way, with images captured on social media.

To get editorial cut-through in print and online consumer media, The Ideas Suite also organises smaller promotions for these media outlets.

Case study: HotelsCombined

For +hemp – Australia’s first hemp water – we organised 2 NO COST radio giveaways of its products.

KIIS FM Sydney:

4 x non-exclusive product mentions in the KIIS Thunderbird crosses (Kyle & Jackie O Show) –
valued at $1840 each
3 x non-exclusive Instagram story posts –
valued at $2250 each
Total value: $14,110

Case study: HotelsCombined

For HotelsCombined, we secured NO-COST radio promotions to leverage HotelsCombined’s sponsorship of the Hobart Hurricanes

When Hotels Combined entered into a sponsorship agreement with the Hobart Hurricanes cricket team for the Big Bash, we organised radio giveaways of shirts, bats and hotel accommodation.

KIIS FM Sydney and Melbourne:

20 x Live or Pre-recorded Sydney and Melbourne Breakfast Credits – valued at $8341
5 x Pre-recorded Credits in the lead up to the Summer Fling Show – valued at $2,775
2 x ‘Birthday Wheel’ credits – valued at $1070

Total value: $12,186

Learn how to incorporate this effective tactic into a broader PR strategy

At The Ideas Suite, we design no-cost promotional campaigns to help brands achieve outstanding product exposure without the high costs of advertising.

By strategically partnering with radio and online media outlets, we ensure that your products reach the right audience at the right time.

Hit105 FM Brisbane:

5 x brand mentions in Black Thunder crosses in breakfast
5 x Instagram story posts to its audience of 38.5K
Total value = $10,845

Triple M Hobart:

80 x 30 second promotion pointers (20 x across 3 days out of each game)
24 x live breakfast announcer promotional mentions + 12 x workday announcer mentions
4 x Facebook posts on Heart 107.3 (branded content posts)
Minimum 16 x posts on Triple M Hobart Instagram
Website exposure

Total value: $10,694. Plus, 18 x Instagram posts with more than 6400 people reached and 5 x branded Facebook posts reaching more than 53,000.

The Power of Thought Leadership in PR

Wed, 25 Mar 2026 01:30:07 GMT

If yours is a service-based business – where customers come to you for advice, technical expertise, market knowledge or forecasts – thought leadership is one of the most effective tactics to achieving ‘earned’ (non-paid) media coverage or speaking engagements.

Thought leadership involves positioning yourself or your organisation as an authority in a specific field. As a thought leader, you offer insider insights into your market or industry, as well as innovative solutions to their problems.

Here’s why thought leadership is essential and how it can benefit your organisational goals.

Establishing credibility and authority

For any organisation, particularly those in competitive industries, standing out is vital.

Thought leadership allows you to display your ability and deep understanding of industry trends, challenges, opportunities and, ultimately, solutions.

A compelling example of this is when asbestos was detected in mulch in schoolyards, parks, and hospital gardens across Australian capital cities and regions. The Ideas Suite offered a point of difference in thought leadership with one of its clients, EDP Consultants.

EDP Consultants , part of the global RSK Group , provided an asbestos expert with two decades of professional experience. This expert explained how the asbestos got there, highlighted that the mineral is present in a third of Australian homes, and emphasised the need for whole-of-community vigilance to stop it at the source. The insights of John Batty, Managing Director of EDP Consultants, were carried in stories across national and metropolitan print, online, and broadcast media.

This reactive media commentary on a hot topic highlighted EDP’s ability and significantly bolstered its credibility and authority on the issue.

Driving brand awareness and visibility

Thought leadership can significantly boost an organisation’s visibility. When leaders within a company have their commentary published on reputable platforms, engage in industry discussions, or speak at major events, they attract attention from a broader audience.

A recent collaboration between Corporate Traveller , a division of Flight Centre Travel Group , and Stephen Scheeler, former CEO for Australia and New Zealand at Facebook and current CEO of Omniscient, amplified the message of ethical AI.

Stephen headlined Corporate Traveller’s ‘Unpacked’ event roadshow. He addressed the increasing issue of ethical AI, calling for a focus on ethical practices and policies to ensure a smooth transition for the workforce. This event, organised by Corporate Traveller, saw significant engagement from industry leaders, travel agents, and businesses.

The partnership helped position Corporate Traveller as a forward-thinking leader in the industry and connected it with a broader audience interested in the ethical implications of AI. This type of visibility can lead to increased media coverage, speaking invitations, and opportunities to participate in influential industry forums.

Building a community and influence

Thought leadership can also engage with a community. By fostering discussions, participating in debates, and collaborating with other industry leaders, organisations can build a network of influence. This community engagement helps in staying attuned to the latest developments, gaining diverse perspectives, and amplifying the organisation’s voice in broader conversations.

An example of this is how The Ideas Suite identified a trend in Stage and Screen’s data. Stage and Screen is Australia’s leading specialist travel management provider for the sports, entertainment and creative industries and a division of Flight Centre Travel Group. By analysing flight bookings and survey results, it uncovered a seismic shift in Australia’s music scene: young Aussies are moving away from festivals towards stadium acts due to rising costs, logistics, and weather concerns.

Leveraging these insights, Stage and Screen engaged with the community to gauge attitudes and future behaviours around the festival and music scene in Australia, especially following the cancellation of several national festivals. Stage and Screen General Manager Adam Moon then discussed how its research and flight bookings to popular festivals showed growth in demand for major stadium acts, more so than for festivals – with rising costs, the elements and logistics fuelling the trend.

Stage and Screen’s thought leadership piece was picked up by multiple media outlets, including Channel Seven News, and a West Australian newspaper syndication.

Thinking of positioning your organisation as a thought leader? The Ideas Suite can help.

A thought leadership strategy in your public relations program will enhance the credibility of your organisation and its people, drive visibility, generate leads, foster customer loyalty, differentiate your organisation from competitors, and build your community.

Pitching to the media is an art form: Here’s how we do it

Tue, 24 Mar 2026 13:29:14 GMT

Free publicity or exposure in the media – also known as ‘ earned media ’ – is the holy grail of businesses and organisations keen to get their messages published without paying for an ad.

With evidence that 45-75 per cent of media stories are influenced by, or sourced from public relations activities, you’re in with a chance.

Those odds sound great, but there’s plenty of others contending for earned media.

How can you give the media what they want?

This article offers a ‘behind-the-scenes’ look at how to create compelling media pitches.

Yes, they’re an art form.

First, we’ll explain the prep work needed; then we’ll dive into the 10 standards for news values.

How to create a media story

Figuring out what the media want at any point of time calls for:

strategy
research, and
a lot of experience in the media.

For example, when creating a media story for our clients, we consider:

Who is the target audience ? Understanding the audience helps us determine which media category (eg., early general news, business, finance) and type (newspapers, radio, TV, podcast, etc.) we’ll pitch to, and how. We’re mindful that the Australian media landscape is continually transforming, which keeps us on our toes.
What are your brand messages? This is where an expertly crafted call to action comes in. For media content, a ‘call to action’ should be more subtle and nuanced than would appear in copywriting for an advertisement or advertorial. How do we align those messages to the messages the media want to receive?
Can we substantiate claims made by your brand – such as with primary data or technical/professional expertise from your thought leaders?
What type of content are your competitors pitching to the media? This isn’t guesswork. We do in-depth media audits on angles we’re mulling over to ensure we’ll only pitch original angles every time. This means we take time to research and understand our clients, their competitors and the sector in which they operate.

Three pro tips on content, expertise and timing

Next, we have a steely focus on what the media seeks in a story. Before we share the timeless top 10 tips for media pitches, here are our must-know pro tips:

Primary research or data to reveal emerging trends.

Top-tier media are particularly keen for this kind of breaking news. That’s why The Ideas Suite deploys timely surveys and asks our clients for their customer usage data, from which we draw emerging trends and original insights. Surveys can shed light on public attitudes and their planned behaviours. Meanwhile, your brand’s customer purchase or usage data shows past behaviours, which can help you forecast future behaviours. The power of this primary research is that it allows you to offer crisp insights and forecasts, and positions your brand as a thought leader with its finger on the pulse of emerging market trends.

Our timeless top 10 tips on

Newsworthiness.
‘News’ is exactly that – not stale. Ensure your pitch is topical, relevant and a good fit for the audience of the site or publication you’re targeting. The story must be original.
Human interest.
People care about your compelling story because there’s a human element that tickles their emotions or spurs action. If, for instance, your brand has some commentary to offer on the state of the economy, drill it down to impacts on household bills, jobs or mortgages.
Local angle.
The event, development or opinion is happening in or directly relevant to the specific geographical region the media outlet is distributed to, or covers.
Innovation and uniqueness.
Your offering hasn’t been ‘done to death’ in mainstream media; you’ve got a new spin on a product, service or insights that spark attention. If your competitor pitched a similar story a couple of months back, your story likely won’t be of interest to the media.
Conflict or controversary.
You’re putting a spanner in the works that could rattle established ways or doing or viewing a highly topical issue.
Data and evidence.
Inject credibility and gravitas to your story with solid data and evidence; even better if you can cite your own data to back any statements you make in your story.
Visually appealing.
You can match your story with a strong image, video, or infographics that either you provide or support the media organisation to develop.
Expert opinion.
Your in-house subject matter experts are ready to wheel out as media talent with quick, pithy quotes or interviews.
Actionable tips.
Think of practical solutions or guidance to an annoying problem or issue. Keep them prescriptive.
Positive impact.
Success stories that highlight significant progress and change, even better if it’s unexpected.

So, the holy grail of securing media coverage for your key messages is closer than you think … once you do the groundwork. Like we said, it’s an artform.

At The Ideas Suite, we know how to tell stories the media love

We bring years of experience and a keen sense of what makes a story resonate with the media. Our tailored strategies ensure that your message reaches the right outlets with maximum impact, giving your brand the visibility it deserves.

Looking to get your story out there? Call or email us direct.

Expert tips and advice the media can’t easily access.

The media like to hear from experts that offer well-thought-out solutions to real problems. For instance, we pitched an asbestos expert from the global RSK Group. They commented about why asbestos was showing up in mulch in school playgrounds, in hospital gardens and other public places. They also clearly articulated how the contaminant could be stopped at the source to prevent the issue from continuing – that solution took the story even further. We did the groundwork for journalists, handing them this niche and technical information in layperson’s language. They can’t write this type of story without an expert opinion, which can be tricky for the typical time-hungry journalist to source.

Well-timed stories are essential.

We ensured we pitched the asbestos story when it was a hot topic in the media, not after. Similarly, we might pitch a mortgage story around the time the Reserve Bank of Australia increases interest rates. We also successfully pitched a Corporate Traveller story about how to travel with carry-on luggage only when the media was awash with news about chaotic airports.

Who in your business should speak to the media? Finding the right spokesperson

Tue, 24 Mar 2026 13:10:29 GMT

Selecting the right spokesperson can be crucial to how your business is portrayed in the media.

Whether you’re aiming for coverage on general news websites, consumer media, TV, radio or podcasts, each outlet has unique needs.

A well-chosen spokesperson can convey the right brand persona to your target audiences, boost your brand’s credibility in the market and industry, help your brand resonate better with audiences, strengthen brand recognition, and ensure your brand is regularly available to provide commentary to the public.

Here’s how to choose wisely and maximise each media opportunity. In the end, the media will want to speak to the person who is best qualified to speak on the story being offered to them.

Why having one spokesperson makes it easier to build a brand in the media

A well-chosen spokesperson, ideally a seasoned company leader, helps avoid disruptions if there are team changes. Consider your CEO or a C-suite executive for stability. This also makes it easier for the media. If they think of an organisation or a topic they want to cover, they naturally think of a single person who they could go to for comment.

Horses for courses: The CEO is the best choice – but not every time

General news and business media often seek authority and perspective when interviewing a spokesperson. Naturally, they prefer to speak to the person ‘at the top’, the CEO.

So, for your company, aim to select a spokesperson who relishes keeping up with the trends in their industry, and with a passion for refining their media presentation skills.

The CEO is almost always the media spokesperson when an organisation wants to announce some news in the media, such as an acquisition, partnership, expansion, financial year results, funding or new product launches.

However, for stories that are more technical, CEOs are unlikely to have the technical expertise that enables them to speak broadly on the topic over the phone with a journalist. This is relevant for both B2B and B2C brands.

Imagine a technology company offering the media a story about how the Australian business sector would greatly benefit from some new AI technologies that are beginning to emerge. The CEO might not necessarily have the technical expertise to discuss the ins and outs of the technology the story is advocating. The company might assess that its Head of Technology has more knowledge to offer in a media interview, and will chose them as spokesperson in this instance.

For B2C brands – where consumer media are the targets – the best spokesperson might be one who can best resonate with its target consumer audiences. For instance, a food business offering the media a story about the nutritional benefits of its products might choose its inhouse dietitian or nutritionist as spokesperson, rather than its CEO. The nutritionist will have the knowledge to discuss the benefits of particular foods, food groups, food combinations and vitamins and minerals in relation to the company’s product. He or she will likely be able to answer any reasonable food- or product-related question offered by the journalist. The nutritionist or dietitian will also add more credibility to the brand, which – through the interview – is conveying that it takes its product’s nutritional benefits seriously, but employing a nutritional expert.

Aligning the spokesperson with the media’s audience makes the message more impactful and resonant. Research shows there should be a good fit between a brand’s temperament and the spokesperson’s image. In other words, choose a spokesperson whose image aligns with your brand disposition.

TV and radio: It’s about presentation

When it comes to TV and radio, it’s not just about what’s said—it’s about how it’s delivered. TV, in particular, values spokespeople who are articulate, confident and visually engaging. Body language, poise and expressiveness will deepen the brand’s credibility. On the other hand, radio and podcast interviews call for clarity and articulation, with a tone that feels friendly and conversational.

Media training can be invaluable here. The Ideas Suite’s consultants have expertise in coaching spokespeople on everything from body language and voice inflexion to key messages and pacing. With years of experience as journalists for major media, The Ideas Suite’s team has intimate understanding of what works—and what doesn’t—in media interviews.

Prepping and pepping up are key

To really make an impact, spokespeople need more than expertise; they need confidence, be able to articulate the brand’s key messages, and adaptability. Here’s what seasoned spokespeople exhibit:

Adapt to different media channels : TV, radio, online video, or phone interviews each have unique demands. Some spokespeople thrive on TV; others shine in phone interviews.
Able to deliver the brand’s key messages : Your spokesperson should be across the company’s messaging and key points, ideally with notes handy for phone interviews.
Adapting to broad interview questions : They should be prepared for broader questions, like those on current events (economic and political contexts), to maintain a cohesive narrative.
Knowing, and sticking to, your topics and key messages : Identify off-limits areas for discussion and ensure the spokesperson knows how to deflect diplomatically if needed. For instance, many brands make a point of staying out of politics or very controversial topics.

How to support your spokesperson

A well-prepared spokesperson reflects positively on your brand. Here are ways to help them succeed:

Media briefing : Start with detailed briefing notes, covering the outlet, journalist, and potential questions and answers. Your PR agency should be able to get you questions that the journalist expects to ask you. This helps your spokesperson stay on message.
Training tips for TV and radio : Media training should cover attire (no busy patterns on TV), body language (minimise hand movements, and maintain direct eye contact with the interviewer), tone of voice and key messages.
On-call coaching : A quick call for last-minute guidance or reminders can boost confidence and consistency.
Post-interview feedback : Your PR agency could debrief with your spokesperson after each appearance, offering constructive feedback.

The Ideas Suite offers one-on-one media training with in-house journalists skilled in tough questions and on-track responses. Selecting the right spokesperson means finding an expert who embodies your brand and can deliver key messages across media channels. With the right choice, your business can build its presence in the media.

Why Your PR Agency Needs Research Skills in its DNA

Tue, 24 Mar 2026 12:44:21 GMT

A hunch or data-driven insights: which would you trust?

People trust data because it is objective, reliable if the sample size is large enough, quantifiable, verifiable, precise and less prone to personal bias.

Should your brand lean into data?

According to the AI-powered research engine Consensus, hunches are subjective and often lack a clear rationale. This ambiguity can lead to misinterpretation and reduced trust. Have you ever tried explaining a hunch based purely on intuition?

That’s why The Ideas Suite champions the use of data as a foundation for our media stories.

When we make a claim in a media release or thought-leadership piece, we need to back it with data—and data allows us to do just that. This often involves uncovering data unique to a brand’s business and sector, primary data the media wouldn’t usually have access to.

Data also reveals emerging trends, which are ideal for news hooks. It’s worth noting that something trending for two years isn’t news.

Top-tier media eagerly engage with well-presented data that comes with a meaningful narrative.

With data, brands can position themselves as thought leaders. It’s crystal-ball gazing without the hocus-pocus, mystical thinking, or pulling sentiments from thin air.

Data and our engine

We’ll explain why and how we harness original data, sift through it for insights to strengthen our content, and how this benefits our clients in building their thought leadership. Our evidence-based approach may seem complex—it has, after all, been honed by our founder since 2007. We follow a refined process and partner with an external data analytics company to wield this expertise effectively.

This means The Ideas Suite, a Sydney-headquartered PR agency , also serves as a research powerhouse for brands. Our team includes staff with a range of journalistic and PR experience, including with diverse academic backgrounds.

Developing primary research is in our DNA—here’s how we do it.

Our twin approach to data

We work with two types of data when developing our media content strategies:

Retrospective: data on customer purchasing or user behaviours, and
Forecasts: surveys capturing customer attitudes and intended future behaviours.

Our approach enables you to leverage your existing data to strengthen your position and anticipate trends. If you’re unsure about what might interest the media in your data, that’s where we come in. We partner with brands to create briefs, helping clients find relevant data that we then transform into reader-friendly formats. To ensure our content is original, we conduct audits of the media to check whether the media angles we want to use have not been created before.

You may worry that your customer data is market-sensitive and prefer to protect it from competitors. But rest assured, our clients don’t reveal raw data or customer numbers, simply percentage movements that support their claims in a media release.

Here’s an example of how we used our client Corporate Traveller’s data to create a media release that’s palatable to journalists, while sensitive information confidential. It made an impact by revealing something unexpected – the sporting event that attracted the most corporate travel bookings:

Meanwhile, an earlier data-backed media release we wrote for Corporate Traveller showed Brisbane overtaking Sydney and Melbourne as the top business traveller destination. It got a guernsey in The Australian (as we say in journalism). This data uncovered a surprising trend in Australia’s business and leisure travel landscape.

These examples draw on transaction data to capture past behavior and help us identify trends. Through our analysis, we’re able to extract client insights and build thought leadership around key issues.

But there’s another way to extract newsworthy insights from data.

Client data + surveys = thought leadership

Think we’re giving away our secret sauce?

We’ve just lifted the bonnet on our process because new or prospective clients often say, “We don’t have much to say,” yet they still want media coverage.

Here we’re being proactive, coming up with the angles and questions ourselves. We’re not waiting for journalists to ask us these questions – we’re a step ahead. In fact, often we sit down with our clients to discuss their key messages, then develop a 12-month story plan that’s brimming with potential angles, but has enough flexibility to tweak as needed.

The Ideas Suite has partnered with businesses in finance, travel, insurance, e-commerce, property, professional services, engineering, urban planning, project management, and more.

Could you brand benefit from our process? Find out – get in touch here .

Unlocking insights with surveys

For surveys, we carefully design each question-and-response option to avoid any bias. We ensure we are neutral, clear, offer respondents balanced answer options, and we avoid double-barrelled questions to avoid confusion.

Our external research agency that provides us with our independent respondent panel then pilot-tests the survey questions, allowing us to refine them if needed. The survey is then rolled out to at least 1000 people across Australia, making it highly representative. This approach provides a cost-effective way to pulse-test issues on both a state and national level.

Sometimes, the responses contain enough substance to be repurposed into a whitepaper. Clients often find these documents useful as lead magnets on landing page, for instance.

How to capitalise on election coverage without playing politics

Tue, 24 Mar 2026 12:21:12 GMT

As we approach the next federal election, newsrooms will be very keen for content that articulates the issues your industry or sector is facing.

However, a lot of brands are understandably nervous about entering the political fray – there is a legitimate concern that engaging in the conflict of politics will turn off key stakeholders.

Consider a more nuanced approach that meets the needs of politics reporters and their own communication strategies.

The ability to engage with the issues and the policy landscape – rather than the political circus – is critical in the work of creating cut-through news stories.

How to craft strong policy calls

To do this, think of all the challenges facing your industry or sector. Completing a strengths, weaknesses, opportunities and threats analysis (example below) may be helpful in highlighting these challenges.

New Title

[Source: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/SWOT_analysis ]

Then, list all the ways the three tiers of Australian government – Federal, State and local – and all the different departments that exist in this system could help make life easier for your business. These become your calls-to-action.

Would a new employment subsidy program help address staff shortages? Or perhaps a new tax incentive would help drive client demand.

Whatever it is, being able to articulate these policy calls with the right amount of detail can be a newsroom winner.

You can either do this proactively or in response to a policy handed down by any part of the government or the opposition – the ability to critique proposals and suggest your own ways to build on them is good fodder for time-poor journalists.

Add your most compelling calls to the fundamentals of newsroom storytelling that we know journalists are looking for: a nice case study or two, interesting stats and forthright opinions.

Government response

The reality is that government PR teams will scan stories about their policies and see what the private sector has to say through the media.

This may lead to potential opportunities to meet with senior political figures and influence their decision-making processes. Now, you have a seat at the table because of the thoughtful work you have put in.

You can then leverage and amplify your work by creating further content that shares the impact of your media and policy contributions to key stakeholders.

In other words, you need to be in it to win it.

Piecing it together

Engaging with issues, especially during election campaigns, is not about forming opinions that favour one side or the other (unless you want to). It is about talking about how particular policies are going to help or hurt the wider context of your business.

After all, governments are fond of referring to small and medium-sized businesses as the ‘engine room of the economy’ to the point where it has become a cliché.

While politics can be seen as a bubble or just downright chaotic, not acknowledging the importance of the political process to media outlets is a missed opportunity.

At The Ideas Suite, a top-tier PR agency in Sydney, and servicing Melbourne and Brisbane, our consultants have significant experience in delivering policy-focused stories that are noticed by those in power. Talk to us here to learn more.

Benefits of having an always on press office

Tue, 24 Mar 2026 10:52:58 GMT

While the media landscape continues to evolve technologically and into new channels – as Australians diversify their media consumption habits – public demand for news isn’t going away any time soon.

There are regular opportunities for brands and thought leaders to regularly appear in the media, thereby building public awareness and credibility of their products and services.

A PR agency can help your business achieve these important aims through various media story tactics, including but not limited to:

Proactive storytelling and pitching. Liaising with you to determine what your business is working on, and what its objectives are, and how it wants to be perceived, that would be of interest to a wider audience and then using the broader context of what else is in the news to shape the story. This may require the development of a press release, but more often than not, an email or phone pitch will be enough.
Newsjacking. Responding to a breaking news story and weaving your company’s key messages into your response.
Opinion pieces or bylined articles. Using an upcoming day like International Women’s Day to craft an opinion about a relevant issue. Talking about the gender pay gap would be a relevant issue to discuss respectively.
Gift lists. Using major shopping events to get your product listed on gift guides (but make sure there is a relevant connection). Alternatively, develop your own gift guides to host on your channels to create a feeling of reciprocity among the brands you have listed.
Activations, stunts and events (if relevant and there is a budget). We know we are in a visual world, and that extends to news media and social media. Be aware, as events require careful planning and execution to ensure the message is received as intended.
Surveys. Commissioning a survey of an independent (not your customers) and nationally representative panel of people (at least 1000) on a timely yet evergreen topic is the benchmark required for the media to even consider publishing your findings. Pair this data with a case study or two to give your story extra heft.

Why should you be in the media all the time?

All of these example tactics are about one thing: getting your brand and its key messages into the media. These messages could encompass the positive aspects of what your brand does, how it differs in the market to your competitors, and how your product or service solves problems.

A 2024 Ipsos study revealed that 57 per cent of Australians trust television and radio as reliable news sources – higher than the global average of 49 per cent. More than half (54%) trust newspapers and magazines, also higher than the global average of 47 per cent. While it’s important to have a communication strategy that addresses all three channels, it is clear that earned media is still valued by the public as a leading source of trustworthy content.

Changing of the guard

What’s changing, according to data from the Australian Communications and Media Authority , is how we access news. In 2023 (the most recent year available), 20 per cent of Australians nominated social media as their main source of news in 2023, up from 17 per cent in 2022.

This means that journalists and editors are looking for newsworthy content that audiences on platforms like Facebook, Instagram, X and TikTok (among others) will really snap up.

As we know, social media moves at the speed of clicks – so it’s really important to always be ready to share your brand’s updates and announcements.

A PR agency can help by installing an always-on press office that can optimise your stories, whether for social or traditional media.

Sydney PR agency The Ideas Suite has been established for almost 20 years, and in that time we have run always on press offices for many well-known brands, from Flight Centre’s Corporate Traveller to HotelsCombined and Menulog. Contact us here to learn more.

Understanding the Australian Media Landscape

Tue, 24 Mar 2026 09:46:07 GMT

To get the most out of your public relations program, it helps to have a basic understanding of the media landscape that carries your message to the public.

How is news delivered in Australia ? How many outlets are there? And why are you seeing the same story – or versions of that story – in multiple outlets?

Having a grasp of the local media landscape will help you make informed decisions about the stories you pitch and the outlets you target. It will also help gauge how far your stories are likely to go to make the most of your investment.

News stories and their delivery

News is delivered and distributed in more ways than ever before.

Platforms include:

TV
Radio
Newspapers
Magazines
Digital formats such as websites and apps
Podcasts
Social media
eNewsletters

Likewise, news stories also take many forms:

Public interest : anything that impacts the public and which the public has a right to know about, such as improper use of power or taxpayer money, or environmental exploitation.
Human interest stories that help people feel connected, or prompt action to support the subject or cause presented in a story.
Opinion pieces that provide insight into a topic and prompt public debate.
Statistical stories that provide insight into an industry.

A variety of news delivery methods make news accessible while a broad range of stories and points of view spark the conversations and actions that are essential to a democratic and progressive society.

Australia’s media networks

Australia’s online and traditional media landscape is highly concentrated. Of the more than 1800 news brands, 70 per cent belong to one of just 106 media networks. The 10 largest networks – ABC, Southern Cross Austereo, News Corp Australia, SBS, Australian Radio Network, Seven Network, Australian Community Media, Super Radio Network, Nine Network and Today News Group – account for 43 per cent of those brands. 1 2

This concentration has come under scrutiny and much investment has been made to improve media accessibility and diversity. The Murdoch Media Inquiry Bill 2023 called for a parliamentary inquiry into the state of the Australian media landscape, particularly the Murdoch empire. 3 News Corporation Australia, owned by Rupert Murdoch, has an estimated 65 per cent share of national and regional newspaper circulation, plus its digital platform news.com.au and Sky News Australia. 4 Lachlan Murdoch also chairs News Corporation – the parent entity of News Corporation Australia – and owns NOVA Entertainment. 5 In 2020 News Corp Australia suspended printing of almost all of its community and regional mastheads, moving some to digital platforms only and leaving a huge gap in this sector.

The government has since invested millions into supporting community news publishers, regional and small publisher jobs, and the Australian Associated Press, a newswire service that plays a fundamental role in sustaining public interest journalism and media diversity. The News Media and Digital Platforms Mandatory Bargaining Code also encourages digital platforms such as YouTube, and Google to remunerate news outlets for content distributed on their platforms, helping to sustain news businesses. 6

Australia is fortunate to have two strong non-commercial media outlets – the ABC and SBS. Both are widely respected for their independent public interest journalism, especially in rural and multicultural communities where commercial options are limited. In 2023, the government moved both broadcasters to more stable five-year funding terms. 7

The Broadcasting Services Act 1992 sets out geographical license areas and boundaries around media network ownership within them to encourage independent, diverse voices. In short, no one person can control more than one commercial TV broadcasting license in a license area, or more than two commercial radio broadcasting licenses in a licensed area. A person is considered in control if their stake in a company exceeds 15 per cent.

What does this mean for public relations?

Diversity in the media allows more voices to be heard, helps build public trust in news sources and supports quality reporting. Opportunities to tell your story can go well beyond mainstream commercial media, allowing you to reach your target audience through industry-, region- or community-specific publishers and broadcasters. The interconnected and multi-platform nature of Australian media also helps a single story go further as it is shared across networks.

PR makes use of this interconnected landscape to take your message to as many people as possible, or home in on your niche audience, making your investment worthwhile.

Take a look at our PR services in Brisbane , Melbourne , and Sydney to learn more about how we can help you spread across your message.

1 News media in Australia_2025 report_0.pdf
2 Indicator 1: groups, owners and controllers | ACMA
3 Murdoch Media Inquiry Bill 2023 – Parliament of Australia
4 How large is Rupert Murdoch’s reach through News Corp in Australian media, old and new? – ABC News
5 News media in Australia_2025 report_0.pdf
6 Chapter 2 – Views on the bill – Parliament of Australia
7 Chapter 2 – Views on the bill – Parliament of Australia

Australian media: what has changed and why?

Tue, 24 Mar 2026 08:37:22 GMT

The world of media is forever evolving as hunger for news fluctuates, technology advances, and media outlets consolidate and find new ways to engage us.

Where once there was simply print newspapers, TV and radio, the shift to digital platforms and consolidation of media ownership has changed the way we access and perceive news, how media outlets profit, and how they separate themselves from less trusted material. Regulatory bodies have also had to adapt rules to suit modern media and help maintain their integrity and sustainable future.

In the world of PR, it pays to stay across these changes to understand how they affect your brand and ensure your message remains relevant.

The AI effect

Artificial intelligence (AI) has been one of the most talked about new developments, with many media outlets using it to personalise news feeds and viewing recommendations, and write content, summaries and headlines. In one case, West Australian fintech start-up Grafa replaced its news presenter with an AI anchor named Andy. Whether AI will help or hinder the industry is yet to be seen. Its use has put journalists and anchors on edge, and increased consumer concerns around trustworthy news sources.

According to the Australian Communications and Media Authority, Australians accessed less news in June 2024 than at the same time in the previous two years and they used fewer platforms when they did engage. 1 As ethical debate over AI continues, many industry players are utilising AI efficiencies while others fight for better regulation to maintain media integrity.

The decline of print and regional news

Print and regional news have taken several big hits, with News Corp Australia closing or moving its community and regional mastheads online in 2020, and Australian Community Media (ACM) cutting eight regional mastheads in 2024.

The ACM cuts followed Meta’s announcement that it would not renew commercial deals with Australian news media companies signed under the News Media Bargaining Code of 2021. The code forced social media companies to give media outlets a cut in advertising revenue when their news appeared on social media platforms. As these deals expire and media outlets fold without the revenue they have relied on, communities are becoming more reliant on ABC coverage and small, independent news sources for local information.

The full Meta fallout

Half of Australians used social media to access news in 2024, with a quarter relying on it as their main news source. 2 Meta’s decision not to renew commercial deals with media outlets when they expired in late 2024 removes Facebook and Instagram as an effective and profitable traffic source for Australian media, forcing outlets to rethink the way they reach audiences.

Those with resources will invest in SEO, email and direct traffic while smaller publishers are likely to struggle, potentially leading to more closures or further mergers. Many traditional publishers such as The Australian , Sydney Morning Herald and Australian Financial Review have embraced paywalls and subscription models to counter advertising losses.

Social media ban for under 16s

The Australian Government’s ban on social media for under 16s, set to take effect in December 2025, is designed to protect children from online harm such as bullying and addictive algorithms. With fines up to $50 million, it puts the onus on social media companies to keep kids under 16 off their platforms.

The ban will impact how under-16s access news – if at all. In 2024 two thirds of Australians using social media to access news were Gen Z (born 1996-2005), with Meta’s Instagram being the top choice for this age group (32%). 3

What does this mean for public relations?

Changes in the media landscape, specifically the strain on budgets, drop in outlets and conglomeration of ownership could reduce opportunities for earned media coverage – ensuring that only the strongest stories get published in major news media. It means only the most talented PR teams with a specialty in major news coverage will get cut-through for the brands they represent.

At the same time, smaller publications will be eager for quality, ready-made material. Your public relations team should have a deep understanding of the types of news the various media outlets accept, and how your unique story and area of expertise might fit into their agenda or the current news cycle.

1 News media in Australia_Indicator 5_Key findings text and chart notes.pdf
2 Digital News Report: Australia 2024: AI, social media, misinformation and distrust – what the data tells us about the news landscape in 2024 – University of Canberra
3 Digital News Report: Australia 2024: AI, social media, misinformation and distrust – what the data tells us about the news landscape in 2024 – University of Canberra

The Ideas Suite: Keeping the Australian media cycle rolling

At The Ideas Suite , we stay ahead of shifts in the media landscape to ensure our clients remain visible, relevant, and trusted in an evolving news environment.

Whether it’s taking on the challenges posed by AI, adapting to the fall of print and regional news, or finding new ways to engage audiences amid the Meta fallout, our team brings strategic insight and newsroom experience to every campaign.

We help brands craft compelling narratives that resonate with journalists and audiences alike — cutting through the noise, even in a consolidated and competitive media market.

If your business needs a PR partner that understands the pulse of Australian media and how to leverage it effectively, get in touch with us .

3 IN 4 AUSSIE WOMEN PAY MORE TO STAY SAFE ON SOLO TRIPS

Mon, 09 Feb 2026 23:56:14 GMT

45% of Australian women have travelled alone domestically
31% have ventured alone internationally
71% have or expect to pay a ‘safety premium’ for added peace of mind

Australia is witnessing a surge in the number of women embracing solo travel, with 3 in 4 of these travellers willing to pay extra for their personal security. By 2027, 59 per cent of Aussie women will have travelled overseas alone and 76 per cent domestically, according to new research. A significant 83 per cent will choose to invest more in safer accommodation, tours and experiences to help protect themselves.

The findings come from a survey of an independent, nationally representative panel of 1006 Australian women, commissioned by award-winning travel insurance provider Insure&Go , to explore whether the growing number of solo women travellers are taking extra safety measures.

Insure&Go found that almost a third (31%) of Australian women have travelled internationally on their own. By 2026 that proportion will have increased to 43 per cent, and by 2027 59 per cent. Comparatively, 45 per cent of women have already embarked on domestic solo trips, projected to rise 62 per cent by 2026 and 76 per cent by 2027.

“We’re seeing a shift in how Aussie women approach travel,” says David Mayo, Insure&Go Commercial & Marketing Director. “With so many heading out solo, women are shaping a new era of tourism focused on independence, personal safety and convenience.”

Younger women lead the way on solo travel

Aussie women under 30 are most likely to pack a bag and go it alone. Insure&Go found that 70 per cent of under-30s adult females will have travelled abroad by themselves by 2027 – compared with 62 per cent of 30-49-year-olds and 52 per cent of over-50s.

A staggering 84 per cent of under-30s female adults will have gone solo domestically by 2027, compared with 79 per cent of 30-49-year-olds and 71 per cent of over-50s.

The cost of feeling safe

When asked why they choose to travel alone, 38 per cent of respondents said they enjoy the freedom that solo travel brings, 28 per cent said it was out of necessity, and 24 per cent prefer to meet with friends and family en route rather than travel together the whole trip.

However, while 37 per cent remain undeterred by fear, 46 per cent meticulously research destinations to avoid places where they may face harassment or other risks, and 17 per cent refuse to travel altogether due to safety concerns.

A significant 71 per cent of all respondents said they do, or would, spend more when travelling alone to feel secure. Over half (52%) admit to choosing pricier hotels in safer locations or private guided tours as a safety precaution, and 19 per cent of those yet to travel solo expect to pay a “safety premium” when they do.

Under-50s women are most likely to make these investments in their personal safety. Almost a third (31%) of under-30s pay more for safer locations, accommodation and tours, compared with 23 per cent of 30-49-year-olds and 16 per cent of over-50s. However, half (50%) of under-30s, 48 per cent of 30-49-year-olds and 42 per cent of over-50s will all avoid higher-risk destinations.

The travel industry responds

Many tourism operators cater for this growing demand with an increasing number of women-only tours, while some Australian companies have dedicated themselves entirely to female travel. [1][2][3][4][5] Overall, the national appetite for travel remains strong. Short-term resident returns in the 12 months to November 2024 jumped by 11.2 per cent [6] while domestic holidays are forecast to grow by 3.7 per cent in 2026 and 4.3 per cent in 2027, reaching rates 18 per cent above pre-pandemic levels by 2029. [7]

“Travelling alone in unfamiliar places can be exciting yet daunting. There is often a sense of safety in numbers and knowing someone else is there for support if something goes wrong. But not everyone wants, or has, a travel companion. By taking precautions solo travellers can confidently embark on their adventures with added peace of mind,” says David.

“No one should let fear rob them of a great experience. Travel insurance can cushion unexpected problems like lost belongings or flight disruptions, so travellers can focus on enjoying the journey.”

Survey results below:

[1]Search | Insight Vacations AU

[2] Women Only Travel Adventures | Sisterhood Womens Travel

[3] About Us | Patch Adventures;

[4] Australian Womens Travel | women only travel

[5] Women Only Travel Groups | Home Page | Luxury Women’s Tours

[6] Overseas Arrivals and Departures, Australia, November 2024 | Australian Bureau of Statistics

[7] Tourism forecasts | Tourism Research Australia

ENDS

For more information, please contact:

Sarah Ewenson | 0409 079 559 | sewenson@theideassuite.com.au

About InsureandGo

InsureandGo (InsureandGo.com.au) is one of Australia’s award-winning online travel insurance specialists. Since it was established in Australia in 2012, InsureandGo has covered more than 2 million Australian travellers. Owned by Europ Assistance, which operates in more than 200 countries, InsureandGo has an expansive, 24/7 global assistance network. InsureandGo Australia has won numerous awards and recommendations for its services including the 2024 Canstar Award for Outstanding Value in ‘Outstanding Value – International Travel Insurance’ for the second consecutive year and ‘Outstanding Value – Seniors Travel Insurance’ for the third consecutive year, the 2024 WeMoney Award for ‘Best for Seniors Travel Insurance’ for the second consecutive year, the 2023 Finder Award for Travel Insurance – Domestic, and the 2023 WeMoney Award for ‘Best for Value – Cruise Travel Insurance’. More information about InsureandGo’s awards can be found here: https://www.insureandgo.com.au/travel-insurance-awards/ .

This insurance is underwritten by Mitsui Sumitomo Insurance Company Limited (MSI), ABN 49 000 525 637, AFSL 240816. Europ Assistance Australia Pty Ltd, ACN 140 219 594, AFSL 552106, trading as InsureandGo and other brands, holds a binding authority from the insurer, MSI to issue contracts of insurance and to deal with or settle claims on MSI’s behalf and as MSI’s agent. Any advice is general advice only and does not take account of your particular circumstances. Before purchasing, decide whether this product is right for you. Consider the PDS and TMD at www.insureandgo.com.au/policy-wordings .

Older Aussies driving travel trend towards lesser-known destinations

Mon, 09 Feb 2026 07:31:14 GMT

60% of Aussies less inclined now, than five years ago, to travel to popular tourist destinations
66% of over-50s will actively seek out under-the-radar holiday spots in the next 2 years
51% of Aussies prefer to visit small towns with a rich cultural heritage

Insure&Go’s survey results below:

For more information, please contact:

Sarah Ewenson | 0409 079 559 | sewenson@theideassuite.com.au

About InsureandGo

New research has revealed that Australian travellers are less willing to holiday at popular international destinations such as Rome, Tokyo and Phuket over the next two years, citing rising prices and overtourism as the main deterrents. Instead, new research has revealed two-thirds of Australians – particularly over-50s – will be seeking out quieter, emerging destinations that offer similar experiences to those well-known hotspots.

The findings were derived from a new survey of a nationally representative, independent panel of 1009 Australians, commissioned by award-winning travel insurance provider Insure&Go , to find out if overseas travel hotspots have peaked in their popularity.

Insure&Go found that 60 per cent of respondents are less inclined now, than five years ago, to travel to popular tourist destinations due to overcrowding and high prices.

In fact, 58 per cent are putting less-travelled international destinations on their holiday list over the next two years. One in five (20%) are planning to avoid popular hotspots altogether in the next two years and focus exclusively on lesser-known destinations.

The shift is even more pronounced among older Australians, who appear to be the driving force behind this emerging trend. Two-thirds (66%) of over-50s will be actively seeking out under-the-radar spots to their holiday list – and 24 per cent say they will bypass popular hotspots entirely. In contrast, just 36 per cent of under-50s are exploring alternatives, and 18 per cent are steering clear of overcrowded hotspots.

Just 42 per cent of all respondents would only travel to iconic destinations such as Rome, Tokyo and Paris in the next two years – driven by under-50s (at 46 per cent, compared with 34 per cent of over-50s).

David Mayo, Insure&Go Commercial & Marketing Director at Insure&Go, says there is a shift in how Australians want to experience travel and how much they want to spend.

“Our research indicates many travellers are done with crowds and queues. There is a growing appetite for destinations that offer rich experiences but without the anxiety associated with congested sights and the fear of missing out in those scenarios. Australians are now looking to places where they can holiday at a slower place, immerse themselves in culture and stretch their budget further. Many of these travellers, particularly over-50s, are looking for meaningful experiences in places that most tourists still overlook.”

Insure&Go asked respondents which type of alternative destinations they would choose if those locations offered similar experiences to highly touristed destinations. Small towns with a rich cultural heritage came out on top, chosen by 51 per cent of respondents. These might include charming European villages such as Ronda in Spain, Matera in Italy or Kotor in Montenegro that allow travellers to experience architectural beauty and history without the traffic of peak-season tourism.

This type of destination is more popular with over-50s (at 58%, compared with 42% of under-30s). Remote nature destinations and beach destinations followed, at 43 and 42 per cent respectively. The latter are more popular with under-30s (at 45%, compared with 38% of over-50s).

David says: “Our research indicates that travel, for many, is no longer about ticking off iconic sights, but rediscovering the joy of discovery itself. As travellers explore these quieter places, we still recommend they are prepared for any unexpected incidences. One of the downsides of lesser-travelled destinations – especially remote locations – are unpredictable transport or limited access to services. Travellers should ensure their travel insurance policy covers cancellations, medical emergencies and unexpected changes.”

Price pressures turn Aussies away from domestic holiday hotspots

Mon, 09 Feb 2026 07:20:00 GMT

86% of Australians would swap hotspots like Noosa and Byron amid growing accommodation prices
87% would not tolerate price hikes of 10-30 per cent

[1] https://experience.amexglobalbusinesstravel.com/air-monitor/2025/

[2] https://www.abs.gov.au/statistics/economy/price-indexes-and-inflation/monthly-consumer-price-index-indicator/may-2025

Insure&Go’s survey results below:

For more information, please contact:

Sarah Ewenson | 0409 079 559 | sewenson@theideassuite.com.au

About InsureandGo

Holiday hotspots such as Noosa, Byron Bay and the Mornington Peninsula have been favourites for decades, but lesser-known spots such as Yamba in NSW, Inverloch in Victoria and Queensland’s Stanthorpe could reshape the Aussie holiday map as many opt for lower-cost, less congested getaways.

A new national survey commissioned by award-winning travel insurance provider Insure&Go reveals 86 per cent of Australians are ready to swap domestic travel hotspots for lesser-known, cheaper regional escapes, as they seek affordability, quiet, space and new experiences.

A recent report has projected a 13.7 per cent year-on-year increase in economy-class airfares within Australia – compared with just 2.3-3.7 per cent in other continents. [1] In the June 2025 quarter, domestic accommodation prices also grew an average of 3.3 per cent on the previous 12 months. [2] That means a typical family could be paying hundreds more for the same holiday than they did just a year ago.

Through a survey of an independent, nationally representative panel of 1009 Australians, Insure&Go explored whether local travel hotspots might be peaking in popularity. It found that, in the next two years, 34 per cent of Aussies will look for lesser-known destinations with similar experiences as hotspot destinations. A further 52 per cent will also do the same but will keep the door open for popular hotspots if the price is right.

When asked the reasons for seeking out alternative destinations, one in three (32%) cited lower costs and 28 per cent want less congestion, more space to relax, and an equal 28 per cent want to experience unique local experiences and culture of a new destination.

Insure&Go also found out that Aussies have strong limits for accommodation price hikes – and more so among younger generations. Shockingly, nine in ten (91%) of under-30s said they’d rather walk away from a dream destination than swallow a 30 per cent price rise, with over a quarter (28%) drawing the line at a 10 per cent rise. Across all ages, just 13 per cent, on average, wouldn’t change destinations based on price, suggesting how cost-sensitive domestic travel has become.

David Mayo, Insure&Go Commercial & Marketing Director at Insure&Go, says: “Australians love their beach getaways, but accommodation costs are pushing a majority to explore many underrated gems across the country. We expect to see more price-conscious holiday-goers take a more creative and resourceful approach to booking holidays as they seek prices within their budgets.

“Our research shows affordability isn’t the factor; people are also motivated by less congestion and less noise. Our holiday time is precious – we like to return home truly rested and relaxed. We expect to see coastal and country areas that offer similar amenities to the big-name destinations growing visitation in the next two years.”

Three-quarters of Aussies say their holiday leaves them wrecked, not rested

Mon, 09 Feb 2026 07:03:01 GMT

Australians might be clocking up the frequent-flyer points – with 23 per cent (5.2 million) planning an overseas trip and 57 per cent (13 million) a domestic holiday [1] in the year ahead – but new research has revealed they’re coming home more exhausted than ever.

A new survey of an independent panel of 1009 Australians commissioned by award-winning travel insurance provider Insure&Go found a startling 75 per cent admitted they finish a holiday feeling more tired than when they left. One in five (21%) confess they always need ‘a break after my break’, while only a quarter (24%) return genuinely refreshed.

Sabotaging our valuable holiday time at the top of the list is poor sleep from red-eye flights, late nights and lumpy hotel mattresses, tops at 34 per cent. Closely followed by itinerary overload with 27 per cent admitting they cram so much in that their escape becomes an endurance event. Planning and organisation stress drags another 18 per cent into the fatigue zone, and the stress of work preventing 7 per cent of Aussies ability to switch off.

“We’re seeing travellers treat a seven-day break like a seven-day sprint, long haul flights, packed sightseeing, poor sleep,” says David Mayo, Commercial and Marketing Director of Insure&Go .

“Fatigue isn’t just an inconvenience when travelling, it can heighten the risk of illness and accidents. Tired travellers may be more likely to ignore early symptoms of sickness, misplace valuables and make impaired decisions that can quickly derail a trip.”

Gen Z and young millennials are bearing the brunt of the post-trip burnout. A staggering 83 per cent of 18- to 29-year-olds drag themselves home tired with only 17 per cent saying they feel refreshed. One of the biggest culprits is the stress of juggling bookings and logistics cited by over a quarter (26%) with 24 per cent blaming an over-full itinerary.

More than three-quarters (78%) of Generation X 30-49 year-olds and 69 per cent of Boomers (over 50s) return fatigued with poor sleep from long flights, late nights and uncomfortable accommodations as the major cause: 29 per cent for Gen X and 42 per cent for Boomers. However, Boomers pace themselves better than any other cohort, with 31 per cent finishing a trip genuinely refreshed, almost double Gen Z’s recovery rate.

[1] https://www.roymorgan.com/findings/9852-share-insights-press-release-overseas-travel-and-intention-march-2025

Q. What’s the top reason your holiday leaves you drained instead of relaxed?

For more information, please contact:

Sarah Ewenson | 0409 079 559 | sewenson@theideassuite.com.au

About InsureandGo

ENDS

“If your holiday leaves you needing another holiday, you’re not alone,” says David. “Fortunately, just a few practical changes can help ensure you return rested, restored and ready to go.”

Five holiday health hacks from Insure&Go

Schedule a buffer day at each end of your trip for genuine rest.
Prioritise sleep, consider booking red-eyes where possible or add an extra hotel night after late arrivals.
Slash itinerary bloat and build in lazy mornings or pool afternoons.
Switch off work emails and enable emergency contacts only.
Check your insurance policy covers medical treatment abroad.

Aussies & Kiwis Flee Winter for Greener Getaways

Mon, 09 Feb 2026 06:50:26 GMT

Australian and New Zealanders are staging a mass winter walk-out, with new research showing over half (58%) intend to holiday overseas between June and September 2025. [1] The timing couldn’t be better for airlines, with international capacity from Australia already reaching 7.1 million departure seats in Q1 2025, up 6.1 per cent on last year and now nudging past pre-pandemic levels. [2]

Passengers are acting on that extra lift. Short-term resident departures reached 872,650 in March 2025, about seven per cent more than the same month in pre-COVID 2019, confirming that Australians are streaming overseas well before winter even begins.

The research comes from the 2025 Europ Assistance Holiday Barometer, a global survey of 21,000 respondents across 21 countries, commissioned by leading global assistance provider Europ Assistance , the parent company of award-winning Australian travel insurance provider Insure&Go .

What sets this exodus apart is its conscience. The Barometer reveals Australian and New Zealanders are willing to adopt sustainable travel practices. An impressive 87 per cent plan to support local businesses during their travels. Eight in ten will actively avoid waste (80%), while nearly three-quarters are willing to travel off-peak to reduce crowding (74%). Travellers are also more likely to use public transport on-site (73%), switch to lower-carbon transport options (67%) and choose green-certified accommodation (65%).

Destinations across Asia, Europe and the Americas are aiming to attract the eco-aware traveller. Tourism boards from Japan [3] to Spain [4] are sharpening their marketing around sustainability, while closer to home, countries like Singapore are ramping up promotion of their green credentials [5] .

The Barometer revealed the top three incentives that may further sway Australasian travellers to go green: 52 per cent list financial benefits from the government to help cover costs as the top factor, 49 per cent cite access to exclusive deals or experiences with sustainable brands and an equal 49 per cent want points or rewards for sustainable travel choices.

“From Hanoi’s electric-bus network to Singapore, the first country certified as a sustainable destination and Milan’s plastic-free boutique hotels, Australians are actively hunting for greener itineraries,” says David Mayo, Commercial & Marketing Director at Insure&Go . “Brands that treat sustainability as window-dressing may find themselves overlooked.”

[1] https://www.insureandgo.com.au/sites/default/files/2025-07/Europ-Assistance-Holiday-Barometer-2025.pdf

[2] https://aviationweek.com/air-transport/airports-networks/numbers-australia-q1-2025

[3] https://www.japan.travel/en/sustainable/

[4] https://turismo.gob.es/en-us/estrategia-turismo-sostenible/Paginas/Index.aspx

[5] https://www.stb.gov.sg/about-stb/media-publications/media-centre/singapore-achieves-global-destination-sustainability-certification

Insure&Go’s checklist for smarter, greener travel:

Book certified low-impact providers and seek out hotels, tours and airlines that carry recognised eco labels or GSTC accreditation.
Pack light as less weight equals lower emissions and fewer excess-baggage fees.
Offset what you can’t avoid by using reputable carbon-offset schemes to balance out unavoidable flight emissions.
Protect the trip and lock in travel insurance cover so a mishap doesn’t undo all that smart planning.

For more information, please contact:

Sarah Ewenson | 0409 079 559 | sewenson@theideassuite.com.au

About InsureandGo

ENDS

Aussies embrace DIY travel – but 6 in 10 make costly booking mistakes

Mon, 09 Feb 2026 06:27:22 GMT

83% of Aussies prefer to book their own flights, hotel accommodation or travel activities
Just 17% use travel agents for most of their bookings
57% admit to serious mistakes when researching and booking their travel

New research has revealed that a majority of Australian travellers are taking travel bookings into their own hands – and often paying the price. A significant 83 per cent of travellers now prefer to book their own flights, hotel accommodation or travel activities, with just 17 per cent relying on travel agents to do it all. The downside? Almost 6 in 10 admit to having made significant booking mistakes, from paying too much and choosing unsafe accommodation, to losing out on refunds when cancelling and missing travel connections.

The findings were derived from a new survey of a nationally representative, independent panel of 1009 Australians, commissioned by award-winning travel insurance provider Insure&Go , to gauge how Australians are planning their travel and whether they are making mistakes along the way.

The appetite for international travel to and from Australia continues to grow, with the Australian Bureau of Statistics recording 16.7 per cent year-on-year growth in departures and a 7.9 per cent growth in arrivals in April 2025. [1] Australians are fuelling their wanderlust online, with a 2025 Ipsos report revealing that online airline audiences in Australia increased 12 per cent year on year. [2] Overall, the Australian online travel bookings market is forecasted to grow at an annual compound rate of 3.8 per cent between 2024 (from around AUD$17bn in value) and 2033 (to around AUD$23.8bn in value). [3]

Insure&Go asked survey respondents how they (or their travel companion) typically plan and book international travel. Two-thirds (65%) tend to book their accommodation on online hotel booking platforms, 28 per cent book flights through flight comparison or aggregator websites, one quarter (26%) mostly find and book tours and activities through online platforms, and a quarter (25%) prefer to book directly with specific travel providers.

David Mayo, Insure&Go Commercial & Marketing Director, says: “Our research suggests that booking platforms are becoming the norm, with travellers now preferring to do their research and find deals online. However, professional advice still plays an important role – especially for more complex or high-cost itineraries, such as multi-stop tours, or trips involving families or older travellers.

“It’s easy to overlook what seem like minor details in your planning, but these can make or break your trip. You need to know, for instance, whether your travel insurance covers the activities you have planned or what’s buried in your travel provider’s cancellation policy fine print.”

[1] https://www.abs.gov.au/statistics/industry/tourism-and-transport/overseas-arrivals-and-departures-australia/latest-release

[2] https://iris-au.ipsos.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/Ipsos_iris-TravelReport-April-2025.pdf

[3] https://www.imarcgroup.com/australia-online-travel-bookings-market

Young travellers prefer digital; older travellers prefer a human touch

The survey results also highlight the preference among younger travellers for online platforms, while over-50s prefer travel booking methods where they can speak and correspond with real people.

Four in five (79%) of under-30s travellers, for instance, tend to book their own accommodation on online booking platforms, 40 per cent like to book their own flights on airfare comparison or aggregator platforms, and 33 per cent prefer to book their own tours and activities on online platforms – figures much higher than the total average.

Notably, more than 1 in 10 (12%) of all respondents have used AI tools or itinerary generators to plan their holidays. This figure rises to 24 per cent of under-30s, but drops to just 3 per cent of over-50s.

While young travellers lead the way in DIY travel, with 94 per cent of under-30s booking some aspects of their travel, the DIY travel category where over-50s lead the way is booking directly with travel operators (via emails or calls). One third (34%) of over-50s prefer to book this way, compared with 19 per cent of under-50s. And while only 8 per cent of under-30s tend to use travel agents for most bookings, that figure jumps to 28 per cent among over-50s.

For more information, please contact:

Sarah Ewenson | 0409 079 559 | sewenson@theideassuite.com.au

About InsureandGo

The pitfalls of planning alone: common mistakes still widespread

Despite the confidence in DIY travel, 58 per cent of respondents admitted to making mistakes, with the most common one (by 26%) being missing discounts or deals by booking at the wrong time – something that travel agents are traditionally used for.

Under-30s travellers are the age group most likely to have made mistakes in their travel bookings – a significant 78 per cent. One third (35%) have missed out on discounts or deals, 21 per cent have chosen unsafe or inconvenient accommodation, 23 per cent chose travel insurance with inadequate coverage, and 20 per cent booked non-refundable airfares, accommodation and tours, and had to cancel. Further, 11 per cent either underestimated travel time that led to delays or missed transport, or they selected travel insurance that didn’t cover key activities or emergencies.

David says that while designing travel itineraries and making bookings can be an empowering process, travellers should be aware of the risks. “Especially in relation to travel insurance, we encourage travellers to check whether the policy covers them for all their planned travel activities.

“Overall, while online booking platforms are easy to use, travellers committed to booking their own travel should always double-check the fine print, from cancellation policies to refund conditions.”

Freedom, flexibility and better deals driving the DIY travel movement

Insure&Go asked respondents why they prefer to organise their own trips, whether it be accommodation, flights or tours. Almost two-thirds (63%) said they enjoy the freedom and creativity of designing their own itineraries, while more than half (56%) believe they can find better deals on their own. Almost a third (31%) said DIY travel booking gives them greater control over their budget and spending, while 29 per cent value the flexibility to make last-minute changes.

Insure&Go’s survey results below:

57% of Australians would go abroad for medical procedures amid rising healthcare costs, new survey reveals

Mon, 09 Feb 2026 05:52:24 GMT

65% would seek overseas dental procedures
42% would travel overseas for lifesaving or life-extending cancer treatments
Cost savings motivate 37% of Australians

An estimated 15,000 Australians travel abroad annually for medical procedures, [1] contributing to a global medical tourism market growing at a rate of 15-25 per cent. [2] Thailand, India, South Korea, Turkey, and Malaysia are the most popular destinations for this purpose. [3] Despite Australian governments advising caution around medical tourism, [4] new research has found more than half of Australians are willing to risk overseas medical treatments, largely to save money.

The findings come from a survey of an independent, nationally representative panel of 1006 Australians, commissioned by award-winning travel Australian insurance provider Insure&Go to gauge the influences motivating Australians to seek treatment overseas, and which treatments they are likely to travel for.

With healthcare costs rising by 6.8 per cent this year [5] and hospital wait times for elective surgery in public hospitals increasing by 18 per cent in 2022-23 YoY, the Insure&Go research reveals that a staggering 57 per cent of Australians would consider travelling overseas for medical procedures. Remarkably, 69 per cent would do so knowing that complications arising from their treatment would not be covered by travel insurance.

Authorities continue to caution Australians to consider the heightened risks associated with overseas medical procedures, including infection, antibiotic-resistant bacteria, and disfigurement due to lower-quality practices in some foreign countries. [7] There are also financial risks should patients have complications that require additional treatment, which are not likely to be covered by travel insurance or Medicare upon return to Australia.

[1] Medical tourism and insurance – Better Health Channel

[2] Patients Beyond Borders | Media

[3] https://www.betterhealth.vic.gov.au/health/healthyliving/medical-tourism

[4] Medical tourism and insurance – Better Health Channel and https://www.smartraveller.gov.au/before-you-go/health/medical-tourism

[5] Monthly Household Spending Indicator, July 2024 | Australian Bureau of Statistics (abs.gov.au)

[6]https://www.aihw.gov.au/reports-data/myhospitals/sectors/elective-surgery

[7] Medical tourism and insurance – Better Health Channel and Medical tourism (2017) | RACS (surgeons.org)

What procedures would Aussies travel for?

The survey revealed that a significant 65 per cent of respondents would seek dental procedures abroad, including dental implants, veneers, and smile makeovers. These procedures were most popular among respondents aged 24-44 (26% of this cohort).

Forty-two (42) per cent of respondents would seek life-saving or life-extending cancer treatments that are not available in Australia. For these procedures, the Australian Government has developed a Medical Procedures Overseas Program to guide and support patients financially. [8] Respondents over age 55 are least likely to seek treatment overseas for this reason. Just 8 per cent of respondents aged 55-64 and 9 per cent of respondents aged over 65 chose this option, compared with 25 per cent who are 35-44-year-olds.

Cosmetic treatments and plastic surgeries are the third most common procedures respondents would go overseas for with 33 per cent saying they would travel for breast augmentation, rhinoplasty, facelift, or similar cosmetic treatments. Perhaps not surprisingly, the age group most likely to travel for cosmetic treatments are Aussies aged 25-34, making up 31 per cent of respondents who chose this option. By comparison, older generations are least likely to seek cosmetic procedures with just 13 per cent of 45-54-year-olds, 9 per cent of 55-64-year-olds and 3 per cent of over-65s prepared to risk international treatment for these procedures.

Full survey results can be accessed here .

ENDS

For more information, please contact:

Sarah Ewenson | 0409 079 559 | sewenson@theideassuite.com.au

About InsureandGo

[8] Medical Treatment Overseas Program | Australian Government Department of Health and Aged Care

[9] https://www.ama.com.au/sites/default/files/2024-04/2024-ama-public-hospital-report-card_0.pdf

Insure&Go urges caution amid rising trend

Insure&Go spokesperson David Mayo warned Australians to consider carefully why they are going overseas for treatment and what the trip may inevitably cost them.

“In most cases, travel insurance covers unknown incidents – not the risks you know about, such as planned medical procedures,” he said. “If something goes wrong during or after your procedure, it could end up costing you much more than you would have paid to have the treatment at home.

“Every country has different standards of medical care and practitioner qualifications, and it can be difficult to assess this. There are many resources available to help you make a more informed decision. Understand the risks, research the exclusions in your travel insurance, and compare the cost of having that procedure overseas to the cost, financially and mentally, if something does go wrong.”

66% Aussies will cut holidays or seek bargains amid slumping AUD and rising travel costs

Mon, 09 Feb 2026 05:25:04 GMT

25% of Aussies will cut back on their trips in the next 12 months
47% will look for cheaper airfares
30% will seek bundled holiday packages
20% will jump on last-minute deals as they seek to make their travel dollar go further

Australians are feeling the pinch from a falling Aussie dollar and rising travel costs — and it’s changing how they plan their travel over the next 12 months. New research shows that two-thirds of Australians (66%) will either cut back on trips or seek cheaper options and deals. Nearly half (47%) will lock in cheaper airfares, while 30 per cent will seek bundled holiday deals to find savings, and 20 per cent will seek last-minute deals.

The findings were derived from a new survey of a nationally representative, independent panel of 1009 Australians, commissioned by award-winning travel insurance provider Insure&Go , to find out how ever-increasing overseas travel costs will impact their travel plans.

A weak Australian currency means that travellers receive less value when making purchases – or exchanging money – overseas, increasing the cost of their travel. Currently, one Australian dollar buys around 0.56 Euro, 0.64 USD and 0.48 GBP. At these rates, a 5 Euro coffee would equal AUD$8.93.

Even domestically, Aussies are finding no relief as airfares spike significantly and accommodation prices grow. A recent report has projected a 13.7 per cent year-on-year increase in economy-class airfares within Australia – compared with just 2.3-3.7 per cent in other continents. [1] Prices for accommodation domestically also grew 5.3 per cent in the 12 months to April 2025. [2]

David Mayo, Insure&Go Commercial & Marketing Director, says: “Our survey reveals that people are adapting quickly to the rising cost of travel and currency challenges. The appetite for travel is still strong, with just 25 per cent of Australians willing to cut back on the number of trips they take. A much higher proportion will get smarter about stretching their budget further – from finding bundled flight and hotel deals, hunting for airfare sales, or booking at the last minute.”

Insure&Go asked survey respondents what they will look for when hunting for deals. Cost is the top priority. Two thirds (69%) say they will be purely motivated by price and are willing to sacrifice flexibility in their travel dates and even accommodation options to make savings. This figure is largely driven by under-30s (at 72%) than 30-50-year-olds (70%) and over-50s (61%).

But prices aren’t the only priority – flexibility and inclusions matter too. Two in five (42%) say they’ll prioritise deals with flexible cancellation and refund policies, suggesting they’ll nab a bargain early, knowing they can cancel if their plans change. A similar proportion (43%) will prioritise deals with inclusions such as meals and tours, recognising that these add-ons can significantly impact the overall cost of a trip.

Insure&Go also found that over-50s are less likely to change their travel plans due to costs, with 35 per cent indicating they won’t change their plans, compared with 28 per cent of under-50s.

David says: “Over the next 12 months, value will be priority for Australian travellers, as they grapple with a low Aussie dollar, especially in Europe, Great Britain and the Americas. They will prioritise price more than the freedom of choosing their preferred dates and accommodation.

“But while it’s easy to get caught up in the excitement of a travel deal, it’s important to always check the fine print across all bookings and your insurance. Your travel insurance should cover cancellations, delays, all prepaid components of the deal, as well as any risky activities. While budgets are tight, it’s important not to cut corners on insurance, as a cheap deal can quickly become expensive if an unexpected event changes your plans or something goes wrong overseas.”

[1] https://experience.amexglobalbusinesstravel.com/air-monitor/2025/

[2] https://www.abs.gov.au/statistics/economy/price-indexes-and-inflation/monthly-consumer-price-index-indicator

Insure&Go’s survey results below:

For more information, please contact:

Sarah Ewenson | 0409 079 559 | sewenson@theideassuite.com.au

About InsureandGo

84% of Aussies to avoid peak travel this year as airfares rise and capacity drops

Mon, 09 Feb 2026 05:01:22 GMT

74% of Australians took at least one trip during off-peak times in 2024
10% more Aussies will travel off-peak this year
84% of parents would take their kids out of school to enjoy off-peak travel

A new survey has found that 84 per cent of Aussie travellers will avoid at least one peak school holiday period this year to evade higher prices, congestion and travel disruptions – a 10 per cent increase on 2024. A staggering 82 per cent of those with school-aged children say they would remove them from school to travel outside of school holiday periods for these reasons.

The findings follow the loss of two domestic airlines in 2024, decreasing competition and seat capacity, all contributing to airfare hikes. Bonza went into liquidation in April 2024 after less than 18 months in operation [1] while Rex suspended its major city routes in July 2024. [2] Airfares subsequently increased since July 2024, with the average revenue per passenger jumping by 13.3 per cent to September 2024. Seat capacity also fell by six per cent while passenger numbers persisted. Airline reliability has also fluctuated with average cancellation rates sitting at two per cent for September and on-time arrival rates at 75 per cent, representing more than 10,000 late arrivals. [ 3]

Award-winning travel insurance provider Insure&Go commissioned a survey of an independent, nationally representative panel of 1006 Australians to gauge how this landscape was affecting travel habits. In 2024, a whopping 74 per cent of respondents holidayed at least once during off-peak periods or low season due to higher prices and the risk of congestion and travel disruptions. This year, 84 per cent intend to avoid travelling during school holidays at least once for the same reasons.

[1] The inside story behind Bonza’s collapse – Australian Aviation

[2] Domestic airline competition in Australia

[3] https://www.accc.gov.au/system/files/domestic-airline-competition-australia-november2024.pdf

Thirty percent of parents would take children out of school for off-peak travel

Among the 59 per cent of respondents who had school-aged children, 30 per cent were in favour of taking kids out of school for between two to three days to avoid the school holidays. Another 33 per cent would take their kids out of school for a week, with younger parents aged 18-29 the most likely to holiday for up to a week during the school term.

In most states, parents are legally liable for ensuring their children attend school and for explaining their absences. In most instances, travel is not accepted as a reason for non-attendance unless approved by the school.

Victorian mother-of-three Karen Casey made special arrangements with her children’s primary school when her family took a six-week trip around Australia a few years ago. On a more recent occasion, her family travelled within the final few days of the school term to avoid congestion, delays and higher airfares and accommodation prices.

She says: “When we took our extended trip around Australia we made arrangements with the school for the kids to complete work while on the road. They were also having unique experiences at the places we visited and they learnt and grew so much from that too. For a more recent and shorter interstate trip, we left a few days before the holidays started to get cheaper airfares and accommodation, to avoid the notorious delays at the airports and to fit in with my husband’s and my work schedules. The schools my children attend often set curriculum days on the last day of term. In that last week the kids have usually completed the term’s work and classes consist of term-end parties and extra-curricular activities. We didn’t feel like they would be falling behind in that time if we were to start our holiday a couple of days early to take advantage of prices and timelines that suited our budget and schedules.”

ENDS

For more information, please contact:

Sarah Ewenson | 0409 079 559 | sewenson@theideassuite.com.au

About InsureandGo

Domestic travel most popular off-peak

The Insure&Go survey found that in 2024, 40 per cent of respondents travelled during off-peak or low seasons for domestic holidays, compared with 16 per cent for international holidays. Those aged 30-49 (41%) and over 50 (40%) are most likely to have travelled domestically during off-peak times. Under-30s are most likely to have taken advantage of off-peak or low seasons for international travel (23%), though off-peak domestic travel remained the priority for this age group last year (39%).

Insure&Go, Commercial & Marketing Director, David Mayo says: “These figures reflect some of the lifestyle and budget restraints confronting Australians right now. School terms funnel their holidays into set periods, increasing demand on flights, accommodation and other travel necessities – and inevitably pushing prices up and creating congestion at airports and holiday destinations. We understand people want to avoid the trials of those peak periods but not everyone has that flexibility. Travel insurance that covers cancellations can be an essential safety net if things don’t go as planned.”

‘Workations’ on the rise: 1 in 3 Aussie bosses approve working holidays

Mon, 09 Feb 2026 04:36:14 GMT

43% of employees admit to taking a holiday while working remotely
37% had their boss’s approval, signals a shift in workplace flexibility
Under-50s are twice as likely to take a working holiday (56%) than over-50s (25%)

Remote and hybrid working arrangements have blurred the line between work and play, with half (43%) of Aussie employees admitting they’ve taken a holiday while working remotely. And it’s not just digital nomads fueling this trend; one in three (37%) bosses are now openly allowing ‘workations’.

The findings come from a survey of an independent, nationally representative panel of 1006 Australians, commissioned by award-winning travel insurance provider Insure&Go , which sought to discover the extent employees were mixing flexible work with travel.

Many Aussie bosses are saying yes to ‘work from anywhere’

Despite big corporations like Amazon [1] , Tabcorp [2] and Dell [3] issuing return-to-office mandates, 36 per cent of employed Australians are still working remotely in some capacity. [4]

David Mayo, Commercial and Marketing Director at Insure&Go, says businesses are increasingly recognising that work flexibility is key to talent retention.

“With only three per cent [5] of employees in Australia wanting to return to the office full-time, businesses that embrace hybrid or remote models are more likely to attract and retain staff. Employees now expect a degree of flexibility and for many Australians that means the freedom to work from anywhere, including while travelling.”

In fact, 37 per cent of employers believe changes to remote working laws will have the greatest potential to increase workforce availability, and nearly half (49%) anticipate offering cross-border remote work options in the next five years – almost double the global average. [6]

Co-working spaces that cater to employees blending work and travel are popping up in popular holiday destinations like the Gold Coast, Margaret River and the Mornington Peninsula. [7] With forecasts suggesting that co-working spaces could take up more than 30 per cent of lettable commercial space within a decade, the trend suggests that workations may soon become a mainstream option for Australian professionals. [8]

[1] Amazon

[2] Announced via Tabcorp internal email

[3] Announced via Dell internal memo

[4] https://www.abs.gov.au/statistics/labour/earnings-and-working-conditions/working-arrangements/latest-

release

[5] https://www.morganmckinley.com/au/article/remote-resistance-despite-company-mandates-employees-seek-flexibility-in-australia

[6] WEF_Future_of_Jobs_Report_2025.pdf p115 & 66

[7] FWA Member Directory – Flexible Workspace Australia

[8] Flexible Workspace Association | Australia

Younger Aussies lead the workation trend

The Insure&Go survey findings also highlighted a generational divide in attitudes towards working holidays, with 56 per cent of under-50s having taken a workation, compared with just 25 per cent of over-50s.

Only six per cent of employees, who worked while travelling, kept it a secret from their boss, reinforcing the high level of trust between employees and employers in Australia. Of those who didn’t disclose their workation, 40 per cent cited it was unnecessary to advise where they were doing their work, and 35 per cent feared they’d be denied permission.

Employees aged 30-49 were the most likely to be upfront about where they were working, with 49 per cent gaining their employer’s approval. Under-30s adults are also highly likely to seek permission (at 46%). By comparison, 22 per cent of over-50s told employers they would take a holiday while working. The youngest generation is more likely to keep their working holiday quiet (at 11%) with 44 per cent fearing their boss would deny them permission to work away from home.

Men are the most likely to take a workation, with 51 per cent taking a personal domestic trip while working remotely compared with 35 per cent of women.

Survey results below

Q1. Have you ever taken a personal domestic trip away – even for 1 day – and still worked remotely?

ENDS

For more information, please contact:

Sarah Ewenson | 0409 079 559 | sewenson@theideassuite.com.au

About InsureandGo

Workation trends across Australia: NSW leads the way

Insure&Go analysed survey responses across the five major states, and found the most populous state had more employees taking workations, including with their boss’s approval. Almost half (46%) of NSW employees have taken a day trip or holiday while working, followed by 43 per cent of Victorian and West Australian employees. By comparison, 38 per cent of Queensland workers and 37 per cent of South Australian workers take workations.

NSW bosses were also most likely to grant permission for workations (at 40%). Victoria was close behind (37%), followed by Western Australia (35%), South Australia (32%) and Queensland (31%). West Australian employees were most likely to keep their working holiday under wraps, at 9 per cent, close to double the rate in South Australia (4%) and Victoria (5%). In Western Australia, 33 per cent of employees felt disclosure was unnecessary.

David says with remote work evolving, businesses are recognising the benefits of work flexibility, and employees are reaping the rewards. However, he cautions both employees and employers to ensure they are adequately covered for any mishaps while away.

“Workations come with practical considerations. Employees travelling with expensive laptops, phones and other essential tech should ensure they are protected, either through company insurance or a domestic travel policy. Travellers should check if their policy covers lost, stolen or damaged devices while working away.”

“For those considering a workation, transparency is key. With businesses shifting between remote and in-office models, many employers are open to flexible arrangements, but it’s always best practice to ask first,” says David.

Q2. What was your reason for not disclosing to your employer?

Designer breeds top the list of dog insurance claims for common illnesses and disorders

Mon, 19 Jan 2026 01:42:10 GMT

Our loved pooches may be our best friends but, just like us, they can be susceptible to a range of health issues that can impact their quality of life. Now, new data based on pet insurance claims has revealed the most claimed conditions affecting household dogs, helping pet owners spot potential problems early.

Petsy , one of Australia’s leading pet insurance providers, has released its own claims data identifying the top nine most common dog illnesses and disorders, the breeds with the highest number of claims for each condition, and the average age of the canine when the claim is made.

Petsy found that the top three most claimed illnesses are frequently seen among designer breeds. For instance, the number one condition – gastro-intestinal and digestive system disorders – is among Cockapoos (a Cocker Spaniel-Poodle cross breed), impacting them at the average age of 2.4 years.

Skin disorders are especially common among Tamaruke Miniatures (a cross-breed Labrador or Poodle with smaller breeds like Miniature Poodle, Cavalier King Charles Spaniel or Dachshund) affecting them at an average age of 2.6 years. This designer mix is often marketed as having a non-shedding, hypo-allergenic coat, however the ‘Poodle’ in these breeds, and their dense curly non-shed coats, may make them more susceptible to skin irritations and sensitivities [1] .

Sheepadoodles (Old English Sheepdog-Poodle crosses) top Petsy’s list for ear disorders, typically experiencing issues around 2.2 years. Their floppy ears create closed, warm and humid ear canals that can encourage bacterial and yeast infections.

Fourth on the list are leg, hip, and shoulder disorders, which are most often seen in Australian Cattle Dogs and Blue Heeler crosses in Petsy’s data, with cases emerging at an average age of 3.2 years. It’s no wonder, with these working breeds requiring lots of physical exercise, putting them at risk of joint wear and tear.

Pure breeds start making an appearance halfway down the list of most claimed illnesses and disorders. Eye disorders are most claimed in British (English) Bulldogs, at an average 3.1 years of age. With their flat facial structure, this breed often suffers from inward-turning eyelids, cherry eye [2] and dry eye, which can cause irritation and vision problems.

Paw injuries appear most frequently for White Swiss Shepherd Dogs, at an average 2.9 years. This powerful, medium to large breed of dog has an active lifestyle, which may contribute to paw-pad injuries such as embedded grass seeds, torn nails and cysts.

Tumours, warts, cysts, growths and abscesses rank highest among Saint Bernards, leading to insurance claims when the dog is, on average, 4.6 years – the oldest average age in Petsy’s list. This is likely due to their large size and predisposition to bone cancer and lymphoma [3] . Their heavy skin folds may contribute to the formation of cyst and abscesses.

Respiratory system disorders are seen more in Pomeranians, usually surfacing at 2.8 years. Toy breeds with short muzzles can be prone to tracheal (windpipe) collapse that can cause coughing and wheezing [4] .

Rounding out the list are urinary system disorders, with Hungarian Vizslas the most frequently affected, appearing at an average of 2.4 years of age. This breed has a predisposition to bladder and kidney issues such as urinary stones and urinary tract infections.

Monica Limanto, Founder of Petsy, says: “We Australians love our pets as part of family. Of the two-thirds of households that own a pet, half own a dog [5] , and 14 per cent of household spending goes towards vet services [6] .

“Before choosing a designer, cross or pure breed – and to know how to care for it – it’s important to understand the potential health issues the breed could encounter. Some breeds are more at risk of common illnesses or disorders, so regular vet check-ups for preventative care and to detect any early symptoms are essential to ensure they live long, high-quality lives.

“Owners can easily take proactive steps to manage their dog’s health and wellbeing. Medical treatments for chronic illnesses and disorders can be costly, which is why it is important to take out pet insurance before any health issues arise, so that owners don’t have to worry about unexpected vet bills.”

[1] https://vetericyn.com/blog/poodle-skin-problems/?srsltid=AfmBOooBrB1eO0phx2G_t_v81OWpUnTr81Vbv_1po98pXsh8ZiWgPZIX

[2] https://www.petmd.com/dog/general-health/evr_dg_eye_problems_in_dogs

[3] https://www.petmd.com/dog/breeds/saint-bernard

[4] https://www.vet.cornell.edu/departments-centers-and-institutes/riney-canine-health-center/canine-health-information/tracheal-collapse#:~:text=Tracheal%20collapse%20is%20a%20progressive,are%20middle%2Daged%20or%20older .

[5] https://kb.rspca.org.au/knowledge-base/how-many-pets-are-there-in-australia/

[6] https://kb.rspca.org.au/knowledge-base/how-many-pets-are-there-in-australia/

Monica shares her 7 tips for looking after your dog:

Regular vet checkups. Take your dog to the vet at least once a year to check for any emerging diseases, parasites and to ensure they are up to date on their vaccines, worming and preventative care. Puppies, older dogs and those with chronic health issues might require more regular visits.
Wash and groom your dog every 6-12 weeks. Depending on the breed, your dog will benefit from a DIY or professional clean and groom every 6-12 weeks to keep its skin and fur healthy, reduce shedding and matting and prevent possible skin infections. It’s a good idea to brush long-haired dogs a few times a week.
Ensure your dog exercises every day. Exercise – such as regular walks and play sessions – prevents obesity and is important for a dog’s heart health. However, different breeds require different levels of exercise. When choosing a breed, make sure you’re aware of how much exercise it will need. While small breeds such as a Dachshund only require 30-60 minutes of low intensity exercise per day [1] , a high-energy breed such as a Border Collie or Afghan Hound needs at least 2 hours of exercise a day. [2]
Maintain a healthy diet. Dogs require a healthy and balanced diet with high-protein sources to support the growth and maintenance of their muscles and organs. Make sure that all their necessary vitamins and minerals are included in their daily meals. One to two meals a day is adequate for adult dogs, while puppies usually need three to four meals.
Know what isn’t good for your dog. Most owners know chocolate is toxic to dogs, but did you know they also can’t have macadamia nuts, grapes, raisins, onions and garlic? Make sure all dangerous foods are out of reach to keep your dog healthy – this includes cooked bones, which can splinter and cause internal injuries.
Monitor any unusual behaviour. Dogs tend to know when something is wrong. If they start sleeping more, lose their appetite, stop drinking water or have excessive thirst, start vomiting, or have diarrhea, organise a visit to the vet as soon as possible.
Taking out pet insurance early. Having insurance for your dog early in its life helps to cover unexpected illnesses or accidents, giving you peace of mind and helping you afford necessary medical treatment. Make sure to review the policy details, including any exclusions or waiting periods, so you’re well-prepared for future vet expenses.

[7] https://lyka.com.au/blog/low-maintenance-dogs-australia

[8] https://www.newsweek.com/dog-breeds-that-need-lot-exercise-1604525

The top 9 dog illnesses and disorders, breeds and average age – by Petsy:

The table above highlights recent pet insurance claims data from Petsy Pet Insurance, showing the most common conditions and the breeds with the highest number of claims for each. This snapshot reflects current trends over a recent claims period and may vary year to year. It is not intended to suggest that these breeds are inherently more prone to illness, but rather to provide insight based on recent data. Breed-specific health risks can depend on many factors, including genetics, lifestyle and environment.

Disclaimer: This media release is for general information only and does not constitute veterinary or financial advice. Pet owners should consult a veterinarian for health concerns and review policy documents for coverage details.

For more information, please contact:

Cameron Magusic | 0404 261 974 | cmagusic@theideassuite.com.au

Julia Nekich | 0410 796 800 | jnekich@theideassuite.com.au

Luna takes the lead as Australia’s top pet name

Mon, 19 Jan 2026 01:31:22 GMT

It’s official, Luna is Australia’s favourite name for furry family members, leading the pack for both dogs and cats in 2025, according to new data from national pet insurance provider Petsy.

The name Luna, that takes inspiration from celestial themes to pop culture icons, is the most popular name for both dogs and cats across the country.

Rounding out the top dog names were Coco, Charlie and Poppy, while Nala, Milo and Mochi followed Luna among top cat names. Interestingly, Teddy, Charlie and Leo made appearances in both top 10 lists, showing that when it comes to pet names, Aussies can’t go past traditional, human-style choices that transcend species.

“Pet names say a lot about how Australians view their pets, they’re part of the family. We’re seeing strong trends towards short, playful, and affectionate names,” said Monica Limanto, Founder of Petsy.

The top 10 most popular dog names in Australia

Luna
Coco
Charlie
Poppy
Teddy
Bella
Archie
Lola
Daisy
Leo

The top 10 most popular cat names in Australia

Luna
Nala
Milo
Mochi
Teddy
Millie
Charlie
Simba
Lily
Leo

New data reveals Australia’s surprising cat divide

Mon, 19 Jan 2026 01:28:22 GMT

New data reveals the most popular cat breeds by State and Territory and what’s driving the national moggie obsession. Australia has long been a nation of animal lovers, but when it comes to cats, we’re more than ever choosing pets that fit modern living.

Figures released today by leading pet insurance provider Petsy show that the Domestic Shorthair cat is the most popular breed in nearly every state and territory, dominating pet insurance policies across the country. Except in one place: the Northern Territory, where the plush, blue-eyed Ragdoll takes the crown.

The results reflect a deeper story about rising costs, urban lifestyles, social media influence and post-pandemic pet preferences.

“Cats have always been a fixture of Australian homes, but we’ve seen a real shift in the last few years,” says Petsy Founder Monica Limanto. “More Australians are choosing pets that suit compact living, tighter budgets and flexible work arrangements – and the Domestic Shorthair ticks all those boxes.”

Why cats are winning hearts (and households) in 2025

Australia is home to approximately 5.3 million pet cats, with our feline friends found in one-third of households. [1] While dogs remain the country’s number one pet at 6.4 million, [2] cats are quietly increasing in popularity, thanks in large part to their affordability. [3]

On average, cat upkeep costs around $1,715 per year, compared to $3,218 for dogs. In a cost-of-living crisis, that difference matters. [4]

Cats are also better suited to apartment living, increasingly popular with renters and more flexible for owners returning to the office from hybrid or remote work. During the pandemic, nearly one in four Aussie cat owners adopted their feline, helping to fuel the rise of both rescue cats and highly Instagrammable breeds like Ragdolls and Maine Coons.

[1] https://kb.rspca.org.au/knowledge-base/how-can-we-best-manage-domestic-cats-in-australia/

[2] https://www.dogster.com/lifestyle/how-many-dogs-are-there-in-australia

[3] https://animalmedicinesaustralia.org.au/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/AMAU008-Pet-Ownership22-Report_v1.6_WEB.pdf

[4] https://kb.rspca.org.au/knowledge-base/how-many-pets-are-there-in-australia/

State and Territory breakdown

The Petsy data shows that Domestic Shorthair Cats are comfortably the top breed in most Australians homes, including New South Wales (34%), South Australia (34%), Victoria (33%), ACT (32%), Queensland (30%), Western Australia (32%) and Tasmania (43%)

Only the Northern Territory breaks the cycle, where the pampered Ragdoll accounts for a substantial third (33%) of policies, nudging the Domestic Shorthair into second place (27%).

From colony ships to TikTok stars

Cats have a long history in Australia. Introduced with the First Fleet as rat catchers, they became common household pets by the 1830s and were even released into the wild to control rabbits in the 19th century, unfortunately laying the groundwork for today’s feral cat problem. [5]

Today’s cats are less likely to roam farms and more likely to dominate phone screens. On TikTok and Instagram, Ragdolls, Maine Coons and other pedigrees are driving breed-specific trends, especially among Gen Z and Millennial pet owners.

But while the glamorous breeds grab attention online, it’s the sturdy, affectionate Domestic Shorthair, often adopted from shelters, that still rules the nation’s heart.

“For many families, cats offer companionship without the overheads of dog ownership,” says Monica. “And with adoption rates still high and budgets stretched, it’s no surprise the humble moggie continues to come out on top.”

[5] https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cats_in_Australia

About Petsy

Petsy has quickly become a leading pet insurance provider in Australia, dedicated exclusively to dogs and cats. It offers comprehensive coverage with annual limits of up to $30,000 and no sub-limits on claimable conditions, and its customisable policy options allow pet owners to tailor coverage to their specific needs. Petsy is also the preferred pet insurance provider to Costco members nationally. Petsy has been recognised for delivering outstanding value pet insurance through multiple awards, winning Canstar’s 2024 and 2025 Outstanding Value in Pet Insurance Award, MOZO’s 2024 and 2025 Experts Choice Awards, and WeMoney’s Best for Value Pet Insurance Award and Best for Young Pets Pet Insurance Award. Visit petsy.com.au .

Data source: Policy data 2024 – 2025

Top five cat breeds in each State and Territory by Petsy policies:

ENDS

As pet surrenders climb, adopters urged to prepare for hidden health costs

Mon, 19 Jan 2026 00:49:56 GMT

Animal shelters are witnessing a growing number of pet surrenders as Australians grapple with rising living costs, relocations and downsizing. More than 81,000 animals entered RSPCA shelters nationally in 2023-24, while Companion Animal Network Australia (CANA) reported an 11.6 per cent increase in pet surrenders in the 2024 financial year. [1]

While most of these pets are finding new homes, experts warn that adopters often face challenges when it comes to their new pet’s health. Unknown medical histories, pre-existing conditions and adjustment issues can lead to unexpected healthcare costs for new owners.

Leading pet insurance provider Petsy says the health of rescue pets is often less clear-cut than adopters expect. Founder Monica Limanto says, “Shelters do an amazing job rescuing, assessing and caring for household animals. Most will provide health checks, vaccinations, parasite treatments and even behavioural assessments. But it’s important for adopters to understand that some chronic conditions, particularly in older pets, may not be immediately obvious.”

[1] https://rspca.sfo2.cdn.digitaloceanspaces.com/public/Uploads/annual-statistics/RSPCA-Australia-Annual-Statistics-2023-2024.pdf

Illness, not injury, drives most claims

Petsy’s national claims data shows illnesses make up 70 per cent of approved or partially approved claims. Among illness-related claims, gastrointestinal and digestive disorders are the most common at 23 per cent, followed by skin disorders at 14 per cent and ear conditions at 9 per cent.

Eye disorders, urinary and respiratory issues, as well as growths and cysts, also appear frequently, while a broad range of less common conditions — from neurological and oral health problems through to hormonal and blood disorders — make up the remainder. Some of these health issues may already be present in rescue pets but may only emerge as the animal settles into a new environment, diet and routine.

“It’s good practice to find out if treatment for any health conditions will be an out-of-pocket cost before signing the adoption papers. Asking questions up-front and speaking to your insurer during a cooling offer period (if applicable), can help avoid surprises down the track. In fact, Petsy walks owners through a pre-existing condition assessment that reveals what aspects of their new pet’s health care can be covered under their policy.”

Monica says a little preparation can give rescue-pet owners peace of mind. “One of the most compassionate you can do is adopt a pet – and adopters want transparency around their pet’s health and the associated costs. A health assessment, based on a vet check, can help adopters plan their pet’s healthcare and help them step into pet parenthood with transparency and confidence.”

“With summer approaching, when heat and allergens can flare up skin and digestive issues, and with shelters continuing to rehome thousands of animals each year, protecting both your pet and your finances is the best way to give a rescue their happily ever after.”

Petsy is offering rescue-pet adopters five practical tips to help prepare them for pet parenthood.

Give your new rescue pet time to adjust. Your pet’s history might be unknown; it may have experienced stress, neglect or multiple homes. Try to give them a peaceful and comfortable space where they can retreat and let them adjust over time.
Establish a gentle, predictable routine. Develop, and stick to, a routine for feeding, exercise and rest. This will help your pet feel secure, as it’s known that predictability reduces anxiety and helps build trust, especially for animals with uncertain backgrounds.
Encourage good behaviour with positive reinforcement. Encourage your pet gently and use rewards – not punishment – to fine-tune their behaviour. Many rescue pets could be fearful or cautious, which is why patience and kindness are more effective for bonding.
Socialise slowly. Introduce your pet to new people, other pets and environments gradually. Controlled, positive experiences will help them build confidence and adapt to their new life with minimal issues.
Invest in health from day one. Arrange a comprehensive vet check within 30 days of adoption to find out if your pet has any pre-existing health conditions. Petsy’s pre-existing condition health assessment ( https://petsy.com.au/understanding-pre-existing-conditions/ ) will give you a detailed understanding of any health conditions that will or won’t be covered by pet insurance.

See here for more information about Petsy’s pre-existing health assessment: https://petsy.com.au/understanding-pre-existing-conditions/ .

About Petsy

ENDS

Australia’s most pet-obsessed suburbs revealed

Mon, 19 Jan 2026 00:39:14 GMT

New figures have revealed Australia’s most pet-loving suburbs, from apartment strongholds in Sydney and Melbourne, to leafy suburbs in South Australia and coastal areas in Queensland and Western Australia. Leading pet insurance provider Petsy – winner of the 2025 Canstar ‘Outstanding Value for Pet Insurance’ award – has ranked the top five suburbs for dog and cat ownership across the major states, with some surprising results.

The suburb-level analysis, drawn from Petsy’s national pet insurance data, offers a unique glimpse into which areas Aussies are most embracing furry family members.

In NSW and Victoria, square-metre limits are no deterrent to pet ownership. Petsy discovered that many of the top pet-loving suburbs are also known for strata living. In NSW, Rosebery in the city’s inner west and beachside Maroubra tie at first place, while inner-city Alexandria and Marrickville follow in third and fourth place, respectively. Some of the most devoted pet parents in Victoria are in Melbourne CBD, South Yarra and St Kilda.

In South Australia and Western Australia, the trend flips – where it’s all about space, backyards and beach access. Adelaide’s Woodcroft and Mount Barker in the Hills – dotted with backyards and green spaces – take out the State’s top spots. Western Australia’s Scarborough and Waikiki are attractive for dog owners thanks to their beachside locations, while Baldivis is a growing young-family suburb.

Meanwhile, half of the top five ranking in Queensland for furry family members are in the Gold Coast, with Pimpama, Southport and Coomera making the top two ranking.

Petsy Founder Monica Limanto says: “Our data has given us a fun glimpse into the suburbs where pets are most loved. In the eastern states, it’s clear apartment living isn’t holding back households from embracing pet life.

“At Petsy, it’s also good news that many households are choosing to protect their pets like family. Pet insurance helps cover vet bills for unexpected incidents, giving owners peace of mind and helping them say ‘yes’ to treatment when their pets need it most.”

Top 5 Australian suburbs rankings for dog and cat ownership:

NSW

Rosebery & Maroubra (equal first)
Alexandria
Macquarie Park
North Sydney
Marrickville

Victoria

Melbourne & Berwick (equal first)
Point Cook
Preston
St Kilda & Pakenham
South Yarra & Glen Iris

Queensland:

Pimpama
Southport and Coomera (equal second)
Upper Coomera and Cleveland (equal third)
Varsity Lakes, Nerang, Morningside, Moorooka, Riverview, Greenbank, Maudsland (equal fourth)
Buderim, Redbank Plains, Palm Beach, Nundah (equal fifth)

South Australia:

Woodcroft
Mount Barker
Prospect
Aberfoyle Park
Henley Beach

Western Australia:

Scarborough
Baldivis
Waikiki & Port Kennedy (equal third)
Mount Lawley & Fremantle (equal fourth)
Rivervale

About Petsy

Petsy is also the preferred pet insurance provider to Costco members nationally. Petsy has been recognised for delivering outstanding value pet insurance through multiple awards, winning Canstar’s 2024 and 2025 Outstanding Value in Pet Insurance Award, MOZO’s 2024 Experts Choice Awards, and WeMoney’s Best for Value Pet Insurance Award and Best for Young Pets Pet Insurance Award. Visit petsy.com.au .

Summer is Australia’s most dangerous season for pets: pet owners urged to plan now

Fri, 16 Jan 2026 01:56:46 GMT

As temperatures increase and daylight lingers, Australia’s pets face an increase in life-threatening risks, from snakes and ticks to fleas and heat stress. Pet insurance provider Petsy is urging owners to prepare now, saying too many pet emergencies each summer are preventable with simple, proactive planning.

An estimated 6200 snake-bite incidents are expected for Australia’s dogs every year. [1] The majority occur of these bites occur in the summer, with approximately 84 per cent of cases linked to the warmest months of the year. As snakes seek shelter in shaded gardens and under backyard debris, our pets are often the first to stumble upon them.

Petsy founder Monica Limanto recommends keeping lawns short and clearing away wood piles or other debris to lessen areas that may attract snakes, she says: “Snakes are most active at dawn and dusk when they are seeking food or looking to breed, by restricting you pets access to long grass or bushy areas during these hours you can reduce risk of a bite.”

Paralysis ticks are another deadly threat with the peak exposure times typically witnessed in the warmer weather after wet periods. Australians are being urged to be tick alert with experts warning that the 2025 summer could be another horror season with 5,000 tick-related vet visits expected and sadly 1 in 10 of those pets dying. [2]

Monica says, “Regular tick prevention whether in collar, chewable or topical format should never be skipped, cats and dogs should be checked daily for ticks paying particular attention to the head and neck areas. This is especially important after walks in bushy or coastal areas.”

The summer in Australia also sees an explosion in fleas and other parasites which thrive in the humid conditions.

Monica says many pet owners mistakenly stop flea and tick protection in winter, only to face infestations that trigger allergic reactions, skin infections and can add up to costly vet bills when the warmer weather an infestation catches them by surprise.

“A consistent, year-round protection program is essential for the health of your pet. We also recommend washing bedding on your machines hot cycles and vacuuming regularly to disrupt the parasites life cycle” says Monica.

Heat stress and dehydration are also common summer issues and can be among the most distressing but preventable emergencies seen by vets each summer. Animal welfare agencies warn that the temperature inside parked cars can become fatal within minutes, dogs can die in as little as six minutes in a hot vehicle and that shade or cracked windows does not make it safe. [3]

“Pets left outdoors or confined to enclosed spaces in extreme heat can develop heatstroke at a dangerous pace, which can progress to organ failure within minutes,” says Monica. “Owners should ensure their pets always have access to shade and cool water, avoid exercise in the middle of the day during peak heat and never leave animals unattended in cars, even briefly. Heavy panting, drooling or lethargy are all red flags that require immediate veterinary care.”

As conditions heat up, Petsy is urging Australians to stay alert to the changing environment and to treat pet safety as part of their broader summer preparedness. Awareness, not luck, is what keeps animals safe at this time of year.

[1] https://www.researchgate.net/publication/13704761_Snake_bites_recorded_by_veterinary_practices_in_Australia

[2] https://news.uq.edu.au/2025-10-paralysis-ticks-prefer-heads-and-necks-pets

[3] https://www.rspcatas.org.au/dogs-can-die-in-just-6-minutes

ENDS

About Petsy

Petsy has quickly become a leading pet insurance provider in Australia, dedicated exclusively to dogs and cats. It offers comprehensive coverage with annual limits of up to $30,000 and no sub-limits on claimable conditions, and its customisable policy options allow pet owners to tailor coverage to their specific needs. Petsy is also the preferred pet insurance provider to Costco members nationally. Petsy has been recognised for delivering outstanding value pet insurance through multiple awards, winning Canstar’s 2024 Outstanding Value in Pet Insurance Award, MOZO’s 2024 Experts Choice Awards, and WeMoney’s Best for Value Pet Insurance Award and Best for Young Pets Pet Insurance Award. Visit petsy.com.au .

New data reveals pet injuries grew 62% in 2025

Fri, 16 Jan 2026 01:52:54 GMT

Our pets are much more at risk of accidents and hazards, with new data showing that pet injuries have risen by two-thirds so far this year. Treatment for some injuries can cost thousands.

Insurance claims data from pet insurance provider Petsy reveals that injuries have become the fastest-growing category of claims from January to September year on year. They accounted for 22 per cent of all claims – up from 13.6 per cent in the same period last year. That’s a 61.8 per cent increase in share of injury claims.

In contrast, claims for pet illnesses fell by 10.91 per cent, likely because pet owners are doing more to improve their pets’ diets and taking pets to reduce the likelihood of illness.

Petsy founder Monica Limanto says: “The growth in injuries shows how unexpected incidents, such as swallowing foreign objects to accidents on walks, can turn into expensive vet visits. Even the most careful owner can find themselves in an emergency.”

In analysing its injury data, Petsy has found that gastro-intestinal and digestive system injuries, after a pet has swallowed a toxin or indigestible item, is the top cause of injury claims. This makes up 29.1 per cent of all injury claims, with Petsy data showing individual vet costs this year have been up to $8422.

The second most common injury has been to the leg, hip or shoulder, including lame or fractured limbs. These make up for 15.9 per cent of all injury claims, with vet costs topping $9083.

Foot and claw injuries – from tears, nail injuries and paw-pad trauma — make up 15 per cent of claims. General soft-tissue injuries, including from dog and cat fights, are the fourth most common injury, with an average cost of $2105 in vet bills.

Monica says: “Besides the trauma to the pet, and their owners, treatment for injuries can further burden owners with financial stress. Our data from this year shows that one vet bill for an accident totalled $13,000. Treatment for a head injury came in at $7752, and a tick paralysis treatment was $6071. Petsy paid all of these bills, because the owners had wisely taken out insurance.

“We want pets to live active, happy lives – and owners can take a few easy precautions to keep their furry family members safer at home and outdoors, from securing them inside the home to preventing sudden escapes or defensive bites.”

Petsy’s offers 6 simple steps to help reduce pet injuries this summer

Pet-proof your home and yard . Removing jump-height risks, secure fences and keep small objects out of reach.
Keep dogs leashed in public . Introduce them to other animals gently, and avoid high-stress situations that can lead to fights.
Keep their weight healthy and exercise them regularly . This will help reduce ligament and joint injuries.
Check on their play . Pets can be oblivious to risks when outdoors. In summer, grass seeds, heat stress and snakes can be common.
Keep ingestible items out of reach . Human foods, medicines and household items, if eaten, can lead to gastro-intestinal emergencies.

The top 5 pet injuries in 2025, taken from Petsy claims data from Jan-Sept:

ENDS

About Petsy

Petsy has quickly become a leading pet insurance provider in Australia, dedicated exclusively to dogs and cats. It offers comprehensive coverage with annual limits of up to $30,000 and no sub-limits on claimable conditions, and its customisable policy options allow pet owners to tailor coverage to their specific needs. Petsy is also the preferred pet insurance provider to Costco members nationally. Petsy has been recognised for delivering outstanding value pet insurance through multiple awards, winning Canstar’s 2024 Outstanding Value in Pet Insurance Award, MOZO’s 2024 Experts Choice Awards, and WeMoney’s Best for Value Pet Insurance Award and Best for Young Pets Pet Insurance Award. Visit petsy.com.au .

NSW Crowned the Cavoodle Capital of Australia

Fri, 16 Jan 2026 01:46:57 GMT

Australia has spoken and the Cavoodle is the top dog choice for pet loving households. According to new data from national pet insurance provider Petsy , New South Wales is home to the highest number of Cavoodle policyholders in the country, followed closely by Queensland and Victoria.

With their teddy bear faces, affectionate nature, and low-shedding coats, Cavoodles — crosses between a Cavalier King Charles Spaniel and a Poodle — have charmed their way into households nationwide. But behind the Insta-worthy photos and couch cuddles lies a dark side to the love affair Australian’s have with this breed.

The Cavoodle was developed in Australia in the 1990s as one of the country’s earliest designer dogs, however the first “oodle” arrived just a few years earlier with the now-famous Labradoodle.

Wally Conron, an Australian breeder working with the Royal Guide Dogs Association, first crossbred a Labrador and a Poodle in 1989 to help a vision-impaired woman whose husband was allergic to dogs. The outcome, the Labradoodle, was hailed as a breakthrough and the Labradoodle quickly gained popularity beyond service roles, however Conron soon expressed deep regret.

In a now-famous interview, [1] Conron called the creation his “life’s regret”, describing the result as “a Frankenstein’s monster” due to the sheer amount of copycat crossbreeding. “I opened a Pandora’s box,” he said. “People are just breeding for the money… unscrupulous breeders are crossing Poodles with inappropriate dogs simply so they can say they were the first to do it.”

And today, as Australia’s favourite dog breed, the Cavoodle has followed a similar path into the spotlight and has also fallen victim to the downside of rapid popularity, including a rise in complex health issues driven by unscrupulous breeding practices. [2]

According to Petsy policyholder data, the top 10 insurance claims made by Cavoodle owners reveal a pattern of recurring health concerns including:

Gastrointestinal and digestive disorders
Ear disorders
Skin conditions
General ailments
Eye disorders
Anal gland issues
Behavioural concerns
Feet and claw problems
Respiratory disorders
Leg, hip and shoulder issues

NSW alone accounts for over a third (35.7%) of all Cavoodle policies, which means a significant number of owners are navigating these issues firsthand.

Cavoodles are a joy to have in the family, but only when bred and cared for responsibly, cautions Monica Limanto, Founder of Petsy. “Cavoodles may be Australia’s sweethearts, but too many are being bred without regard for health or ethics. We’re urging owners to dig deeper and ask the tough questions, choose your breeder wisely, and protect your pup from day one.”

Sarah Ewenson | 0409 079 559 | sewenson@theideassuite.com.au

[1] https://www.abc.net.au/listen/programs/sum-of-all-parts/designing-the-labradoodle/10726844

[2] https://pmc.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/articles/PMC10930939/

ENDS

About Petsy

Petsy has quickly become a leading pet insurance provider in Australia, dedicated exclusively to dogs and cats. It offers comprehensive coverage with annual limits of up to $30,000 and no sub-limits on claimable conditions, and its customisable policy options allow pet owners to tailor coverage to their specific needs. Petsy is also the preferred pet insurance provider to Costco members nationally. Petsy has been recognised for delivering outstanding value pet insurance through multiple awards, winning Canstar’s 2024 Outstanding Value in Pet Insurance Award, MOZO’s 2024 Experts Choice Awards, and WeMoney’s Best for Value Pet Insurance Award and Best for Young Pets Pet Insurance Award. Visit petsy.com.au .

Aussie shoppers face a wave of price hikes as retailers battle rising costs

Tue, 13 May 2025 19:33:06 GMT

About CouriersPlease

CouriersPlease is Australia’s fastest growing franchised courier and parcel delivery service, providing shipping solutions for E-Commerce retailers and traders across the nation. Celebrating 40 years of success in 2023, CouriersPlease continues to experience exponential year-on-year growth and is the trusted courier partner for Australia’s leading retail brands through its independent Franchise Partners and network affiliates. CouriersPlease is a multi-award-winning courier service, receiving a 5 Star rating on the FRANData Franchise Rating Scale and winning the NORA (National Online Retailers Association) Solution Partners Best Carrier Award in 2023. With 800+ active franchise territories and 400 support staff across 18 depot locations, CouriersPlease is committed to upholding its company values of Safety, Trust, Total Customer, One Team, Top Execution and Transformation. Visit couriersplease.com.au

E NDS

[1] Spending on essentials slows as Aussies under 40 grapple with cost-of-living

[2] How much, and when the RBA will cut interest rates in 2025

[3] Spending on essentials slows as Aussies under 40 grapple with cost-of-living

[4] How much, and when the RBA will cut interest rates in 2025

[5] Spending on essentials slows as Aussies under 40 grapple with cost-of-living

 60% of retailers have increased their prices in the past year
37% have increased their prices by up to 10% in the past year
46% are planning more price increases in the next 12 months

Larger retailers lead price hikes

The survey also found larger retailers (50+ employees) were the most likely to increase prices, with 70 per doing so in the past year and 50 per cent signaling they plan to increase prices again in 2025. In contrast, micro retailers (1-10 employees) were more likely to decrease prices to stay competitive, though 46 per cent still raised prices.

South Australian and West Australian shoppers hit hardest

State-by-state data shows two-thirds of South Australian retailers (66%) increased prices last year, with 33 per cent doing so by more than 20 per cent. In Western Australia, 59 per cent plan to raise prices in 2025, above the national average of 45 per cent.

Richard adds that even as households benefit from marginal rate cuts, those savings may not translate at the checkout, given the extreme competition, rising operational costs, and ongoing global supply chain pressures.

Retailers are walking a tightrope between rising costs and shifting consumer expectations, as new data reveals 46 per cent of Australian businesses will increase prices in the next year, placing fresh pressure on household budgets.

The research, commissioned by CouriersPlease – Australia’s fastest-growing franchised courier and parcel delivery service – polled 203 retailers across Australia to gauge their pricing strategies amid inflation pressures. It found that 60 per cent of retailers have raised prices in the past 12 months, with 37 per cent increasing prices by up to 10 per cent, and 26 per cent by at least 20 per cent. With inflation still a concern, the price squeeze is expected to continue well into 2025, as almost half of businesses prepare for another round of increases.

Price hikes on the horizon

Despite the Reserve Bank of Australia (RBA) cutting the cash rate and forecasting inflation could hit the target 2-3 per cent range this year, many retailers remain under financial strain. [1] The survey found 23 per cent of retailers are planning a price increase of up to 10 per cent in the next 12 months, while 23 per cent anticipate more aggressive hikes of 20 per cent or more.

The survey also found that just a small percentage (12%) of retailers dropped their prices in the past year to stay competitive and in the next 12 months, and 45 per cent will hold prices steady.

Retail competition remains fierce

The findings come against a period of flat retail turnover that indicates consumer spending may be leveling. [2] The data suggests that many retailers may be trying to offset mounting operational costs, from shipping to wages, despite consumers exhibiting tighter spending patterns.

However, Aussie retailers aren’t just contending with economic pressures, they’re also up against global E-Commerce powerhouses such as Temu, Shein, and Amazon that continue to draw customers away from local businesses, while platforms like Etsy, eBay, and Shopify have made it easier than ever for micro-entrepreneurs to launch their own brands. [3] At the same time, resale commerce is booming, as budget-conscious and sustainability-driven consumers increasingly turn to second-hand platforms like Facebook Marketplace and Depop. [4]

What’s next for Aussie shoppers?

Survey results below:

 Q1: With the inflation rate sitting above the RBA’s target, how much have you been forced to adjust your pricing strategy over the past year?

Q2: What is your pricing strategy in the next 12 months?

Aussie film productions set to capture 59% of viewers

Tue, 13 May 2025 10:26:01 GMT

[1] Drama report 2023/24 – Reports and discussion papers – Reports and key issues – Fact Finders – Screen Australia

[2 ] SAG-AFTRA Members Approve 2023 TV/Theatrical Contracts Tentative Agreement | SAG-AFTRA

[3 ] Tax rebates for film and television producers | Office for the Arts

[4 ] Perth Film Studios – Ausfilm

[5 ] Disney Studios Australia – Ausfilm

[6] Home | Screen Queensland Studios

[7 ] Docklands Studios Melbourne – Ausfilm

ENDS

About Stage and Screen

Stage and Screen is a leading provider of specialist travel management solutions for the sports, entertainment and creative industries. Founded in 1995 and acquired by Flight Centre Travel Group in 1999, Stage and Screen offers bespoke travel services, group travel packages, and artist management solutions to clients worldwide. Stage and Screen is dedicated to delivering exceptional service and personalised support to meet the unique needs of each client. It has offices in Sydney, Melbourne, Brisbane, Auckland, Los Angeles, New York, Toronto, Vancouver and Cape Town. In 2023, Stage and Screen was certified as a Great Place to Work and was honoured with the Most Outstanding National Travel Management Company award at the Australian Travel Industry Association’s National Travel Industry Awards 2023.

Audiences the world over have enjoyed iconic Aussie landscapes as backdrops for some of the most successful movies ever – from Crocodile Dundee and Mad Max to Baz Luhrmann’s Australia and The Great Gatsby.

Now, new research reveals that it’s those very backdrops that draw Australian audiences to locally produced films – but not for the reasons many might assume. New research from Stage and Screen reveals the potential to bolster the economy, jobs market and opportunities for homegrown talent far surpasses cultural pride of seeing Australia on the big screen.

Following a challenging two years that saw an end to pandemic-induced production highs, alongside US industrial action that paused blockbuster filmmaking around the globe, the strong grassroots support in Australia – backed by the Federal Government’s decision to almost double Location Offset rebates to 30 per cent for big-budget movies films – is a significant win for the local screen industry. [1] [2] [3]

Stage and Screen – a boutique travel management subsidiary of Flight Centre Travel Group (FCTG) specialising in the creative, retail, sports and entertainment industries – commissioned the survey of an independent, nationally representative panel of 1000 Australian adults to find out if an Australian cameo in productions would attract more viewers.

An overwhelming 59 per cent of Australians say movies with a local backdrop have more appeal than those showcasing international locations. Economic wins were the number-one reason for this support (69%), followed by raising Australia’s profile as a world-class film production destination (46%) and giving local talent a leg up into Hollywood films (45%).

By comparison, showcasing Australian stories, settings and Indigenous heritage rated lower (16%), followed by behind-the-scenes intrigue such as personal connections with familiar places or curiosity about the filming process (9%).

Youngest movie buffs are top supporters

The youngest generation aged 18-24 were most likely to be attracted to movies shot in Australia (68%), followed by 35-44-year-olds (63%). While support was still high among 55-64-year-olds (57%) and those aged 65+ (56%), these age groups were also least likely to be swayed by a film’s location (40% and 42% respectively).

For all generations, economic benefits were the top priority with older people clearly leading the way – 82 per cent for 55-64 –year-olds and 76 per cent for 65+.

Support is high where studios lie

Support was highest in Western Australia (62%), where a new world-class facility for major film and TV productions is scheduled to open next year. [4] Support was also high in NSW and Queensland (equal 61%), both of which have first-class facilities. NSW is home to Disney Studios, the largest film and television production centre in the southern hemisphere. [5] Queensland has three studios, including Village Roadshow Studios on the Gold Coast, Screen Queensland Studios in Brisbane and a newly opened Screen Queensland facility in Cairns.6 In Melbourne, Docklands Studios recently added Stage [6] – a 40,000 square foot super stage – to its facility. [7]

Survey responses:

Let’s travel like it’s 2019: Insure&Go announces return of multi-trip policy

Tue, 13 May 2025 09:25:56 GMT

E NDS

About InsureandGo

Award-winning Australian travel insurance provider Insure&Go has brought back its popular Annual Multi Trip insurance policy for business and leisure travellers to meet the strong growth in international travel from Australia. The policy provides coverage for unlimited overseas trips within a 12-month period.

More Aussies went on international trips in October 2024 (the most recent data available [1] ) than any time since 2020, according to the Federal Government. In October 2024, 4.3 million international seats were made available, which increased by 10.2 per cent on the previous October.

How it works – and benefits

As the name suggests, multi-trip insurance allows travellers to be covered from the moment their first trip starts – then remain covered throughout the next 12 months for any additional trips. This means it can be more cost-effective than taking out individual insurance policies for each trip.

While there is no limit to the number of additional trips covered, the policy offers coverage for a maximum duration of 30, 45 or 60 days per trip within the 12 months. Please refer to the terms and conditions in the PDS for detailed information including duration, destinations, and age limitations. This type of cover reduces your travel admin – rather than going through the hassle of booking separate insurance policies for each trip – means that unexpected cancellations, disruptions and incidents can be covered for each trip throughout the year subject to any applicable exclusions and conditions, giving travellers added peace of mind.

Insure&Go’s Annual Multi Trip insurance provides the following coverage (limits apply):

Unlimited medical and hospital expenses outside Australia
Emergency medical evacuation or repatriation costs
Coverage for complications of pregnancy and dental treatment (limits apply)
Trip cancellation coverage (up to the insured amount, depending on the policy level)
Expenses for cutting trips short or additional emergency expenses (such as for family emergencies or disasters)
Travel delay compensation
Coverage for lost, stolen or damaged belongings (limits vary based on the policy tier)
COVID-19 coverage
Legal expenses and personal liability (coverage amounts vary)
Pet care if delayed returning home
Rental car excess waiver (available for certain levels)
Business cover for equipment, samples and emergency courier expenses

[1 ] https://www.bitre.gov.au/statistics/aviation/international
[2] https://www.insureandgo.com.au/
[3] Provided as a guideline. Prices are likely to change at any time. This estimate does not include coverage for pre-existing medical conditions.

How to purchase Insure&Go’s Annual Multi-Trip policy

Business and leisure travellers who are looking for peace of mind across multiple international trips this year should head to the Insure&Go website [2] , select the Annual Multi Trip option, add in when their first trip starts, whether their international trip includes the Americas or Antarctica, followed by whether they are travelling as an individual or as a couple or family, and the age of everybody who will be travelling.

Users then have the choice to select the 30-, 45-, or 60-day total trip duration options based on the maximum length of one of their trips.

For instance, a 30-year-old person travelling as an individual multiple times to Asia and Europe from June 2025 to June 2026 is likely to pay a premium of $494.90 to $681.44, depending on their maximum total trip length [3] .

Insure&Go offers 8 tips and tools for travellers to Japan, as record numbers expected over the next few months

Tue, 13 May 2025 09:16:52 GMT

E NDS

About InsureandGo

Australians have a new favourite holiday destination in Japan, as unprecedented numbers of travellers flock to the Land of the Rising Sun. Award-winning travel insurance provider Insure&Go forecasts that Japan – including rising hotspots outside of Tokyo – will continue to surge in popularity among Aussies thanks to a favourable exchange rate, increased airline capacity through new flight options, and a year-round calendar of cultural and natural attractions including breathtaking cherry blossoms and world-class skiing.

According to recent travel data, departures to Japan from Australia have climbed by 50.1 per cent in January-December 2024, year on year. Specifically, that’s 920,200 visitors last year, compared with 613,062 in 2023. [1]

In a record high for foreign visitors, Japan welcomed over 36.8 million tourists in 2024 and anticipates surpassing 40 million in 2025. [2] 2 This surge in popularity has raised concerns by some local governments about overcrowding, which has seen tourist and accommodation taxes introduced.

Insure&Go has done the research on the most innovative planning tools and must-have apps that can unearth hidden gems, help travellers navigate Japan, and stay safe. From real-time translation and route-finding apps to time saving travel hacks, Australians can become very resourceful to experience more of Japan’s allure. In fact, in 2023 over 70 per cent of Aussies tuned into video sites such as YouTube to help with planning their trip. [3]

Beyond finding the best deals, there’s a keen focus on responsible tourism. Many Australians are eager to observe local customs and avoid inadvertently causing offense. This includes refraining from eating while walking, keeping voices low on public transport, and learning basic Japanese phrases to show courtesy.

Australian traveller Sarah Ewenson recently embarked on a family trip to Japan in early November from Brisbane, perfectly timed to catch the start of the spectacular autumn foliage without the crush of peak-season crowds.

Another standout moment of the Ewenson family trip was visiting Miyajima, a small island near Hiroshima that is famous for its friendly deer, fresh oysters, and scenic mountain hikes.

Insure&Go’s 8 travel tips and tools to help Aussies maximise their Japan adventures:

Get an eSIM for reliable, hassle-free phone data : eSIMs can be more affordable that international roaming plans, and their reliable data access means you can look up train timetables, translation apps, or map routes on the go. Just ensure your device supports eSIM functionality.
Use Google Maps as a navigation tool : Essential for navigating the complex Tokyo Metro and local train lines throughout Japan. Real-time updates help you avoid getting lost in busy stations.
Use Google Translate to help with communication : Instantly translates menus, signboards and even live speech. Handy for interactions, especially if you’re venturing into less touristy areas where English is not as commonly spoken or understood.
Memorise a couple of key Japanese phrases : Arigato gozaimasu (thank you) and Sumimasen (excuse me/sorry) go a long way in showing respect and courtesy. Locals will appreciate your effort to speak Japanese, even if it’s just a few words.
Download the NHK World to receive real-time alerts : NHK World is a local Japanese news outlet that lets you stay informed about weather changes, public transport disruptions, or any local advisories, especially useful if you’re heading off the beaten path or travelling during typhoon season.
Carry cash and a travel money card : Japan remains a cash-oriented society, so keep enough yen on hand for small shops, restaurants, or rural areas that might not accept cards. Having a travel money card is convenient for larger payments and booking hotels online. Many banks, airlines and financial institutions offer these debit cards that you can load with foreign currencies. However, they vary in fees, exchange rates and the currencies they accept.
Always carry your passport : It’s required by law for tourists and may be needed for tax-free shopping. Also print out all essential documents, including travel insurance, and keep them together for added peace of mind.
Get the right travel cover at the time you book : Ensure you take out travel insurance as soon as you book your trip and providing the policy covers cancellations, you can be covered for any unexpected travel cancellations up until your departure date. If you plan to ski or snowboard in Japan, you’ll need to upgrade your policy with winter sports cover. Insure&Go’s winter sports upgrade also includes ice-skating, tobogganing, non-competitive ice hockey, cross-country skiing on designated routes, snowmobiling and more.

Insure&Go encourages Australians to plan carefully and embrace cultural etiquette for a truly memorable trip.

[1] https://statistics.jnto.go.jp/en/graph/#graph–latest–breakdown

[2] https://www.jnto.go.jp/news/_files/20250115_1615.pdf

[3] https://statistics.jnto.go.jp/en/graph/#graph–expectations–regarding–visit–to–japan

More Aussies to splurge – not scrimp – on sport and music tickets over the next 12 months

Tue, 13 May 2025 08:58:22 GMT

[1] https://www.sportingnews.com/au/formula-1/news/melbourne-f1-tickets-price-dates-australian-grand-prix-2025/5b99de0080c30b72ab22104c

[2 ] https://www.nine.com.au/sport/motorsport/f1-news-2024-australian-grand-prix-ticket-sales-delayed-global-outage-fan-outrage-travis-auld-comments-20241009-p5kgw5.html?utm_source=chatgpt.com

[3 ] https://mixdownmag.com.au/features/does-oasis-furore-suggest-concert-ticket-prices-have-reached-tipping-point/

[4 ] https://thenightly.com.au/culture/music/more-australians-are-going-to-concerts-than-ever-before-maybe-thats-why-its-so-hard-to-buy-concert-tickets-c-16332282

[5 ] https://www.bosshunting.com.au/entertainment/music/dynamic-pricing-australia/

[6] https://liveperformance.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2024/10/2023-Live-Performance-Australia_Ticket-Attendance-and-Revenue-Report_FINAL.pdf

ENDS

About Stage and Screen

Survey reveals 37% of under-50s plan to spend big on tickets over the coming year
34% of all respondents plan to fork out on VIP experiences at live sports events – making Australia not just a nation of sports fans, but sports connoisseurs too
30% plan to buy the best tickets for their favourite international music act
This is despite many tickets for live music increasing more than 50 per cent in 12 months, with added costs and dynamic pricing being blamed

This year is an incredible one for live entertainment and sport. Music fans have already enjoyed global superstars such as Luke Combs, Kylie Minogue, Drake, Billie Eilish and Green Day. Other lineups include Katy Perry, Metallica, and even the long-awaited Oasis reunion tour.

In sport, our Aussie women cricketers continue to make us proud, and we expect major events like the Formula 1 Australian Grand Prix, The Ashes, and the AFL and NRL grand finals to draw fans in droves. Rugby enthusiasts won’t want to miss the British and Irish Lions Tour, while MotoGP will bring its high-speed excitement to Melbourne.

The theatre and festival scene are also buzzing, with the highly acclaimed musical ‘Hamilton’ having continued its Australian run, alongside other blockbuster productions like ‘Wicked’ and ‘Les Misérables’. The Laneway Festival attracted arts and music lovers alike, and so will the Byron Bay Bluesfest and the Sydney Festival.

The survey results found that, overall, a higher proportion of Australians (28%) are willing to pay extra for premium tickets (with 7.4% planning to seek out VIP experiences, rather than discounted tickets, and 20.3% willing to pay extra for prime seats), than those planning to purchase last-minute, discounted deals (at 24 per cent).

The Stage and Screen survey also explored which type of event Aussies would most likely spend more on this year. Sporting events lead the way, with 33.6 per cent planning to spend most on tickets at events such as the Formula 1, The Ashes and footy grand finals.

The survey also reveals a substantial proportion of Aussies prepared to spend big on music. Almost a third (30%) of respondents are likely to splurge on tickets for international music acts this year.

More than a quarter (28%) of Australians – and 37 per cent of under-50s – are planning to splurge on tickets for major sporting events and international music acts over the coming 12 months – as interest rates are forecast to further reduce – new research from Stage and Screen shows.

The research, a survey of an independent, nationally representative panel of 1000 Australian adults, was designed to gauge whether Aussies would spend big or scrimp on entertainment tickets this year – and which types of events they plan to spend more on. The full research results, including insights between respondent age groups and locations, can be found here : https://www.stageandscreen.travel/en-au/resources/whitepaper/aussie-tickets-splurge

Just under a quarter (22 per cent) would pay top dollar for tickets at musicals and theatre shows. Fans are least likely (at just 14 per cent) to pay top prices for festival tickets.

Inflationary impacts on ticket prices

This year’s Formula 1, for instance, has seen a $30 increase [1]  on last year for a four-day Park Pass adult ticket ($309). The cheapest general admission ticket has risen by $20 [2] , with some grandstand passes increasing by over $100.

Ticket prices for contemporary live music events increased 53.2% [3]  in one year – from an average of $56.81 in 2021 to $87.01 in 2022 – and even further to $128.21 [4]  in 2023.

Factors contributing to ticket price rises are increasing operational costs and dynamic pricing, where ticket prices are adjusted based on demand and a tactic that the Federal Government has announced it will ban. For example, during the presale period for Green Day’s tour this year, ticket prices ranged from approximately $399.60 to $449.60. [5]

Adam says the events and entertainment industry continues to be a major boon for Australia’s economy. According to Live Performance Australia, in 2023 eventgoers were issued 30.1 million tickets – an increase of 26 per cent from 2019. [6]

The full research results, including insights between respondent age groups and locations, can be found here: https://www.stageandscreen.travel/en-au/resources/whitepaper/aussie-tickets-splurge

7 top climate-impacted destinations Aussies should visit, before they’re gone

Tue, 13 May 2025 08:18:27 GMT

ENDS

About Insure&Go

While rising sea levels, extreme weather events and environmental degradation are impacting Australia’s iconic Great Barrier Reef, these events are also threatening numerous fragile ecosystems and their communities around the world. From remote islands to mountainous regions, many areas are now at risk of disappearing or becoming inaccessible altogether. These unprecedented changes highlight the urgency of the issue, with the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC) reporting that in 2023 the global average sea level set a record high of 101.4 mm above 1993 levels. [1]

In response, award-winning Australian travel insurance provider Insure&Go has identified seven lesser-known destinations vulnerable to climate impacts. These destinations are worth visiting for their natural beauty, cultural significance and offer travellers an opportunity to support local conservation efforts and raise awareness of climate change challenges.

David Mayo, Insure&Go Commercial & Marketing Director at Insure&Go, says there is a shift in how Australians want to experience travel and how much they want to spend.

From remote islands threatened by rising waters to delicate mountain habitats facing extreme conditions, these seven climate-impacted destinations remain within reach for Australian travellers. They invite visitors to connect with nature, learn from local communities, and help protect some of the world’s most extraordinary places — before it’s too late.

Tuvalu (South Pacific)

Just a dot in the vast South Pacific Ocean midway between Hawaii and Australia, Tuvalu is one of the least visited countries on Earth welcoming only 3,136 visitors in 2023. [2] This offers visitors the rare opportunity to immerse themselves in authentic Polynesian culture without the tourist hordes and witness a way of life that could soon disappear.

Why now?

Tuvalu is likely to be the first country in the world to become uninhabitable due to climate change. [3] As it’s low-lying with an average elevation above sea level of only two metres, it makes it extremely vulnerable to rising sea levels. In fact, in just over 30 years the sea surrounding Tuvalu has risen 15cm, that’s one and a half times the global average. In a dramatic sign of what’s to come, Australia has recently pledge to accept 280 Tuvaluans per year as climate refugees. [4]

How Aussies can get there

With only a few flights each week Australians can typically reach Tuvalu via Fiji (Nadi International Airport) with Fiji Airways, making it a convenient Pacific detour.

Best time of year

April to October offers the driest, most pleasant weather which is ideal for snorkelling, lagoon tours, and cultural festivals.

Sundarban National Park (Bangladesh and India)

Visit the world’s largest mangrove forest, a UNESCO World Heritage site, the Sundarbans which are a cluster of low-lying islands in the Bay of Bengal. For a true off the beaten path away from the crowds, only 2,143 international guests visited in fiscal year 2022/23, wildlife tourists will want to add this as a bucket list destination to see elusive Bengal tigers, saltwater crocodiles, and hundreds of bird species. [5]

Why now?

Up to one-third of the Sundarbans could be submerged by 2050 if current sea-levels continue to rise at the rate of 12mm per year, as compared to the global average of 2mm per year. [6] In addition, coastal erosion due to intensified cyclonic events further threaten the delicate ecosystem, pushing the tigers further onto the fringes. [7]

How Aussies can get there

Take a flight from Australia to Dhaka (Bangladesh) or Kolkata (India) via Singapore or Kuala Lumpur, then the best way to explore is to join an organised eco-tour.

Best time of year

For cooler and drier weather that’s perfect for tiger-spotting and navigating calm creeks and rivers travel to this region is recommended between October to February.

Peruvian Andes Glaciers (South America)

Beyond Machu Picchu lies pristine glaciers, lakes and Quechua villages where ancient traditions live on. A trek through the Andes offers views of breathtaking ice-capped peaks and a chance to learn from Indigenous communities who’ve adapted to these extreme conditions for centuries.

Why now?

We are among the last generations that will have the privilege of seeing the glaciers. [8] Critical freshwater reserves, the glaciers are rapidly receding and have lost 30-50 per cent of ice cover lost in the last 40 years. [9] As they melt, the once-stable valleys are more landslide-prone and local water sources will dwindle, which has the potential to alter life in the high Andes forever. [10]

How Aussies can get there

Take a flight from Australia to Lima (often via Santiago or Los Angeles), then travel to Cusco or Huaraz, hubs to join a guided trek.

Best time of year

For clearer skies and drier trails which is ideal for glacier-viewing treks you’ll want to mark your calendar for travel during May to September.

Congo Basin Rainforest (Central Africa)

It’s the second largest rainforest and arguably one of the most important wilderness areas left on Earth. While not your classic tourist destination, it’s a biodiversity hotspot with over 600 tree species and 10,000 animal species, making it a haven for wilderness and wildlife enthusiasts. [11] It’s still considered one of Africa’s cheapest destinations to have an unmanufactured journey, and see large African wildlife including the wild mountain gorillas.

Why now?

As a major global carbon sink it absorbs three percent of the world’s emission, but it’s one of the most vulnerable areas in the world to climate change. [12] Today it’s experiencing rampant deforestation and mining activity which accelerates habitats loss and ultimately threatens this region.

How Aussies can get there

The Congo Basin can be accessed through the capital of the Republic of Congo, Brazzaville, then join a specialist guided safari to see the protected sections of the rainforest.

Best time of year

In the months of June to September it’s often less rainy which improves wildlife-spotting conditions and trail accessibility.

Tubbataha Reefs Natural Park (Philippines)

A diver’s paradise far from all inhabited land, these reefs are the only exclusively marine World Heritage site in Southeast Asia. Located in the heart of the Sulu Sea they boast some of the most vibrant coral reefs in the world with a very high density of marine species.

Why now?

Like many reefs in the world which are sensitive to changes in temperature, and even a slight increase in water temperature can cause coral bleaching. And as ocean acidification and bleaching events intensify, coral reefs face mass die-offs. [13] More frequent storms threaten these remote reefs, putting Tubbataha’s postcard-perfect underwater scenery at risk.

How Aussies can get there

Take a flight to Manila or Cebu, then connect to a liveaboard in Puerto Princesa in Palawan.

Best time of year

The only way to reach this site is by liveaboards, and diving here is only possible between March and June.

The Dead Sea (Jordan/Israel)

This region is famous for its hypersaline waters and healing mud and is surrounded by historical treasures including biblical sites, Masada’s fortress, and modern wellness retreats.

Why now?

The Dead Sea is shrinking about a metre per year, as diverted river flows and evaporation are outpacing replenishment. The crumbling shorelines and huge sinkholes are further accelerating issues which combine to threaten this natural wonder. [14]

How Aussies can get there

Fly to Amman (Jordan) or Tel Aviv (Israel) from Australia (commonly via Dubai or Doha), then it’s only a short drive to many of the Dead Sea resorts.

Best time of year

For optimum temperatures for floating in the salty waters and exploring nearby archaeological sites many visitors plan trips for Autumn (March-May) and Spring (September-November).

Antarctic Peninsula (Antarctica)

Why go?

From icebergs and glaciers to penguins and polar bears, the Antarctic Peninsula’s unique landscape can’t be seen anywhere else. Guided expeditions have opened this world up to travellers, allowing adventurers to experience Antarctica while learning about its crucial role in the world’s climate system.

Why now?

The window to experience Antarctica’s pristine landscapes in their current form is closing. Its sea-ice hit record lows in February 2023, the shrinking ice not only raises global sea levels, [15] it also threatens species like emperor penguins and many other species that rely on sea-ice for refuge. [16]

How Aussies can get there

Fly from Australia to Ushuaia (Argentina) or Punta Arenas (Chile) via Santiago,

Best time of year

Expedition cruise to the region often run November to March affording visitors longer days with milder temperatures.

[1] https://www.climate.gov/news-features/understanding-climate/climate-change-global-sea-level?utm_source=chatgpt.com

[2 ] https://stats.gov.tv/news/social-statistics-release/
[3 ] Sinking Tuvalu fights to keep maritime boundaries as sea levels rise | Reuters
[4 ] Australia signs security, migration pact with Pacific’s Tuvalu | Reuters
[5 ] https://www.thedailystar.net/environment/forest/news/sundarbans-day-worlds-largest-mangrove-forest-draws-growing-number-tourists-3543691
[6 ] https://www.wwfindia.org/about_wwf/critical_regions/sundarbans3/conservation_challenges_in_the_sundarbans
[7 ] Conservation Challenges in the Sundarbans | WWF India
[8 ] https://www.preventionweb.net/news/farewell-glaciers-how-global-warming-transforming-disaster-risk-peruvian-andes
[9 ] Shrinking glaciers upend lives across South America
[10 ] Accelerating Glacier Area Loss Across the Andes Since the Little Ice Age - Carrivick - 2024 – Geophysical Research Letters – Wiley Online Library
[11 ] The Congo Rainforest
[12 ] https://www.elibrary.imf.org/view/journals/002/2021/226/article-A001-en.xml
[13 ] What is Ocean Acidification?
[14 ] The Dead Sea is disappearing, leaving behind a landscape shattered by sinkholes – ABC News
[15 ] Antarctica’s Sea-Ice Crisis: Climate change threatens Antarctic wildlife as sea-ice levels drop – WWF-Australia | Antarctica’s Sea-Ice Crisis: Climate change threatens Antarctic wildlife as sea-ice levels drop | WWF Australia
[16 ] Antarctica’s Sea-Ice Crisis: Climate change threatens Antarctic wildlife as sea-ice levels drop – WWF-Australia | Antarctica’s Sea-Ice Crisis: Climate change threatens Antarctic wildlife as sea-ice levels drop | WWF Australia

Businesses intend on spending more on travel, but 4 in 5 want to better track their spending

Tue, 13 May 2025 04:09:18 GMT

49% of ANZ businesses intend on increasing travel budgets this financial year
This is in line with the 50% intention to increase business travel in EMEA, but higher than the 46% in the Americas
48% of ANZ business believe automated expense tracking will be the most transformative tool in their travel program

In a positive sign for business travel, a global survey by Corporate Traveller , the flagship SME division of Flight Centre Travel Group (FCTG), has revealed that almost half (49%) of Australian and New Zealand businesses intend to increase their travel budgets this financial year. Yet 48 per cent believe automated expense tracking would be single most transformative tool in their travel program, suggesting that poor expense tracking, delayed reporting and inefficiencies are a real problem.

The survey of 562 business decision-makers, travel managers and authorised travel bookers across the Americas, EMEA and ANZ found that just 9 per cent of ANZ businesses were considering reducing their budgets this financial year. The trend towards greater spend and intention to travel is reflected globally, with the survey revealing 46 per cent of businesses in the Americas and 50 per cent in EMEA have increased their travel spend.

However, more ANZ businesses indicated they are most in need of automated expense tracking tools than those that assess travel risks and monitor traveller safety (chosen by 23% of ANZ respondents), or tools that offer predictive analytics to optimise travel budgets and identify cost-saving opportunities (45%), and virtual travel assistants (34%).

The comparisons are similar for businesses in the Americans and EMEA, where 46 and 53 per cent also need automated expense tracking more than automated risk assessments, predictive analytics and virtual assistants.

ENDS

About Corporate Traveller

Corporate Traveller is an award-winning business travel management and solutions provider for SMEs, operating in six global markets. Established in 1993 as Flight Centre Travel Group’s first corporate brand, Corporate Traveller has offered its personalised service, expert tailored advice, dedicated travel consultants, and advanced booking technology to more than 6500 Australian business customers. Offering an all-in-one innovative booking platform with the support of a personal travel consultant, Corporate Traveller makes travel simpler, faster, and easier for businesses. With a wide range of solutions available, Corporate Traveller can cater for simple requirements through to the most complex SME business travel management needs. For more information or to book a business consultation, visit corporatetraveller.com.au

Corporate Traveller can also assign a corporate credit card to each traveller profile, to help control expenses and simplify reconciliation.

Corporate Traveller’s 6 tips to help businesses better control their business travel spending:

Have a clear, comprehensive travel policy . Your policy should outline allowable expenses, preferred vendors, booking procedures and reimbursement processes. Ensure that employees are aware of, and adhere, to the policy. Think about providing resources, FAQs, and a point of contact within your company to assist travellers with expense reporting.
Use travel management software . The most useful software provides oversight of and manages bookings, reviews spending in real-time, automates expense reports, and flags non-compliant expenses. Platforms with mobile capabilities can also capture expenses in real time, and allow for easy tracking, categorisation and analysis of expenses. Having a centralised booking system for all company travel can also help compliance with policies, and help businesses negotiate better rates and consolidate approvals.
Set budgets and a pre-approval process : Allocate travel budgets for departments or projects. After that, implement a pre-approval process for travel plans and budgets. This ensures that trips are necessary and that proposed spending falls within your business travel budget and policy.
Analyse travel data : Regularly review travel expense reports to find trends, potential savings, and any compliance issues. Use this data to adjust travel policies and practices.
Negotiate supplier agreements : Establish relationships with airlines, hotels, rental car companies and travel agencies to negotiate better rates. Committing to preferred vendors can result in considerable savings.
Train employees and encourage cost-conscious behaviour : Train your travellers on expense policies and the use of expense management tools at least once a year. Share cost-effective travel practices and consider incentives for cost-saving behaviours. Promote a culture of accountability around accurate expense reporting and compliance.

Corporate travellers seize rare Easter–ANZAC window for bleisure breaks

Tue, 13 May 2025 03:49:53 GMT

One in three corporate travellers are stretching this year’s Easter–ANZAC trip to at least seven nights, an increase of 20 per cent during the same window last year, revealing the growing popularity of bleisure travel in Australia. The data also shows the average trip length has increased by 33 per cent on 2024, rising from six to eight days during the weeks of Easter and ANZAC day.

The figures come from newly released booking data from Corporate Traveller , the flagship SME division of Flight Centre Travel Group (FCTG), which demonstrates a clear uplift in longer business travel over the two-week Easter–ANZAC period. [1]

This year, as Easter and ANZAC Day fall unusually close together, it allows travellers to maximise their leave with Good Friday falling on 18 April, Easter Monday on 21 April, and ANZAC Day on Friday 25 April. Savvy Aussies can redeem just three days of annual leave from 22-25 April to bridge the gap between the Easter public holidays and ANZAC Day, resulting in a 10-day break (18-27 April).

ENDS

About Corporate Traveller

Melbourne–Perth is the most in-demand domestic corridor in late April, followed by Melbourne–Sydney, while Sydney–London tops long-haul bookings. Perth and Brisbane are leading domestic bleisure destinations, while London, Shanghai, Auckland, Jakarta, and New York rank highest for international trips of seven days or more.

Although a rise in bookings of shorter work trips is expected in the fortnight leading up to Easter, Tom says the bleisure trend has taken hold.

Corporate Traveller’s tips to maximise the Easter–ANZAC travel period

Plan ahead: Booking early is generally the best strategy, with routes like Melbourne–Perth and Sydney–London in high demand. However, if you’ve left your booking to the last minute, you may be able to find deals by flying mid-week or off-peak (around the middle of the day) to help avoid heavier crowds and reduce costs.

Consider loyalty programs and perks: Redeeming frequent flyer points, lounge passes and securing corporate hotel rates can make bleisure travel smoother and cheaper.

Embrace flexibility and wellness: Factor in downtime for rest and exploration. A balanced itinerary helps maintain productivity and wellbeing during business trips.

 Know your entitlements: Lock in annual leave dates early and confirm business travel policies or expenses that could support bleisure add-ons.

[1] Data tracked period: 14–27 April 2025 and 25 March - 7 April 2024

Flight capacity between Australia and Asia skyrockets as trade ties strengthen

Tue, 13 May 2025 03:23:48 GMT

India’s flight capacity ex-Australia grows 346 per cent of pre-pandemic levels
Vietnam (263%) and South Korea (153%) also see major capacity boosts
More direct routes make travel to key Asian markets faster, easier and more affordable

Flight capacity between Australia and Asia has surged to the highest levels seen globally, significantly outpacing the international average, which currently sits at 103 per cent of pre-pandemic levels. According to new data [1] from Corporate Traveller, the SME division of Flight Centre Travel Group (FCTG), India’s capacity is now at 346 per cent of pre-COVID figures, with Vietnam at 263 per cent and South Korea at 153 per cent.

These record-breaking figures point to a strong recovery in corporate travel and reflect deepening trade ties, as evidenced by Australia’s two-way trade with ASEAN nations reaching $192.9 billion, surpassing trade with both the US and the EU. [2]

ENDS

About Corporate Traveller

Data from Corporate Traveller also shows Singapore at 107 per cent of pre-pandemic capacity and Indonesia at 128 per cent, further cementing both markets as important gateways into Asia and top corporate travel destinations. In fact, Singapore, the Philippines, China, and Hong Kong all rank in the top 10 international destinations for Australian business travellers in 2024, while Indonesia, Vietnam, South Korea and India fall within the top 20.

Vietnam has emerged as one of Australia’s fastest-growing trade partners, with bilateral trade climbing by 10 per cent year-on-year [3] , while India’s rising economic ties [4] with Australia have propelled capacity still further. The recent codeshare arrangement between Air India and Virgin

Australia has added more seats on direct routes, allowing faster connectivity between the two countries. [5]

Global trade realignments fuelled by US-China tensions may also drive more Australia organisations to pivot toward Southeast Asia. [6]

Meanwhile, business class travel is experiencing a sharp uptick. FCTG’s Corporate brands have recorded a 45 per cent increase in international business-class bookings out of Australia in the second half of 2024, compared with the same period in 2023.

Demand for premium cabins into Hong Kong shot up by 60 per cent, with China close behind at 57 per cent growth, indicating that higher-end corporate travel is not just rebounding but expanding. One in four corporate travellers flying between Australia and Hong Kong now chooses business class, and more than one in five are doing the same on routes to China.

Recent policy changes in China have added to the momentum. After Beijing extended its visa-free entry from 15 to 30 days on 30 November 2024, [8] Corporate Traveller identified a 21 per cent jump in Australian corporate travel to China, with average trip durations also trending longer. Tom suggests this combination of softening visa policies, competitive airline offerings, and robust trade figures places Asia firmly at the centre of Australia’s corporate travel landscape.

Corporate Traveller’s insights reflect the broader national trend that has ASEAN emerging as Australia’s second-largest two-way trading partner. [9] With airlines continuing to invest in larger aircraft and upgraded cabins including Jetstar’s multi-million-dollar Dreamliner overhaul, [10] there are more options than ever to tap into Asia’s growing economic opportunities. As competition intensifies among airlines, routes are forecast to become even more competitive, providing Australian businesses with greater connectivity, efficiency, and choice in their corporate travel plans.

[1] Tracking seats available across all carriers

[2 ] https://www.dfat.gov.au/geo/southeast-asia/asean-and-australia

[3 ] https://www.dfat.gov.au/geo/vietnam/vietnam-country-brief#:~:text=Our%20bilateral%20trading%20relationship%20with,was%20valued%20at%20%2428.2%20billion

[4] https://www.ibef.org/indian-exports/india-australia-trade#:~:text=Since%20its%20inception%2C%20bilateral%20merchandise,grown%20significantly%20in%20recent%20years

[5 ] https://www.airindia.com/in/en/newsroom/press-release/Air-India-and-Virgin-Australia-enter-codeshare-partnership.html

[6 ] https://www.wsj.com/economy/trade/the-tariff-pain-is-getting-real-for-chinese-companies-624ecb55

[7 ] https://www.reuters.com/markets/asia/asian-countries-cross-hairs-trump-tariffs-2025-03-06/

[8 ] https://www.visaforchina.cn/DEL3_EN/tongzhigonggao/327343163872251904.html
[9 ] https://aseanaustralia.pmc.gov.au/resources/business#:~:text=ASEAN%20is%20Australia’s%20second%2Dlargest,Australia’s%20top%2015%20export%20markets

[10 ] https://newsroom.jetstar.com/jetstar-announces-major-revamp-of-its-boeing-787-international-fleet/ ]

How Australian retailers plan to win shoppers in 2025

Tue, 11 Mar 2025 19:50:46 GMT

About CouriersPlease

E NDS

[1] Spending on essentials slows as Aussies under 40 grapple with cost-of-living

[2] How much, and when the RBA will cut interest rates in 2025

47% of retailers are using loyalty programs to lock in customer loyalty
43% of retailers are embracing BNPL to attract cash-strapped buyers
100% of medium-sized retailers are deploying loyalty, discounting or delivery offers to remain competitive

Australian retailers are doubling down on customer loyalty perks and online shopping tools such as flexible payments to keep shoppers spending as the cost-of-living crunch tightens its grip.

A new survey commissioned by CouriersPlease – Australia’s fastest-growing franchised courier and parcel delivery service, and a proud courier partner to over half of Australia’s major retail brands – shows almost half of the nation’s retailers (47%) are now leveraging loyalty programs to secure repeat purchases. Meanwhile four out of 10 (43%) are embracing Buy Now Pay Later (BNPL) to attract business from financially stretched shoppers.

The survey, which polled 203 retailers across Australia, comes as economic pressures drive Australians to rethink their spending habits. According to CommBank’s Cost of Living Insights Report, 86 per cent of households are now actively monitoring their finances, with more than half cutting back on non-essential purchases. [1]

The CouriersPlease survey results show retailers are favouring largely online strategies that provide value and flexibility, with large businesses (more than 200 employees) particularly embracing loyalty programs, at 65 per cent – more than double the rate of micro businesses (28%). Meanwhile, almost half (49%) of medium-sized businesses (51-200 employees) are doubling down on BNPL.

Richard Thame, CEO at CouriersPlease – winner of the 2024 Retail Innovators Awards (Franchise Excellence) – says the results reflect the resilience of Australian retailers as they adapt to meet consumer needs.

Size matters: Small, medium and large retailers take different paths to boost sales<

From micro businesses to large enterprises, the survey highlights significant differences in how retailers approach their sales strategies.

Medium-sized retailers lead the way, with 100 per cent adopting at least one tool to boost loyalty or drive sales. Micro businesses face unique challenges, with 27 per cent saying they don’t use any tools to increase revenue, likely due to limited budgets and resources.

While 20 per cent of retailers are offering more delivery choices, this increases to 32 per cent of medium-sized and large retailers. More than a third (35%) of the latter group are also engaging in omnichannel retailing, compared with just 22 per cent of small and 12 per cent of micro retailers.

Queensland retailers lead in loyalty, while WA retailers lag in retail innovation

Queensland retailers dominate the loyalty program game, with 53 per cent prioritising customer rewards, the highest rate nationwide. BNPL follows closely, with half of Queensland businesses (50%) offering flexible payments to attract budget shoppers.

In contrast, West Australian retailers lag, with just 18 per cent admitting they use none of the surveyed strategies, even though 36 per cent using loyalty programs and 41 per cent using BNPL.

South Australian retailers take the lead in using frequent sales to drive revenue at 47 per cent, while NSW and Victoria take a balanced approach, blending loyalty programs and BNPL with next-day delivery (32% in NSW) to meet shopper demand for speed.

When asked if these tactics were working, the survey reveals mixed success with 43 per cent of all retailers say they had seen greater customer loyalty, while 29 per cent reported increased sales in the past year. However, 22 per cent admitted their strategies had not delivered results.

Beyond loyalty: Retailers embrace convenience and personalisation

Following loyalty programs and BNPL, the survey reveals frequent sales (31%) and next-day or same-day delivery (30%) as key tactics being used to boost revenue. Next-day same-city metropolitan deliveries have seen growing demand from CouriersPlease’s own retailer customers.

Artificial intelligence also ranks highly, with a quarter of retailers (24%) using AI to enhance customer service and streamline operations. Omnichannel retailing (22%) and customer gifting (21%) round out the list of preferred tools, while increased customer outreach through newsletters (17%) remains the least adopted strategy.

Survey results below

Q1. As online shopping competition increases and consumer spending slows amid cost-of-living pressures, what tactics are you using to increase revenue and customer loyalty?

Q2. Are these strategies working for you?

Aussies believe flight disruptions and extreme weather events will top travel risks this year

Tue, 11 Mar 2025 09:50:10 GMT

E NDS

About InsureandGo

63% of Aussies believe there will be an increase in travel risks this year
76% believe flight disruptions will be the biggest domestic travel risk, 63% the biggest international risk
The second top international travel risk is extreme weather (chosen by 59% of Aussies)
Lost luggage came out as the third top domestic travel risk (42%)

Australians have revealed the biggest travel risks they believe they will face this year, with flight cancellations the biggest risk, followed by extreme weather events. Three-quarters (76%) of Aussies expect domestic flight cancellations and delays this year, while 63 per cent expect international flight disruptions and cancellations. More than half (59%) believe extreme weather events will be the second biggest risk for domestic trips. By comparison, just 38 per cent of travellers think war and geopolitical events will be an international travel risk.

The findings come from a survey of an independent, nationally representative panel of 1006 Australians, commissioned by award-winning travel insurance provider Insure&Go . The survey found that almost two-thirds (63%) of respondents believe there will be more travel risks this year than in 2024.

The research comes during the ongoing war in the Middle East and Ukraine. Many countries have also experienced extreme weather events in 2024, including the US tornado that left over 500,000 people across four states without power in May. In April, dangerous heatwaves hit south and south-east Asia and catastrophic flooding in Rio Grande do Sul, Brazil, left 100 people dead, 130 missing and 400 injured. The United Arab Emirates also saw its heaviest rainfall in 75 years. [1]

By comparison, flight cancellations and delays also had minimal impact, with Australia’s November cancellations sitting at 2.6 per cent, on-time arrivals at 68.4 per cent and on-time departures at 69 per cent. However, those on-time figures were notably below long-term averages, arrivals were 12.3 per cent lower than the 80.7 per cent average, while departures came in 12.9 per cent below the 81.9 per cent benchmark. Meanwhile, flight cancellations and delays had only a minimal impact, with November’s cancellation rate at 2.6 per cent, 0.4 per cent higher than the 2.2 per cent long-term average. [2]

[1] 2024’s Climate Crisis: Extreme Weather Around the Globe Signals the Urgent need for Action | Climate Council

[2] Airline On Time Performance Statistics—Monthly

Older and younger generations views conflict

Over-50s travellers are most likely to believe flight cancellations or delays will be the top risk for domestic travel (81%) and international travel (67%). They are also most likely to believe contracting COVID or other viruses is a high risk during domestic travel, at 49 per cent, compared with 25 per cent for under-30s travellers, reflecting the medical vulnerability of the older group. The pattern was similar for international travel, with the perceived risk of getting sick declining the younger the respondent.

The threat of war and geopolitical events had similar patterns, with 49 per cent of over-50s respondents listing this as one of the top three risks – more than double the rate of under-30s travellers (21%). Among those aged 30-49, 34 per cent voted war and geopolitical events as a top risk, suggesting greater interest and monitoring of global politics among older travellers.

The opposite was true for extreme weather events, where younger generations aged 18-49 are more likely to see this as one of the biggest threats during travel, suggesting there may be more awareness and anxiety around climate change among this younger age group.

Understand the risks and your travel insurance

As Australians ease into 2025 and start planning their upcoming holidays, David Mayo, Commercial & Marketing Director, Insure&Go gives travellers a timely reminder to monitor what is happening in the country or city they plan to visit and closely read exclusions in their travel insurance policy.

7 in 10 Aussies to postpone their travel bucket lists under tightening budgets

Tue, 11 Mar 2025 09:38:42 GMT

E NDS

About InsureandGo

60% of Australians are postponing their international travel bucket list
30% are postponing their domestic travel bucket list
63% need to save more than a year, and 32% more than two years, for their bucket list trip

New research has revealed that 71 per cent of Australians are postponing ticking off their travel bucket lists due to tightening budgets, with almost a third (31%) saying it would take them one to two years to plan or save for such a trip.

The findings come from a survey of an independent, nationally representative panel of 1006 Australians commissioned by award-winning travel insurance provider Insure&Go to gauge the impact of ongoing cost-of living pressures on luxury spending such as travel.

Insure&Go found that 65 per cent of respondents have a bucket list of dream travel destinations that they would like to experience in their lifetime. However, due to cost-of-living pressures, 60 per cent have had to postpone international travel and 30 per cent have held off on domestic bucket list trips. Almost two-thirds (63%) will need to save more than a year for their bucket list trip, while almost one-third (32%) will need to save for more than two years.

Over the 12 months to the September 2024 quarter, Living Cost Indexes in Australia rose between 2.8 and 4.7 per cent. The most significant contributor to the increases was mortgage interest charges, which rose 18.9 per cent over the year. [1]

The cost of travel also rose in the aftermath of COVID lockdowns and the Russia and Ukraine war, as tourism operators recoup losses and struggle to meet demand due to supply and staffing constraints. [2] In 2025 travellers can find international return airfares from Sydney to many cities in Europe – the most popular bucket list destination among Insure&Go’s survey respondents, at 67 per cent – between $1800 and $2600. [3] The international travel market is still recovering, with the number of residents returning to Australia from short-term trips reaching 98 per cent of pre-COVID volumes in 2023-24.

[1] Selected Living Cost Indexes, Australia, September 2024 | Australian Bureau of Statistics

[2] The Recovery in the Australian Tourism Industry | Bulletin – December 2022 | RBA

[3] KAYAK Explore – Search for Cheap Flights to Anywhere

Over-30s most likely to hold off under financial pressures

Survey respondents aged 30-49 are most likely to hold back on ticking off their domestic and international travel bucket lists due to a lack of disposable income: 78 per cent indicated they will postpone either their domestic or international bucket lists.

Over-50s respondents are least likely to hold back, with 64 per cent holding off on either their domestic or international bucket lists, suggesting that this age group has fewer financial responsibilities and had more opportunity to tick off some of their bucket list items without cost-of-living pressures hamstringing their holidays.

Top three bucket list destinations

Insure&Go asked respondents where their bucket list destination is. Europe topped the list for 67 per cent of respondents, followed by Asia (53%) and the USA (41%). Those aged 30-49 are most likely to flock to Europe for its culture and history (70%), followed by 66 per cent of under-30s and 65 per cent of over-50s.

Under-30s also had Asia high on their bucket list (at 61%), likely due to the destination’s affordability. Older generations aged 30-49 and over 50 are interested in the remote wilderness experiences of Antarctica, at 19 per cent and 21 per cent respectively – twice the interest of under-30s who chose this destination (at 9%).

Insure&Go, Commercial and Marketing Director, David Mayo says the travel options are endless and encourages travellers to keep aiming toward fulfilling their bucket list.

CouriersPlease and EIZ join forces to simplify cross-border parcel delivery

Thu, 06 Mar 2025 20:03:56 GMT

About CouriersPlease

E NDS

[1] https://www.roymorgan.com/findings/9646-shein-and-temu-contintue-to-grow-strongly-august-2024

[2 https://www.ibisworld.com/au/industry/online-shopping/1837/

Australia’s insatiable appetite for online shopping deals is reshaping the national E-Commerce landscape, with mega-platforms like Temu, Shein, and now TikTok marketplace fuelling demand for fast fashion and bargain deals.

Shein is another E-Commerce giant that has taken the Australian market by storm. Together with Temu, they collectively gained close to $3 billion in annual sales in the 12 months leading up to June. In the six months leading up to March this year online shopping surged to nearly $32 billion. [1]

New research has revealed almost half of Australian consumers (46%) made a purchase on Temu during the September quarter. The findings come from Australia’s fastest-growing franchised courier service, CouriersPlease , which commissioned an independent, nationally representative survey of 1,007 Australians who shop online that indicated younger shoppers are driving the surge. The data showed 62 per cent of under 30s shopped at Temu, compared to 44 per cent of over 50s.

The figures come amid projections Australia’s E-Commerce sector is expected to reach an annual turnover of $57.7 billion this year. [2] This added surge of cross-border activity combined with a booming domestic E-Commerce market, is amplifying the logistical challenges of parcel delivery across the country.

To keep up with that surge in demand, CouriersPlease has formed cross-border partnerships it says are now crucial to smoothing out last-mile delivery complexities.

Those partnerships include collaboration with top cross-border logistic platform EIZ – a key player in making international shipping seamless. By integrating EIZ technology, CouriersPlease says it’s tapping into digital infrastructure needed to streamline international shipping, ensuring millions of parcels from global sellers reach Australian shoppers.

EIZ became a pivotal player in E-Commerce logistics since launching in 2018 and has since played a leading role in helping global retailers navigate the international delivery gap by breaking down language and distance barriers facing global retailers. The platform seamlessly allows retailers to integrate with local delivery networks and get their parcels to last-mile delivery services and into the hands of Aussie buyers.

CouriersPlease CEO Richard Thame says these partnerships are crucial to smoothly facilitating delivery into Australia, particularly as national appetite for an online bargain shows no signs of abating.

Opportunities and challenges in cross-border E-Commerce

While the international online shopping market presents incredible opportunities, it also brings logistical challenges, says Sergio. The sheer volume of parcels crossing borders daily requires sophisticated systems to manage order fulfilment, label creation, and real-time tracking.

EIZ APAC General Manager Sergio Balmes says more than two hundred thousand parcels are now arriving in the country daily, making their platform’s role in streamlining the integration between global sellers and Australian consumers more vital than ever.

Looking ahead: exponential growth and innovation

Sergio says ongoing discussions with global businesses and platforms are in the works and he anticipates substantial growth in the E-Commerce sector in the months to come. He’s forecasting parcel volumes to increase exponentially as more international retailers enter the Australian market.

The Swift effect continues: international music artists flock to Australia

Thu, 06 Mar 2025 09:28:24 GMT

[1] Taylor Swift: Australian Eras Tour sparks $558m economy boost

[2 ] Venues analysed: Rod Laver, Melbourne; Marvel Stadium Docklands; Accor Stadum, Engie Stadium & Qudos Bank Arena (all at Sydney Olympic Park); Sydney Entertainment Centre; Sydney Cricket Ground; Melbourne Cricket Ground; Suncorp Stadium, Brisbane; Brisbane Entertainment Centre; RAC Arena Adelaide; RAC Arena Perth; Optus Stadium Perth

[3 ] Australia’s live music industry: let’s focus on some facts

[ 4 ] Soundcheck: Australian music festivals – Creative Australia

[5 ] Festival Fever Fading in Favour of stadium acts

[6] Live Performance Industry in Australia

ENDS

About Stage and Screen

International artists performing at major arenas and stadiums across Sydney, Melbourne, Brisbane, Perth, Adelaide in January-March in Q1 2025:

Australia’s live music scene is set to boom this summer as international artists tap into the market that Taylor Swift’s Eras Tour sparked in February. In a landmark event that spotlighted Australia as a powerhouse market for the global music industry, Swift sold an astonishing 600,000 tickets in seven sell-out concerts across Melbourne and Sydney, injecting an estimated $559 million into the economy. [1] Now, artists like Billie Eilish and Kylie Minogue are hoping to capture their share of sell-out shows and big returns.

An analysis by Stage and Screen , a boutique travel management subsidiary of Flight Centre Travel Group specialising in the creative, retail, sports and entertainment industries, revealed a significant increase in international music artists planning Australian concerts in the same quarter that Swift toured in 2024.

Stage and Screen compared international music acts at 13 of Australia’s biggest arenas and stadiums in Sydney, Melbourne, Brisbane, Adelaide and Perth for the first quarters of 2024 and 2025. [2] From January to March 2024, only a handful of major international acts including Pink, Blink 182 and the Jonas Brothers were held at these venues, all of whom were eclipsed by Swift. In comparison, in January to March 2025 no less than 14 international acts will take to major arenas and stadiums, with February being the most popular month. Bryan Adams, Billie Eilish, Drake, Kylie Minogue, Keshi, Chris Stapleton and The Prodigy are all pencilled in for the same month that Swift took Australia by storm.

The findings are encouraging for an industry that has been challenged by huge increases in production and touring costs, streaming platforms and changes in the way audiences prefer to experience music. [3] Several music festivals have been cancelled in recent years due to poor tickets sales and rising operational costs. [4] A Stage and Screen survey found that 89 per cent of young Australians chose not to attend music festivals citing multiple deterrents such ticket prices, regional locations, exposure to the elements, safety concerns and a swing toward standalone headline acts in city stadiums with almost a third (31%) of respondents preferring a headline act, such as Taylor Swift and P!NK, in a city stadium to festivals.

In conjunction with the survey, Stage and Screen analysed Flight Centre bookings to the Taylor Swift Eras Tour concerts in February. It discovered an 88 per cent increase in flight bookings to Sydney around the concert dates (23-26 February) compared with the week prior. Flight bookings to Melbourne around Swift’s concert dates there (16-18 February) increased by 89 per cent on the week prior. [5]

The latest available report on Australia’s live performance industry showed total ticket sales of $3.1 billion in 2023 with contemporary music and music festivals accounting for 58.7 per cent of revenue and 46.7 per cent of attendance. NSW and Victoria were the biggest markets for live performance, contributing 64.7 per cent of revenue and 61.2 per cent of attendance in 2023. [6]

New data reveals Australia’s regional corporate travel growth

Thu, 06 Mar 2025 04:45:59 GMT

Regional travel grew 13% year-on-year for the September quarter
Top outbound regional destinations include Mackay, Cairns, Townsville, and the Gold Coast

Regional travel is the fastest-growing segment in business travel, even amid challenges in the aviation sector, new data has revealed. Despite the collapse of Bonza in May and Virgin picking up an estimated 127,000 Rex tickets when the airline went into voluntary administration in July, [1] Corporate Traveller, the flagship SME division of Flight Centre Travel Group (FCTG), reported a 13 per cent year-on-year increase in business travel to regional areas for the September quarter.

Top regional destinations fueling growth

The top regional destinations for business travelers during July to September 2024 were:
Australia-wide: Mackay, Cairns, Townsville, Gold Coast, Kalgoorlie, Rockhampton, Newcastle
From Sydney: Gold Coast, Sunshine Coast, Cairns, Dubbo, Ballina, Wagga Wagga
From Melbourne: Gold Coast, Launceston, Newcastle, Cairns, Mildura, Sunshine Coast
From Brisbane: Mackay, Rockhampton, Townsville, Cairns, Emerald, Moranbah, Gladstone
From Perth: Kalgoorlie, Karratha, Port Hedland, Newman, Broome, Paraburdoo, Geraldton
From Adelaide: Alice Springs, Gold Coast, Port Lincoln, Mount Gambier, Broken Hill, Whyalla
From Hobart: Gold Coast, Cairns, Launceston, Darwin, Townsville, Wagga Wagga, Newcastle
From Darwin: Alice Springs, Cairns, Gove, Tennant Creek, Kununurra, Townsville, Broome
From Canberra: Gold Coast, Newcastle, Darwin, Cairns, Coffs Harbour, Alice Springs, Mackay

About Corporate Traveller

Economic drivers in regional Australia

The findings underscore the crucial role of regional Australia, which has been the focus of Federal Government investment and is home to key industries such as renewable energy, agriculture, tourism, and mining. [2] Regional Australia produces most of the country’s fresh food, two-thirds of national exports, and accounts for 50 per cent of tourism revenue. [3] There are over 100,000 tourism-related businesses across the regions, while agriculture, fisheries, and forestry production have seen record highs in recent years.

Across Australian industry, the mining sector experienced significant growth, with earnings jumping 23 per cent, or $52 billion, in 2022-23, driven by coal mining, oil, and gas. The clean energy sector is also witnessing record growth, with $4.9 billion in new large-scale storage investments in 2023. Its workforce is expected to increase by 30 per cent, or 213,000 workers, by 2033, with growth likely to be strongest in regional Australia. [4]

Regional Australia’s combined population is on a steady upward trajectory, with 1.4 per cent (117,000 people) growth in 2022-23. Queensland led the growth at 2.2 per cent, followed by Western Australia (1.4 per cent). [5]

Challenges and future outlook

Despite capacity constraints on regional flights and challenges in the aviation sector following Bonza’s liquidation and Rex’s uncertain future, the demand for regional travel remains robust. Industry watchdogs have expressed concerns over potential hikes in regional airfares due to reduced competition. [6]

Looking ahead, the Federal Government threw Rex an $80 million lifeline to keep its regional routes running during the voluntary administration process, which has been extended until June 2025 while administrators source a buyer. [7]

[1] Exclusive: Virgin fills more than 700 737s with Rex passengers – Australian Aviation

[2 Regional Investment Framework | Department of Infrastructure, Transport, Regional Development, Communications and the Arts
][3 Why the regions are key to unlocking Australia’s future
][4 Australian Industry, 2022-23 financial year | Australian Bureau of Statistics
][5 Regional Population, 2022–23 | Centre for Population
][6 Domestic airline competition in Australia
][7 Albanese Government backs regional aviation | Ministers for the Department of Infrastructure ]

ENDS

The 5 sporting events set to drive business travel in 2025

Thu, 06 Mar 2025 04:30:53 GMT

Host destinations for the Australian Open, AFL and NRL grand finals, NRL Magic Round and Bathurst 1000 saw an average 19% growth in business travel arrivals this year
In January, Melbourne is set to capture the highest proportion of business travellers during the Australian Open, compared to any other sporting event. Melbourne arrivals during the Open captured 46% more travellers this year than the host cities to all other events combined.

New data reveals the top destinations for business travel around Australia’s major sporting events. Melbourne, Sydney, Brisbane, and Bathurst—during the Australian Open, NRL Magic Round, AFL and NRL Grand Finals, and Bathurst 1000—experienced an average 19 per cent year-on-year growth in business travel bookings. Melbourne during the Australian Open topped the list, drawing 46 per cent more business travellers than the other four events combined, positioning the tournament’s city as 2025’s leader for corporate sport spectators.

Corporate Traveller compared flight and ground transport to, and hotel bookings in, the host cities during these events across 2023 and 2024. Brisbane during the NRL Magic Round recorded the highest growth in business travel bookings this year, at 26 per cent, followed by Bathurst during the Bathurst 1000 at 20 per cent. Melbourne’s AFL Grand Final and Australian Open recorded 19 per cent and 17 per cent growth, respectively, while Sydney during the NRL Grand Final saw a 10 per cent increase.

ENDS

About Corporate Traveller

Where are business fans flocking from?

Corporate Traveller’s outbound data found that business fans are travelling from the nation’s leading business centres of Sydney and Melbourne. These two cities featured in the top three booking origin cities for every event, aside from those held locally.

The only event based outside of Melbourne and Sydney this year – the NRL Magic Round in Brisbane – featured both cities in the top three origin cities. Perth and Brisbane were next, while Adelaide featured in the top three for the AFL Grand Final only.

What makes the Australian Open so popular?

The 2024 Australian Open broke attendance records with more than 1.1 million attendees. It injected an estimated $482 million into Melbourne’s accommodation, hospitality and tourism sectors. [1] The event is one that ticks many boxes: it is the first of four global grand slam events of the year, the Melbourne Park venue has undergone extensive renovations, and the program has evolved into a three-week festival of sport and entertainment. [2]

Our love for the game keeps driving growth

Brisbane also recorded the highest year-on-year growth rate during the NRL Magic Round, the event also spanning over three days. First launched in 2019, it has become increasingly popular as the format allows spectators to watch a full round of rugby league in the one venue and over the one weekend. [3] The event is expected to continue growing in popularity with the introduction of a women’s rugby league magic round in 2025 and plans to branch out into regional locations in 2026. [4]

Similarly, the Bathurst 1000 also runs over just three days, with Bathurst attracting the second highest number of corporate bookings over the course of the event in 2024.

Why are business travellers increasingly choosing to attend major sporting event destinations?

Tom Walley, Australian-based Global Managing Director for Corporate Traveller believes that major sporting events offer invaluable networking opportunities for businesses, however, stresses the days of the week and duration of these events play a significant role in the decision to attend.

Tom notes that it’s not just limited sporting events. Major music concerts are popular for making the same connections.

In music, big names heading to Australia in 2025 include Kylie Minogue, Billi Eilish, Dua Lipa, Katie Perry, Oasis and Metallica. [5] Melbourne International Comedy Festival also kicks off in March followed by the Sydney Comedy Festival in May.

The Australian Open 2025 is on from 6-26 January and Bathurst 1000 V8 Supercar Championships is on 9-12 October, AFL Grand Final is 27 September 2025. Dates for the other top sporting events are yet to be confirmed but the NRL Magic Round commonly runs in May and the NRL Grand Final in early October. [6 7]

[1] A-record-breaking-Australian-Open-–-AO-2024-by-the-numbers-v3.pdf
[2] AO 2024 to bring fans closer to the action | AO
[3] What is NRL Magic Round? History, schedule and location for festival of rugby league | Sporting News Australia
[4] NRLW Magic Round 2025 | NRL.com
[5] Upcoming Concerts in Australia 2024 & 2025 – Page 2 – Concertful
[6] 2025 Festival | Melbourne International Comedy Festival
[7] Sydney Comedy Festival Gift Vouchers tickets | Ticketek Gift Vouchers | Ticketek Australia

Suburbs forecasted to spend the most on Click Frenzy, Black Friday & Cyber Monday online sales this year

Wed, 15 Jan 2025 21:30:54 GMT

About CouriersPlease

E NDS

[1] https://blog.rakutenadvertising.com/en-au/insights/click-frenzy-2023/

[2] https://www.retail.org.au/media/black-friday-sales-a-winner-this-christmas-as-cost-of-living-continues-to-bite

[3] CouriersPlease analysed its parcel deliveries to suburbs across Australia from 20 October to 4 December in 2023.

Marking the beginning of the Christmas shopping season, Click Frenzy, Black Friday and Cyber Monday have cemented their place as Australia’s most anticipated sales events. Despite our ongoing cost-of-living challenges, last October’s Click Frenzy event recorded a 28 per cent YoY increase in sales on its first day, [1] while this year’s Black Friday and Cyber Monday sales are forecasted to attract a 5.5 per cent YoY increase in spending over the four days, to $6.7 billion. [2] Many retailers have been capitalising their popularity by launching the sales weeks before official launch dates.

But where are Australians planning to spend most during these sales? Based on its delivery data [3] , CouriersPlease – Australia’s fastest-growing franchised courier service – is forecasting the suburbs and states poised to lead the nation’s spending during this year’s Click Frenzy (11-15 November), Black Friday (29 November), and Cyber Monday (2 December).

Delivering about 30 million parcels each year – largely for well-established retailers, including Myer, Big W and Kmart – CouriersPlease’s parcel volumes are a reliable barometer of Australian online shopping habits.

CEO Richard Thame says that parcel delivery volumes have steadily increased during this annual sales trifecta.

NSW will lead the nation for Click Frenzy and Black Friday spending this year

CouriersPlease forecasts that NSW shoppers will make up more than a third of online spending at the sales this year. Last year, NSW shoppers accounted for 37 per cent of parcel deliveries during this period. With nearly one third of Australians residing in NSW, the state also had a higher-than-average per capita delivery volume.

Victoria made up 29 per cent of parcel deliveries, also outperforming its population size, which represents a quarter of Australians. In third place is Queensland at 20 per cent, matching its share of the Australian population. South Australia accounted for just over seven per cent, while Western Australia received 5.74 per cent of all parcel deliveries. Tasmania and the Northern Territory scored less than one per cent each of national parcel volumes.

Capital city CBDs – Melbourne, Sydney and Adelaide – also made the top 10 list, reflecting consumer preferences to have parcels delivered to workplaces.

Pakenham (VIC)
Melbourne (VIC)
Berwick (VIC)
Sydney (NSW)
Sunbury (VIC)
Point Cook (VIC)
Adelaide (SA)
Werribee (VIC)
Clyde North (VIC)
Mt Barker (SA)

More than half of the top 10 shopping suburbs are expected to be in Victoria

CouriersPlease is expecting Victoria to once again dominate the top 10 suburb ranking this year. Its delivery volumes show that, last year, Victoria took out seven of the ‘top 10’ suburb rankings for parcel deliveries during Click Frenzy, Black Friday and Cyber Monday, highlighting the strong online shopping culture in Victoria

The top suburbs in each state forecasted to spend the most

CouriersPlease is forecasting that capital city CBDs, major regional centres, and fast-growing suburbs with plenty of residential development – will create demand for online spending – and diverse demographics will again dominate each State and Territory’s top five suburb ranking for this year’s events.

In NSW, Sydney topped the list for parcel deliveries during last year’s sales events, indicating the abundance of parcel deliveries to workplaces. The other top-spending suburbs included the well-heeled Mosman, with its high disposable incomes, and western suburbs such as Castle Hill, Glenmore Park and Blacktown, with their large and growing populations.

Victoria’s top five list includes Pakenham and Berwick in Melbourne’s growing southeastern corridor with its significant residential development that attracts families and young professionals. Suburbs like Sunbury and Point Cook also made the list, reflecting their expanding populations and strong connectivity.

Queensland’s top-performing suburbs include Caboolture and Morayfield, both north of Brisbane – but also suburbs in regional centres. The affluent suburbs of Buderim on the Sunshine Coast and Southport on the Gold Coast ranked highly.

In South Australia, Mount Barker, in the Adelaide Hills, was a top-shopping suburb. Western Australia’s top suburbs were concentrated in the outer suburbs of Perth, with Secret Harbour, Port Kennedy, and Baldivis leading the way.

NSW: Sydney, Castle Hill, Glenmore Park, Mosman, and Blacktown
Victoria: Pakenham, Melbourne, Berwick, Sunbury, and Point Cook
Queensland: Caboolture, Morayfield, Buderim, Southport, and Narangba
South Australia: Adelaide, Mount Barker, Morphett Vale, Aldinga Beach, and Paralowie
Western Australia: Secret Harbour, Port Kennedy, Baldivis, Wellard, and Waikiki

More broadly, Richard describes a shift in how Australian shop online.

In anticipating of the increase in parcel deliveries, CouriersPlease has been expanding its logistics network to efficiently manage the higher volume.

Parcel delivery volumes for 2023 Click Frenzy, Black Friday & Cyber Monday
(20 October to 4 December 2023)

State & Territory breakdown

Top 10 suburbs in Australia

Top 5 suburbs in each State

Couriers Please urges the public to be kind to couriers this peak shopping season

Wed, 15 Jan 2025 21:15:55 GMT

About CouriersPlease

E NDS

[1] https://www.cpm-aus.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2024/09/2024-Australian-Christmas-Shopping-Intentions-Research-Report-CPMAustralia-RetailSafari-1.pdf

Aggressive behaviour towards couriers is tipped to increase as delivery volumes soar ahead of Christmas
Follows reports 69% of Australians will shop online for Christmas presents this year
Shoppers asked to be respectful to couriers working around the clock to meet demand

As Australia enters peak shopping season – with Click Frenzy, Black Friday, Christmas and Boxing Day expected to draw in the majority of online purchases in November and December, the nation’s fastest-growing parcel delivery service is calling on Australians to extend extra holiday cheer to couriers on the delivery frontline.

CouriersPlease is gearing up for what could be one of the nation’s busiest festive season yet, with reports showing almost 7 out of 10 Australians (69%) will favour online marketplaces for Christmas shopping. [1]

While the company’s Franchise Partners are doing their best and working long hours to get the large volumes of parcels delivered as quickly as possible, CouriersPlease is expressing concern about abuse, assault, intimidation, threats, targeting of delivery vans and even parcel theft – some of which is already being directed at its couriers.

The CouriersPlease Customer Service team operates through a chat bot and virtual assistant, rather than by phone. Customers are therefore advised to keep their cool on social media if there is a delay or no immediate answer.

Delivering a smooth experience: 3 tips for online shoppers this festive season

To help the elves of the courier world get parcel deliveries to doorsteps with minimum fuss, CouriersPlease is offering a few quick tips for sending and receiving parcels this season:

Double check the address : Even a small typo can lead to delays, so ensure the recipient details are 100 per cent correct when filling out your address on online shopping sites or sending a parcel.
Be ready for delivery : If your parcel requires a signature, try to be home to receive it, or arrange for delivery to a safe alternative such as the workplace, a collection point, or with a trusted neighbour.
Consider safe drop spot on your property : Having a secure spot for your parcel can reduce theft and ensure your delivery makes it safely to you.

9 in 10 Australian retailers have expanded their parcel delivery options, in time for Christmas

Wed, 15 Jan 2025 20:23:06 GMT

About CouriersPlease

E NDS

[1] CouriersPlease: Why nine in 10 Aussies abandon online shopping carts – Retail World Magazine

[2] PE_Global_Report_web_compressed.pdf

87% of retailers have offered customers more shipping options this year
30% of all retailers made changes designed to speed up shipping
82% will expand more shipping options in 2025

In good news for online shoppers in the lead-up to Christmas, new research shows almost 9 in 10 Australian retailers have made major updates to their shipping services, most of which offer more options for faster deliveries. The changes will continue into 2025, with 82 per cent of retailers planning to offer customers even more shipping options in the new year.

The findings come from an independent survey of 203 Australian retailers commissioned by CouriersPlease , Australia’s fastest growing franchised courier and parcel delivery service. The full survey results can be found here.

The survey follows earlier CouriersPlease research that showed 88 per cent of online shoppers abandoned shopping carts at checkout, with 63 per cent blaming high shipping costs. [1] Parcel theft has also become a problem in Australia, with 36 per cent of people reporting parcel loss or theft in their lifetime. [2]

Sweeping changes have been made this year across 87 per cent of retailers to counteract some of these issues. They include new shipping rates and discounts, more immediate shipping and broader delivery options.

Retailers level the field on shipping rates

With shipping costs dependent on delivery location, regional shoppers are often charged higher shipping rates at checkout. This year, 28 per cent of retailers switched to flat shipping rates, levelling the field no matter where the customer lives. More than a quarter (29%) are planning to add flat rates next year.

An equal 20 per cent of retailers also introduced bulk-rate shipping discounts and free shipping in some areas, though this often requires a minimum spend. The trend will continue into the new year with another 21 per cent of retailers planning to make the changes.

Medium-sized retailers (with 51-200 employees) had the highest number of changes to shipping rates, with 19 per cent introducing free shipping and 43 per cent adding flat rates.

More options for faster delivery

Thirty per cent of Australian retailers introduced same-day or next-day shipping, reflecting high shopper demand for immediate delivery. In Queensland, an overwhelming 41 per cent of retailers introduced same-day shipping – significantly more than in South Australia (at 27%). On the flipside, 47 per cent of South Australian retailers introduced next-day shipping, compared with 24 per cent in Queensland, 32 per cent in NSW and 24 per cent in Victoria.

As couriers work around the clock in the lead up to Christmas to deliver record parcel volumes, shoppers can help them achieve a first-time delivery by entering complete and correct receiver details – including the business name, unit number and email address, if relevant – on the retailer check out page.

More options for secure deliveries

More retailers have also been offering alternative delivery choices, allowing customers to receive parcels after hours when they are home, or redirect goods to secure collection points or a neighbour’s house. Twenty-two per cent of retailers introduced after-hours shipping this year, while 9 per cent added alternative delivery options.

CouriersPlease offers several alternative delivery methods, including redelivery to a different address, leaving parcels in a safe place nominated by the parcel recipient, and delivering parcels to a neighbour up to three doors away. The company has 3000+ convenient pickup and delivery locations in partnership with technology partner HUBBED Parcelpoints. These free pick-up and drop-off locations enable parcel recipients to collect and return parcels seven days a week, and during extended hours, close to home.

The full survey results, including age and State and Territory breakdowns, can be found here .

1 in 2 Aussies expected to plan holidays to unwind in 2025, with beach stays coming out on top

Wed, 15 Jan 2025 10:02:44 GMT

Full survey results can be accessed here .

Insure&Go (insureandgo.com.au) is one of Australia’s leading, award-winning online travel insurance specialists. Since it was established in Australia in 2012, Insure&Go has covered more than 2 million Australian travellers. Owned by Europ Assistance, which operates in more than 200 countries, Insure&Go has an expansive, 24/7 global assistance network. Insure&Go Australia has won numerous awards and recommendations for its services including the 2024 WeMoney Award for ‘Best for Seniors’ award, the 2023 Canstar award for ‘Outstanding Value – Seniors Travel Insurance’ and ‘Outstanding Value – International Travel Insurance’, the 2024 Finder award for ‘Trusted Brand’. More information about Insure&Go’s awards can be found on its website .This insurance is underwritten by Mitsui Sumitomo Insurance Company Limited (MSI), ABN 49 000 525 637, AFSL 240816. Europ Assistance Australia Pty Ltd, ACN 140 219 594, AFSL 552106, trading as Insure&Go and other brands, holds a binding authority from the insurer, MSI to issue contracts of insurance and to deal with or settle claims on MSI’s behalf and as MSI’s agent. Any advice is general advice only and does not take account of your particular circumstances. Before purchasing, decide whether this product is right for you. Consider the PDS and TMD at InsureandGo.com.au .

46% of Australians more interested in ‘do nothing’ holidays in 2025
39% keen on sightseeing holidays
Beach destinations expected to be most popular, with 30% of respondents favouring them
42% would spend most on a holiday designed for relaxation than any other type of holiday

As the summer holidays approach, new research reveals that Australians will prioritise beach and resort getaways in 2025, with many willing to spend extra for the quintessential sun-soaked escape.

The finding comes from a survey of an independent, nationally representative panel of 1006 Australians commissioned by award-winning Australian travel insurance provider Insure&Go , which sought to understand that the types of holidays will trend in the next 12 months and the factors driving these changes.

[1] Number of Aussies travelling overseas reaches pre-COVID levels | Australian Bureau of Statistics (abs.gov.au)

[2] Number of Aussies travelling overseas reaches pre-COVID levels | Australian Bureau of Statistics (abs.gov.au)

[3] Australia Travel Trends 2024 | Skyscanner Australia

Emerging travel trends, what’s expected in 2025

Insure&Go found that, despite emerging travel trends, the classic ‘do nothing’ holiday – designed to enable travellers to unwind – will be the top choice for almost half of all Australians (46%) in the next 12 months. Beach or resort-based holidays will be the most popular, with 30 per cent of Australians more likely to choose this holiday type next year.

The research also revealed a significant willingness among Aussies to spend more on do-nothing holidays: 42 per cent of respondents said they would spend more money on a trip designed to simply relax and get away.

Insure&Go, Director – Commercial and Marketing (B2C), David Mayo said the enduring appeal of ‘do nothing’ holidays – particularly beach and resort holidays – may reflect a deeper desire to disconnect and relax amid our fast-paced workplaces and lifestyles.

The findings come as Australia’s international travel finally starts to exceed pre-COVID levels, reaching 100 per cent of 2019 volumes in January this year and continuing to grow throughout 2024. [1] With Indonesia a haven for beaches and watersports, it’s the top destination for Australians in 2023-24, followed by New Zealand, the USA, Japan, and the UK. [2]

Looking at the next 12 months, 39 per cent of respondents said they were most interested in taking a sightseeing holiday, with the strongest interest among over-65s (23% of respondents who chose this holiday option). Culture, sampling local food and historical tours are among the most popular attractions that travellers look for. [3]

By comparison, younger people aged 25-34 are most interested in travelling for an event such as a family occasion, work, a sports game or a concert (making up 29% of respondents who chose this holiday option). This was also the most popular reason for travelling among 35-44-year-olds, reflecting the life stage of these age groups and the higher likelihood that they would be attending friends’ weddings or travelling for work.

The research strongly indicates that Australians love to travel simply for the sake of relaxing or travelling, rather than for a specific purpose: just 15 per cent of respondents said they would travel for a family, friend, work, entertainment or sporting event.

Travel that blends purpose and leisure

Insure&Go found that even if Australians travelled for a family, work, entertainment or sporting event, most would extend it to include a relaxing or sightseeing holiday.

If travelling for an event, 38 per cent of respondents said they would add an extra 2-3 days to turn that special occasion or event into a short holiday. Another 29 per cent would bookend their trip with 4-5 extra days and 19 per cent would add seven days or more.

This blending of purpose and leisure, especially for longer periods, was most popular among male respondents. Two-thirds (66%) of respondents who would add an extra 4-5 days on either side of a family occasion, work or a special event are males. Furthermore, 61 per cent of respondents opting for seven days or more are also men. The leaning toward seven days or more was most common among 23-34-year-olds, making up 36 per cent of respondents who chose seven days. A close 38 per cent would add a short 2-3-day getaway.

There are several factors unique to the current economic climate that are influencing the way people travel, David says.

E NDS

New data reveals 41% boom in retail sector business travel

Wed, 15 Jan 2025 09:37:59 GMT

[1] https://www.abs.gov.au/media-centre/media-releases/retail-spending-steady-september#:~:text=Australian%20retail%20turnover%20rose%200.1,flat%20result%20in%20July%202024 .

[2] https://melbourneinstitute.unimelb.edu.au/publications/macroeconomic-reports/latest-news/index-of-consumer-sentiment

[3] https://www.statista.com/statistics/1295494/australia-retail-trade-businesses/#:~:text=Number%20of%20operating%20retail%20trade%20businesses%20Australia%20FY%202017%2D2023&text=At%20the%20end%20of%20financial,across%20the%20country%20since%202017 .

[4] https://assets.kpmg.com/content/dam/kpmg/au/pdf/2023/australian-retail-outlook-2023.pdf

[5] https://www.jobsandskills.gov.au/data/occupation-and-industry-profiles/industries/retail-trade

ENDS

About Stage and Screen

Business travel bookings in the retail sector rose 41% YoY Jan-Sept 2024.
February is the top month for travel in the sector
Top three international destinations are New Zealand, China, Hong Kong

Despite sluggish growth in Australian retail trade, consumer sentiment is growing – along with significant growth in travel in the retail industry. An analysis by Stage and Screen , a boutique travel management subsidiary of Flight Centre Travel Group specialising the creative, retail, sports and entertainment industries, has revealed a 41 per cent increase year on year in flight bookings in the retail sector – suggesting the industry been working hard to plan for growth, connect with employees and network with suppliers and customers.

The Stage and Screen analysis is based on Flight Centre Travel Group (FCTG) retail sector flight bookings from January-September 2023 to January-September 2024.

While Australian retail turnover rose just 0.7 per cent in August and 0.1 per cent in September [1] , the latest Westpac Consumer Sentiment report found that consumer sentiment is the highest it’s been since 2022, at 94.6. [2]

The growth in travel points to the sector’s significant and growing physical footprint across Australia. The retail sector is made up of around 155,000 businesses across Australia – an increase of over 20,000 since 2017, despite the growth in online shopping. [3] A recent report found that 39 per cent of retailers who operate physical stores plan to increase the number of stores in the coming year. [4]

The retail sector is also the second-largest employing industry, with 9.3 per cent of the country’s employees, [5] and with a growth of 6,000 employees (or 0.5%) from in the 12 months to August 2024. The sheer physical scale of the industry points to a requirement among its businesses to conduct more face-to-face meetings and events than other industries, to remain competitive.

The Stage and Screen analysis also revealed that retail trips this year averaged five days, suggesting that businesses strategically organise their travel to maximise their return on investment.

The Stage and Screen analysis also reveals retailers travelled most in February this year – when the peak of consumer sales starts to normalise – followed by high flight booking volumes in March and May (tied), then August and July.

Sydney is the most popular travel destination in the sector, followed by Melbourne, Brisbane, Perth, Adelaide and Canberra, which are central hubs for retail industry activity and networking.

Meanwhile, overseas trips by this industry are ticking the box for supplier locations and markets of strategic importance. New Zealand has been the top destination this year, followed by China, Hong Kong, and then the United Kingdom, Singapore, the United States and Thailand.

Adam adds retailers are actively pursuing international opportunities and that’s where networking comes in.

Stage and Screen continues to support the retail sector with tailored travel solutions that streamline business journeys, enabling clients to focus on their growth and strategic goals.

Australians and New Zealanders lead the globe in domestic business travel

Wed, 15 Jan 2025 05:05:11 GMT

Australians and New Zealanders travel more for business than almost any other nation, with a global Flight Centre Travel Group (FCTG) survey across its flagship corporate businesses revealing that more than a third of businesses now send employees on at least one work trip a week.

Corporate Traveller , the flagship SME division of FCTG, revealed 37 per cent of ANZ businesses send staff on weekly business trips – a considerable leap from the proportion of businesses in Europe, the Middle East and Africa (23%), Asia (21.7%) and even the Americas (31.8%).

Tom Walley, Australia-based Global Managing Director for Corporate Traveller, says the figures represent a growing shift in how Australians and New Zealanders travel post-COVID, with domestic travel trends in the region shaped by numerous factors including the decentralisation of businesses, surging internal regional migration, [1] and even the regional infrastructure boom. [2]

The survey showed the global average for weekly business trips is almost 32 per cent, with 42 per cent of most companies sending employees on monthly work trips. In comparison, almost half of ANZ companies (44%) send employees on work trips once a month, while only 12 per cent said their staff travel for work once or twice a quarter. A little under seven per cent claim employees travel once or twice a year.

About Corporate Traveller

[1] https://www.abs.gov.au/statistics/people/population/regional-population/latest-release

[2] https://www.investorkit.com.au/blog/3-regions-benefitting-from-the-infrastructure-boom/

[3] https://www.regionalaustralia.org.au/common/Uploaded%20files/Files/Big%20Movers%202023/Big%20Movers%202023.pdf

ENDS

Business travel to the UK is growing – and the new ETA rules won’t change that

Wed, 15 Jan 2025 04:52:21 GMT

With its own data revealing an uplift in business travel to the UK last quarter (July–September 2024), Corporate Traveller , the flagship SME division of Flight Centre Travel Group (FCTG), is urging businesses – particularly those who book their own travel – to be aware of the UK’s new ETA requirement for visa-exempt travellers from 8 January 2025. Corporate Traveller forecasts the new rules are unlikely to make any dent in the travel growth rate to the UK but will require forward planning.

Electronic travel authorisation (ETA) systems are being introduced around the globe, with Australia among the first to introduce it in 1996, followed by the US (2008), Canada (2015) and New Zealand (2019). [1] Next year, the UK and EU will follow suite in a bid to improve border security and streamline entry processes for visa-exempt travellers. ETAs enable authorities to pre-screen inbound travellers against security databases before they arrive, track and trace their movements in and out of the country, ensure compliance with immigration laws, and prevent fraudulent documents through the inclusion of biometric data (with facial recognition included in the UK ETA).

The UK will introduce its Electronic Travel Authorisation (ETA) system on 8 January, with the EU to follow in May 2025. [2] Australian travellers can begin to apply for the ETA to the UK, from 27 November, with the fee set at £10 (AUD$20). Corporate Traveller Global Managing Director Tom Walley says travellers can expect to spend less time at airports, but more time planning beforehand.

Corporate Traveller data shows that the UK has been Australia’s second-largest international business travel destination in 2024, following Singapore.

About Corporate Traveller

[1] Electronic Travel Authorisation: impact assessment (accessible) – GOV.UK

[2] EU Releases One-Year Timeline of ETIAS Launch

ENDS

More affordable airfares are adding to the momentum. Tom says:

Corporate Traveller’s data shows that Australian businesses have been taking slightly shorter, but more frequent international trips. To the UK, the average trip duration has decreased slightly from 19 days in 2023 to 17 days this year.

London Heathrow remains the dominant UK destination for Australian business travellers, with one in five trips departing Sydney and landing in Heathrow, followed by Melbourne-Heathrow at just under one in five trips making up that route, then Brisbane (making up one in 10 trips). After Heathrow, Manchester is the next most popular airport for Australian business arrivals, followed by Gatwick, Bermingham, Edinburgh, Glasgow and Newcastle.

57% of Australians would go abroad for medical procedures amid rising healthcare costs, new survey reveals

Wed, 15 Jan 2025 00:42:18 GMT

Full survey results can be accessed here .

About InsureandGo

This insurance is underwritten by Mitsui Sumitomo Insurance Company Limited (MSI), ABN 49 000 525 637, AFSL 240816. Europ Assistance Australia Pty Ltd, ACN 140 219 594, AFSL 552106, trading as Insure&Go and other brands, holds a binding authority from the insurer, MSI to issue contracts of insurance and to deal with or settle claims on MSI’s behalf and as MSI’s agent. Any advice is general advice only and does not take account of your particular circumstances. Before purchasing, decide whether this product is right for you. Consider the PDS and TMD at InsureandGo.com.au .

65% would seek overseas dental procedures
42% would travel overseas for lifesaving or life-extending cancer treatments
Cost savings motivate 37% of Australians

[1] Medical tourism and insurance – Better Health Channel

[2] Patients Beyond Borders | Media

[3] https://www.betterhealth.vic.gov.au/health/healthyliving/medical-tourism

[4] Medical tourism and insurance – Better Health Channel and https://www.smartraveller.gov.au/before-you-go/health/medical-tourism

[5] Monthly Household Spending Indicator, July 2024 | Australian Bureau of Statistics (abs.gov.au)

[6] https://www.aihw.gov.au/reports-data/myhospitals/sectors/elective-surgery

[7] Medical tourism and insurance – Better Health Channel and Medical tourism (2017) | RACS (surgeons.org)

[8] Medical Treatment Overseas Program | Australian Government Department of Health and Aged Care

[9] https://www.ama.com.au/sites/default/files/2024-04/2024-ama-public-hospital-report-card_0.pdf

What procedures would Aussies travel for?

What drives Australians to risk travelling overseas for medical procedures?

The survey found cost savings are the most popular factor driving medical tourism, with 37 per cent of respondents willing to travel for procedures to save money.

NSW and Victorian respondents are more likely than any other State or Territory to go overseas to save money. Among the cohort that chose this option, 35 per cent are in NSW and 26 per cent in Victoria, to reduce waiting times. NSW has the longest median wait time for planned surgery in Australia, with patients now waiting more than double the time than they did two decades ago. [9]

Nearly a third (32%) of respondents would travel if there was a higher quality of care, while 20 per cent would do it to reduce wait times.

Reviews and recommendations from friends, family and former patients would sway more than a fifth (22%) of respondents, while access to advanced or experimental treatments would drive 14 per cent.

Insure&Go urges caution amid rising trend

Insure&Go spokesperson David Mayo warned Australians to consider carefully why they are going overseas for treatment and what the trip may inevitably cost them.

E NDS

5 energy trends Australia will see in the next two years

Tue, 26 Nov 2024 23:26:01 GMT

About Green

Established as Teho in 2020 by brothers David and Jonathan Green – and rebranded in May 2024 – Green.com.au i s a recognised, award-winning renewable energy provider. Green is helping lead the way in the transition to renewable energy by offering innovative energy solutions to Australian households, ranging from solar panels and solar batteries, heat pumps, and installation of electric vehicle charging solutions. In 2023 the Australian Financial Review recognised Teho as a Fast Starter, taking top position in the Agriculture, Mining and Utilities category, and 15th position overall.

E NDS

[1] Net Zero – DCCEEW

[2] Powering Australia – DCCEEW

[3] Emerging energy technologies

[4] Renewables | energy.gov.au

[5] In 2023 the Australian Financial Review recognised Teho (now rebranded Green.com.au) as a Fast Starter,

taking top position in the Agriculture, Mining and Utilities category, and 15th position overall.

[6] Wind Energy Prospects 2024: Australia’s Green Future (energyaction.com.au)

[7] Offshore wind energy

[8] New offshore wind zone declared in Western Australia | Austrade International

[9] Offshore wind energy

[10] Gippsland, Victoria declared offshore wind area – DCCEEW

[11] As of April 2024. https://cleanenergycouncil.org.au/news-resources/rooftop-solar-generates-over-10-per-

cent-of-australias-electricity

[12] https://www.sunwiz.com.au/battery-market-report-australia-2024/

[13] https://cleanenergycouncil.org.au/news-resources/australia-s-love-of-rooftop-solar-continues-to-ease-energy-costs-on-homes-and-businesses

[14] Six shortlisted for $2 billion Hydrogen Headstart funding – Australian Renewable Energy Agency (ARENA)

[15] Peter Dutton’s energy scheme: Everything you need to know | Climate Council

Dutton, Littleproud, O’Brien – Media Release – Australia’s Energy Future – Peter Dutton MP

The heat is on for Australia to hit its 43 per cent emissions reduction target, with 2025 marking the five-year countdown. Emission projections indicate the nation is on track to hit 42 per cent by 2030. [1] The government is accelerating the process by injecting millions of dollars into regulatory changes, improving consumer access to clean energy [2] and exploring mass energy production options such as wind, solar, hydro, geothermal and bioenergy. [3] So far, 35 per cent of the country’s electricity is generated from solar, wind and hydro sources. [4]

As we head into 2025, Australia’s fastest growing renewable energy provider [5] , Green.com.au , has undertaken thorough research and analysis of consumer and industry trends to forecast what is likely to take off in Australia in the next two years.

Green.com.au CEO and Co-founder David Green identified the following five energy trends set to sweep Australian in 2025 and 2026.

Stringent energy efficiency standards for rentals will expand nationwide. This year, the Victorian Government proposed minimum energy efficiency standards for rental properties, with the aim of improving comfort and living costs for renters and supporting the state’s path to net zero emissions. For October 2025, the new standards would see landlords required to install ceiling insulation, improve door sealings, replace hot water and heating systems with energy-efficient appliances at the end of their lives, install four-star energy efficient shower heads and three-star cooling systems in the main living area. Green.com.au’s own research found that 81 per cent of Australians support Victoria’s move and 61 per cent supported adoption of the same standards across all State Governments and the ACT. See the full study here: https://www.green.com.au/research/renters-and-landlords-divided-on-energy-efficiency-reforms .
Large-scale wind power projects will hit new milestones. This has been a pivotal year for wind energy in Australia, with three significant projects due for completion and advancements in integrating wind energy into our energy grid. [6] It has set the scene for exponential growth in the next few years. The government granted 12 feasibility licences for major projects in Australia’s first declared offshore wind zone in Gippsland’s Bass Strait. [7] Another preliminary feasibility license was granted for the Southern Ocean offshore zone, and applications have opened for the Western Australian Bunbury offshore wind zone. [8] These licences – valid for seven years – are the first of three in the process of building offshore wind farms [9] and the half-way mark to construction and operation. [10] It has taken two years to get to this point so while the next steps will take time we can expect significant progress in the next two years, bringing cheaper, cleaner energy and thousands of jobs closer.
Rooftop solar will continue to boom. A new study from com.au found that 2 in 3 Australian households are willing to outlay $8000-10,000 on rooftop solar and battery systems after expecting, or being lobbed with, energy bills beyond their expectations. The findings point to a potential boom in rooftop solar, which already accounts for 11.3 per cent of Australia’s electricity. [11] A record 57,000 battery or energy storage systems were installed in Australian homes in 2023 – a 21 per cent growth on 2022 [12] – and nearly 30,000 battery units were sold in the first half of 2024. [13] The Green.com.au study found a quarter (24%) of households paid more than $300 per month more in their energy bills this year. Alarmingly, in the same study, 34 per cent said gas and electricity bills are their largest expense – well above the 21 per cent of householders citing food as the biggest cost. The full study is here: https://www.green.com.au/research/is-energy-bill-pressure-swaying-australians-toward-solar .
Hydrogen a step closer to becoming a significant local industry. The Australian Government announced a further $2 billion investment its Hydrogen Headstart program, which supports large-scale renewable hydrogen projects, and aims to accelerate the development of Australia’s hydrogen industry, make connections with new global hydrogen supply chains and set the country up as a renewable energy superpower. With six shortlisted applicants in round one, based on projects that are among some of the largest renewable hydrogen projects in the world, Australia’s reputation in the industry will grow, gain trust and earn respect with continued investment in 2025 and 2026. [14]
Nuclear power debate will ramp up. With a 2025 Federal election looming, and with the Coalition gaining ground in the polls, Australia can expect to see increased debate around nuclear power. Liberal Party leader Peter Dutton has released his plan to build nuclear power plants across the nation, earmarking seven sites where coal power stations have closed or are scheduled to close. If a Liberal-National Coalition wins the next federal election, the nuclear power debate will once again come be at the forefront of Australia’s emission reduction race. [15]

Click Frenzy & Black Friday sales to capture more than half the festive market this year

Tue, 26 Nov 2024 21:37:57 GMT

About CouriersPlease

E NDS

[1] Black Friday sales lift retail turnover in November | Australian Bureau of Statistics (abs.gov.au)

[2] Retail sales fall in December following Black Friday | Australian Bureau of Statistics (abs.gov.au)

[3] Consumer Price Index, Australia, June Quarter 2024 | Australian Bureau of Statistics (abs.gov.au)

35% of online shoppers will do most of their Christmas shopping during Black Friday sales
A further 18% will do most of their shopping during Click Frenzy and Cyber Monday
Almost twice as many under-50s (66%) than over-50s (36%) will shop the sales

The full survey results, including age and State and Territory breakdowns, can be found here .

New research has revealed that the pre-Christmas sales trifecta – Click Frenzy, Black Friday and Cyber Monday – will see 53 per cent of Australian online shoppers bring their holiday spending ahead this year to secure bargain gifts. Black Friday is set to capture a sizable Christmas market share this year, with Aussies holding off spending on either side of the event – in contrast to 2023, when Australia’s retail turnover fell by 0.4 per cent in October before a 2 per cent jump in November [1] and a 2.7 per cent drop in December when the sales ended. [2]

The findings come from Australia’s fastest-growing franchised courier service, CouriersPlease , which commissioned an independent, nationally representative survey of 1007 Australians who shop online to gauge how major sales events, held predominantly in November, are influencing Christmas shopping habits. This year, Click Frenzy is on November 11-15, Black Friday is November 29, and Cyber Monday falls on December 2.

The full survey results, with age and State and Territory breakdowns, can be found here .

How November became the new Christmas shopping season

One in three (35%) of survey respondents said they would do their Christmas shopping early to buy gifts at bargain Black Friday prices. By comparison, 21 per cent of survey respondents said they would hold off until in mid-December, 11 per cent will buy during Click Frenzy and 7 per cent during Cyber Monday.

The survey also revealed that last year more respondents did their Christmas shopping at the last minute, with 40 per cent of respondents making purchases in mid-December.

Black Friday sales twice as popular among under-50s

CouriersPlease found that under-50s are more likely to get their Christmas shopping done during Black Friday sales this year (43% will shop at the sale, compared with 23% of over-50s). Two thirds (66%) of under-50s will buy Christmas gifts across all three sales, compared with just one third (36%) of over-50s.

In contrast, over-50s are more likely to forego Christmas shopping altogether (27% won’t shop at all, compared with 9% of under-50s).

Richard expects the popularity of these pre-Christmas sales is also expected to keep growing as cost-of-living pressures continue. The Consumer Price Index (CPI) rose 3.8 per cent in the 12 months to June 2024 with the most significant increases being in housing, food, clothes and footwear. [3]

Delivery dynasty Anthony Windram: from mum’s helper to parcel powerhouse

Mon, 25 Nov 2024 21:45:12 GMT

About CouriersPlease

E NDS

From his early days making school holiday deliveries alongside his mother to achieving earnings of up to $300,000 annually as a Franchise Partner, Anthony Windram’s journey in the delivery industry is as inspiring as it is lucrative. Today, a successful Franchise Partner, the Hoppers Crossing man has spent the past 33 years working his way up to become a one of the Victorian capital’s top small business operators in the courier sector.

Anthony is one of hundreds of CouriersPlease Franchise Partners across Australia who have built up a lucrative business within the fast-growing franchised courier and parcel delivery industry. Like many successful CouriersPlease entrepreneurs, Anthony has also turned his business into a family venture, involving multiple generations in its operations.

Anthony’s initial exposure to the logistics industry in the ‘80s was significantly influenced by his mother Joan , a CouriersPlease contractor with territory in Moorabbin, Cheltenham and Highett. This early insight saw him quickly recognise the business opportunities and by 1991, he was fully committed working full-time alongside his mother, splitting the territory with her in 1996. Over the years, Anthony has owned five territories, splitting those into seven unique runs to diversify and grow his business interests.

Driven by an entrepreneurial spirit, Anthony has recently expanded operations into strategic growth areas including Hoppers Crossing, Point Cook, Tarneit, Williams Landing and Truganina. One of Anthony’s early territories was in Hoppers Crossing where he teamed up with his wife Denise. The pair then took on franchise territories in Derrimut, Deer Park and Ravenhall, with Denise eventually taking over the team’s western operations.

Now, in a full circle moment, the couple’s son Lachlan – who also started his career by helping his parents during the school holidays – continues the family legacy, trading places with Denise who moved from the delivery van to the AM supervisor position at the CouriersPlease Truganina facility.

The decades-long-run has been lucrative, Anthony says, but he admits it was a journey of dedication that involved hard work and passion.

In sharing his secrets to becoming a successful franchisee, Anthony adds that being well groomed, maintaining a clean van and a good dose of diligence are key ingredients.

As for what a day in the life, Anthony says his routine starts at 5am, arriving at the depot by 6am where he sorts out freight and by 8.30am he’s taking the loaded van out for deliveries. The day then wraps up by 4pm and while a smooth workflow is crucial to keep the franchise machine in motion, Anthony says the company’s community and culture also play a significant role.

Beware the bikes and Bintang: Ultimate insurance guide revealed as thousands of teens prepare for Bali Schoolies

Mon, 25 Nov 2024 00:51:01 GMT

About InsureandGo

As November approaches, thousands of Australian teens will embark on Schoolies trips across the country and world, with over 8000 anticipated to make the trip to Bali. With its stunning beaches, vibrant nightlife, and a wealth of attractions—all at a much lower cost—Bali’s allure for school leavers is undeniable.

In response to the popularity, airlines are increasing services to the Island of the Gods, including low-cost AirAsia which introduced direct flights between Cairns and Denpasar. Similarly, Jetstar has expanded its service, securing 10 new weekly flights to accommodate growing demand.

As young Australians prepare to travel to Bali for Schoolies, the experts at award-winning Australian travel insurance provider Insure&Go caution that proper travel preparations, particularly considering comprehensive insurance, cannot be overstated.

E NDS

To make sure you have a safe and enjoyable trip, Insure&Go provides the 10 essential tips that every Schoolie (and their parents) should know when visiting Bali:

Surf’s up: Bali’s beaches are legendary for surfing, especially in hot spots such as Canggu and Uluwatu. But before you hit the sand, it’s best to check your insurance covers the water sports activity – such as surfing, parasailing or scuba diving – that you’re planning to enjoy. Your policy should provide a table of ‘covered’ and ‘excluded’ sports and activities. If your activity isn’t covered, they might require additional insurance coverage.
Scooter savvy: Renting a scooter is popular but risky. Check your insurance covers this activity, wear a helmet – and if it does, you’ll need to wear a helmet, regardless of the local laws, have the correct international license. If you are using a motorcycle rated 125cc or higher, you should hold a current and valid license for an equivalent-rated motorcycle in Australia. Better yet, hop on a Gojek ride and let an experienced rider navigate the roads.
Party smart: Bali’s nightlife is a lot of fun, including hotspots like Potato Head and KU DE TA in Seminyak, but keep to the mocktails as the legal drinking age in Bali is 21. Remember, underage drinking, or suffering an incident because you were under the influence, can void your insurance claims.
Volcano treks: Bali’s Mount Batur offers sunrise hikes and offroad 4WDing. Ensure your insurance covers these high-altitude adventures.
ATV adventures: Quad biking through Bali’s rugged terrains is a popular activity. Verify that your travel insurance includes coverage for off-road vehicle activities to protect against accidents.
Shop till you drop: Hit up Garlic Lane in Legian or Poppies Lane in Kuta for some great shopping but remain aware of your surroundings. Consider wearing a money belt to keep your valuables secure in busy areas and investigate insurance that covers high-value items for added protection.
Sun smart: It’ll be the wet season for your visit in November and Bali’s temperatures frequently reach 31°C. The heat and high humidity during this time make sunscreen and hydration essential to avoid sunburns, which could spoil your trip also lead to costly medical expenses. Let your insurance company know as soon as possible if you require medical treatment and follow any steps advised for making a claim.
Health precautions : Bali’s tropical climate does increase the risk of contracting mosquito-borne illnesses such as dengue fever. While these critters are most active at dawn and dusk, they are capable of biting at any time of day. Protect yourself by using repellents and check your insurance covers for illnesses contracted abroad.
Monkey business: The Sacred Monkey Forest in Ubud is a fun day trip but be cautious as monkeys are crafty. These primates have been known to snatch bags, sunglasses, phones and cameras. Best to keep your valuables out of sight and have insurance cover in case of loss or theft. It’s important to have proof of ownership, such as photos or receipts, and value of the stolen items.
Lost in paradise: If you happen to lose or misplace important travel documents like your passport, report the loss to the local police and obtain a police report within 72 hours or as soon as reasonably practicable. Then, visit the nearest Australian Consulate-General in Bali, located in Denpasar, to apply for an emergency passport. The Consulate can also provide assistance with replacing other travel documents and offer guidance on what to do next. It’s important to have a copy of your travel insurance policy and the police report when you visit the consulate. If you have purchased the appropriate level of cover, your travel insurance policy can cover the costs of replacing these important documents.

How two young brothers bootstrapped Australia’s fastest-growing green energy start up, now on track to turn over $40M

Wed, 30 Oct 2024 23:40:44 GMT

About Green

E NDS

Jonathan and David Green

Using YouTube to launch their brand and acquire their first customers, Sydney entrepreneurs and brothers Jonathan and David Green have organically turned a small start-up into Australia’s fastest-growing green energy company in just four years. Today, the duo is at the helm of Green.com.au, a company that’s reshaping the renewable energy landscape. After being ranked the Fastest Growing Energy Company in Australia, Green.com.au is on track to turn over $40 million this financial year.

Just five years ago, David and Jonathan were working in sales and managerial roles in the energy and finance industries. Between 2016 and mid-2020, Jonathan, now 27, worked in sales roles for Mojo Power and Natural Solar, as well as National Sales Manager for renewable energy finance at RateSetter (now Plenti). In the 8 years to 2020, David, now 35, worked as manager at Carloans.com.au and car brokerage Georgie.com.au. In 2020, David also launched insurance company Professionalindemnityinsurance.com.au, which he sold in 2022.

The brothers took a leap of faith in 2020, leaving the corporate world to challenge the booming renewable energy market in a turbulent COVID-19 environment. The pair kickstarted their business journey by renting out a small office space in North Sydney to ensure maximum growth and avoid any work-from-home distractions. They founded green-energy company Teho, which installed residential solar panels and batteries.

From day one the duo did everything they could to generate customer enquiries, utilising YouTube to gain momentum and recognition across the industry. Hours spent filming and editing educational videos paid off: when the phone rang, and they received their first lead through YouTube. Every minute of time was treated as critical to the brothers, with no time wasted – even building their own CRM system called ‘Doug’ to provide industry-leading customer service and improve their customer processes.

What really differentiated them from competitors was their dedication and commitment to building meaningful supplier relationships – treating them like employees as opposed to contractors saw a sense of trust build almost immediately. Teho’s revenue jumped from $637,000 in FY2022 to $7.7 million in FY2023 – a growth rate of more than 1000 per cent.

Last year, David and Jonathan rebranded Teho to Green.com.au, paying $75,000 for the URL. In FY2024, Green.com.au reached $12.5 million in turnover. This financial year, the business is forecasted to earn $40 million. Their success has landed David and Jonathan a spot on the stage with Australia’s most talented business masterminds after taking out the top spot in the Australian Financial Review’s Fastest Growing Energy Company in Australia ranking, and spot 15 in the Fast Starters list overall.

In addition to meaningful supplier relationships, the company’s impressive growth is founded on the duo’s recognition of the industry’s service gaps, and filling those gaps. From the first step of installing solar, to optimising investment with storage batteries, and providing an on-going relationship, Green guides customers through every stage of their sustainability journey.

The company’s unique approach to business – including Doug, its custom-built CRM software system, and staffing models which sees the company employ full-time staff over commissioned-based sales roles – has maximised customer satisfaction and long-term outcomes for the company. All Google reviews for Green.com.au are five stars.

To this day, the company has zero business debt and zero capital dilution – the brothers are entirely self-made, which has provided extra accountability. Their success can be credited to their bootstrapping approach, which has seen every dollar of profit reinvested straight back into their business.

From the beginning, the brothers were committed to offering customers only the best brands in the industry. And while Green currently sells and installs solar panels and batteries, it’s what they have planned that’s going to see them really take launch.

The company will be launching its own Virtual Power Plant (VPP) at the end of the year, challenging existing business models across the energy market. Unlike most companies who simply sell one or the other, the brothers will sell the batteries as well as the VPP. Green’s goal is to bring the whole network together and be able to offer customers a better deal than the big gen-tailers out there. The launch of Green’s electricity.com.au will also enable customers to compare energy for free, unlike other energy comparison platforms. With the launch of these two services, David and Jonathan forecast a $40 million revenue this financial year. This outstanding forecasted growth is attributed to increasing headcount across all aspects of the business as well as significant investment in technology and digital assets – which will grow the business as a widely recognised national brand.

New study reveals 2 in 3 households considering rooftop solar after paying thousands more for energy this year

Thu, 24 Oct 2024 23:55:57 GMT

The full study, including breakdowns across property ownership status, ages and States, can be found here: https://www.green.com.au/research/is-energy-bill-pressure-swaying-australians-toward-solar .

E NDS

[1] https://www.sunwiz.com.au/battery-market-report-australia-2024/

[2] https://cleanenergycouncil.org.au/news-resources/australia-s-love-of-rooftop-solar-continues-to-ease-energy-costs-on-homes-and-businesses

[3] As of April 2024. https://cleanenergycouncil.org.au/news-resources/rooftop-solar-generates-over-10-per-cent-of-australias-electricity

[4] In 2023 the Australian Financial Review recognised Teho (now rebranded Green.com.au) as a Fast Starter, taking top position in the Agriculture, Mining and Utilities category, and 15th position overall.

[5] AER releases final determination for 2023–24 Default Market Offer | Australian Energy Regulator (AER)

[6] Making rental homes better to live in (energy.vic.gov.au)

66% of households grappling with winter energy bill blowout
68% are willing to outlay $8000-10,000 on rooftop solar and battery systems to trim future bills

A new study has found that 2 in 3 Australian households are willing to outlay $8000-10,000 on rooftop solar and battery systems after expecting, or being lobbed with, energy bills beyond their expectations.

The findings point to a potential boom in rooftop solar. After a record 57,000 battery or energy storage systems were installed in Australian homes in 2023 – a 21 per cent growth on 2022 [1] – and nearly 30,000 battery units were sold in the first half of 2024, [2] rooftop solar already accounts for 11.3 per cent of Australia’s electricity [3] .

The findings come from a survey of an independent, nationally representative panel of 1000 Australians commissioned by Australia’s fastest-growing renewable energy provider [4] , Green.com.au . The full results of the study can be found here: https://www.green.com.au/research/is-energy-bill-pressure-swaying-australians-toward-solar .

Green.com.au commissioned the survey to gauge the impact of significant energy price rises on household budgets and to understand if the financial pressure was swaying more householders to install solar power. It followed minor reductions in the nation’s 2024-2025 electricity price safety nets, which provided little relief from the 25 per cent household and 28.9 per cent small business price hikes of 2023-2024 [5] .

Energy bills before food

When considering their last energy bill, one quarter (24%) of households say they paid more than $300 per month than the same time last year.

Alarmingly, 34 per cent of householders say gas and electricity bills are their largest expense – well above the 21 per cent of householders citing food as the biggest cost. In NSW and Victoria, 39 per cent and 38 per cent of respondents (respectively) say energy bills take the largest slice of their household budget.

The findings support debate about minimum energy efficiency standards on rental homes, with Victoria set to shake up its minimum standards by 2025 [6] . A recent study by Green found that 81 per cent of Australians support Victoria’s new standards, and 61 per cent would support all state governments adopting the same.

2 in 3 households likely to swing to solar

Householders overwhelmingly supported home solar and battery installations, with 68 per cent saying they are willing to invest $8000-10,000 if they could save $2000 on their annual energy bills.

The greatest support was in South Australia (76%) and the ACT (74%), followed by Queensland (70%). Support was slightly lower in NSW and Western Australia (67%) and Victoria (66%), where the climate is cooler, or the State is unaffected by spikes in electricity prices.

About Green

How Flight Centre Travel Group’s Stage and Screen helped bring Coco Chanel’s legacy to Brisbane ballet fans

Thu, 24 Oct 2024 09:46:30 GMT

ENDS

About Stage and Screen

Australian audiences are craving more immersive experiences that blend different art forms, according to a recent survey by Stage and Screen . The survey of an independent, nationally representative panel of 1,001 Australians over the age of 18 revealed that 42.7 per cent would be more likely to attend a ballet featuring collaborations with pop culture or modern music. Additionally, 17.9 per cent said they would be more inclined to see a ballet featuring costumes designed by a renowned figure like Chanel. While over half (51.5%) indicated a strong love for classic ballet such as Swan Lake. The desire for contemporary themes and stories is growing, especially among younger audiences aged 18-34 years, with 36.3 per cent of respondents expressing interest in these themes.

Answering this call, the rags-to-riches tale of fashion icon Coco Chanel is about to dazzle Brisbane ballet audiences in a one-of-a-kind performance. Coco Chanel: The Life of a Fashion Icon is set to leap across the stage this week at QPAC’s Playhouse Theatre, running from 4–19 October. Co-owned by Queensland Ballet, Hong Kong Ballet, and Atlanta Ballet, the show promises to be a visual and emotional spectacle for both ballet lovers and fashion enthusiasts. Featuring 155 roles played by 50 dancers per performance, it tells the extraordinary story of Chanel’s life, her rise to fame, and her revolutionary influence on the fashion world.

But bringing this sartorial feast to life was no small feat. Flight Centre Travel Group’s Stage and Screen, which specialises in managing travel and logistics for some of the nation’s top entertainment and creative organisations worked behind the scenes to support the seamless travel arrangements involved in bringing the production’s artistic choreographic team to Brisbane enabling Queensland Ballet to bring present this iconic production on the Australian stage.

Working with choreographer Annabelle Lopez Ochoa, Jérôme was able to reflect that same sense of liberation and timeless beauty. Incorporating these designs into a ballet of this scale required meticulous attention to detail. The costumes not only reflect Chanel’s fashion legacy but also help bring her story to life through dance, as audiences follow her rise from humble beginnings to global fame.

In addition to travel arrangements for the internationally based creative team, this production involves intricate logistical arrangements, with hundreds of delicate costume pieces travelling across continents to Brisbane. This includes 512 costume elements, 85 hats, 28 wigs, and 450 shoes—including 150 custom-made black Bloch pointe shoes which must arrive in pristine condition.

Coordinating the transport of these costumes required meticulous planning by Queensland Ballet. The costumes travelled from the United States to Mexico, across the Pacific, and finally arrived in Brisbane with a brief stop in Sydney. This pre-planned journey ensured the costumes were delivered on time, allowing Queensland Ballet’s Costume Department to finalise fittings and make last-minute adjustments ahead of the show.

At the heart of this ballet is celebrated costume designer Jérôme Kaplan, who drew inspiration from Chanel’s minimalist yet groundbreaking style. Kaplan’s designs pay homage to Chanel’s legendary aesthetic, from the famous Chanel No. 5 perfume bottle to her iconic little black dress.

Corporate Traveller reveals the best days to travel over Christmas – and top holiday hacks for 2025

Thu, 24 Oct 2024 05:17:27 GMT

Employees in most states can convert 20 days of leave into 53 days off
ACT and VIC get the best deal, with 56 days off for 20 days’ annual leave (ACT) and 57 days off for 21 days’ annual leave (VIC)
This year’s busiest travel days are expected to be Friday 13 and Friday 20 December
Brisbane is overtaking Sydney for Christmas traffic among corporate travellers

Discover how to leverage national public holidays to extend your annual leave using Corporate Traveller’s holiday planning hacks:

16 days off this Christmas for the price of seven . Transform the Christmas and New Year public holidays into a 16-day getaway by booking just four days of annual from Monday 23 December to Friday 3 January. This will get you more than two weeks off from Saturday 21 December through to Sunday, 5 January 2025.
Get a nine-day break for the price of four this Australia Day . The Australia Day public holiday falls on Monday 27 January to give Aussies a three-day weekend. By dipping into four days of annual leave (from Tuesday 28 January to Friday 31 January) you can get a nine-day break from Saturday 25 January to Sunday 2 February.
Double your Easter break . Good Friday falls on 18 April, Easter Monday is on 21 April and ANZAC Day is on 25 April. This means you can turn seven days of annual leave (from Monday 14 April to Friday 25 April) into a 16-day break spanning Saturday 12 April to Sunday 27 April.
Celebrate the King’s birthday with a nine-day getaway . The King’s Birthday public holiday falls on Monday 6 October in Queensland, Monday 29 September in Western Australia, and Monday 9 June in all other states and territories. By four days of annual leave from the Tuesday to the Friday in the same week, employees can nab a nine-day break.
Enjoy a nine-day break over Labour Day : Similarly, Labour Day falls on a different Monday across six states and the ACT (3 March in WA, 10 March in Victoria, 5 May in Queensland, 6 October in NSW, ACT & SA). You can add four days of annual leave on the Tuesday to the Friday in that same week to get a nine-day holiday, including the weekends.
Wrap up 2025 with a 16-day holiday . For the organised travellers out there, the 2025 Christmas period presents another prime chance to maximise public holidays to turbocharge your annual leave with seven days of annual leave transforming into an extended break. Next year, Christmas Day and Boxing Day fall on Thursday 25 December and Friday 26 December. By taking seven days of leave (Monday 22 December to Wednesday 24 December, Monday 29 December to Tuesday 30 December and Friday, 2 January) you can again nab a 16-day break from Saturday 20 December through to Sunday 4 January 2026.

About Corporate Traveller

[1] https://www.corporatetraveller.com.au/resources/insights/bleisure-travel#:~:text=Did%20you%20know%20that%20globally,to%20know%20about%20bleisure%20travel .

ENDS

Corporate Traveller , the flagship SME division of Flight Centre Travel Group (FCTG), is helping business travellers plan their holidays this Christmas and next year by sharing its best hacks to maximise days off, highlighting the best days to travel, and the most popular destinations. For corporates seeking to maximise opportunities for ‘bleisure’ trips next year, there are a slew of Monday public holidays throughout the year that offer opportunities to extend business trips into mini getaways.

While Sydney is generally Australia’s busiest airport for corporate travellers, advance bookings already show Brisbane overtaking Sydney this Christmas among this traveller segment.

Over the two-week Christmas and January holiday period, Corporate Traveller found that the busiest day for business travellers in 2023-24 was Friday 15 December. This holiday period (2024-25), it’s looking to be Friday 13 and Friday 20 December. Conversely, the quietest days for travel during the two-week period last year (13 December 2023–8 January 2024) were 28-30 December and 3-5 and 8 January. This year, Corporate Traveller expects those dates to be 26-28 December, and 2-4 January.

This Christmas, the most popular international destinations among businesses holidaying are looking to be (in order of ranking): Japan, Canada, Thailand, New Zealand, Singapore, Spain, United Kingdom, Vanuatu.

Who wins and loses across the states and territories?

By crunching the numbers, Corporate Traveller found that Australian employees can more than double their annual leave next year. There are between 8-10 national public holidays in Australia each year, with some states and territories boasting an extra one or two public holidays.

By strategically booking holidays around key public holidays, employees in certain Australian states can come out on top when it comes to maximising their annual leave between this Christmas and next Christmas. Workers in Victoria lead the states: they can turn 21 days of leave into an impressive 57 days off by strategically booking around public holidays. In the ACT, employees can enjoy up to 56 days of total leave, while workers in Western Australia, South Australia, Tasmania, and the Northern Territory can stretch their 20 days of annual leave to 53 days.

Meanwhile, NSW drops to the end of the list: employees can strategically transform their 20 days of leave into 50 days off — fewer than their counterparts in most other states.

More opportunities to leverage national public holidays in 2025 than this year

Savvy employees can ease into 2025 with a 16-day break this Christmas (between 21 December and 6 January 2025) by combining seven days of annual leave with the 25 December, 26 December and 1 January public holidays. And by choosing to fly on either Christmas Eve, Christmas Day or New Year’s Day, employees can avoid the busiest projected flight days, according to Corporate Traveller’s historic booking data.

Beyond January, Corporate Traveller says April is the next prime time workers can nab a long break with strategically booked leave. That’s thanks to three days of Easter and ANZAC public holidays just four days apart. Employees can more than double their leave by taking just seven days of annual leave on 14-17 and 22-24 April, for a 16-day break spanning Saturday 12 to Sunday 27 April.

Tom Walley, Australia-based Global Managing Director for Corporate Traveller, says that 2025 offers better holiday opportunities than 2024, based on where the public holidays fall. He emphasises that with thoughtful planning, these holidays can provide substantial benefits for travellers and businesses alike.

Corporate Travellers hacks on how to maximise State- and Territory-specific public holidays

Some states and territories have additional opportunities to take extended holidays – which is good news for employees who have accumulated more than four weeks of annual leave.

Employees in Brisbane, Western Australia, Tasmania, South Australia and the Northern Territory are gifted one more public holiday than NSW employees, while ACT and Victorian workers enjoy an additional two days’ public holidays – enabling them to maximise their total holiday days to 56 and 57, respectively.

Victorians can take four-day and three-day holidays around Melbourne Cup Day and AFL Grand Final with just one day of annual leave. Lucky Victorians can increase their holidays to 57 days, by taking just 21 days’ annual leave in total. Next year’s Melbourne Cup Day is Tuesday 4 November. By taking one day of leave on Monday 3 November, Victorians can enjoy a four-day break from Saturday 1 November to Tuesday 4 November. While the date is yet to be set, Victorians can also look forward to a Friday off before next year’s AFL Grand Final around October – with no annual leave days required.
ACT employees get 56 days of holiday with just 20 days’ annual leave. ACT employees don’t need to strategically plan any further annual leave to score 56 days of holiday. They get two additional three-day weekends around Canberra Day on Monday 10 March and Reconciliation Day on Monday 2 June.
Brisbane workers can nab a five-day mini break around the Ekka Public Holiday. Brisbane workers can increase their holidays to 55 days with just 22 days’ annual leave. Next year, Brisbane’s Ekka Public Holiday is on Wednesday 13 August. Employees can maximise the day off by taking two days off (from Thursday 14 to Friday 15 August) to get a five-day break from Wednesday 13 to Sunday 17 August.
Get bang for your buck next Western Australia Day. Next year, Western Australia Day falls on Monday 2 June. This extra public holiday enables WA workers to take a three-day weekend – increasing their holidays to 53 days, with no additional annual leave. And by taking four days off (from Tuesday 3 June to Friday 6 June), to secure a nine-day holiday from Saturday 31 May to Sunday 8 June, employees can increase their holidays to 59 days with just 24 days’ annual leave.
Tasmanian workers get an extra-long weekend with no annual leave required. While Tasmania doesn’t observe Labour Day, Tasmanian workers will be gifted two long weekends around Eight Hours Day (Monday 10 March) and the Royal Hobart Regatta (Monday 10 February) or Recreation Day (Monday 3 November). This allows them to take a total of 53 days of holidays with just 20 days of annual leave.
Secure two nine-day breaks around May Day and Picnic Day in the NT. Similarly, the Northern Territory doesn’t observe Labour Day – but the two additional public holidays (May Day on Monday 5 May next year and Picnic Day on Monday 4 August) more than make up for that. By enjoying that additional long weekend, employees increase their holidays to 53 days with just 20 days’ annual leave.
South Australians get an extra long weekend around Adelaide Cup Day. With Adelaide Cup Day falling on Monday 10 March next year, South Australians can enjoy a long weekend – extending their total holidays to 53 days with just 20 days of annual leave.

Insure&Go reveals 6 costly travel insurance mistakes Aussies can’t afford to make

Thu, 24 Oct 2024 00:58:44 GMT

About InsureandGo

This insurance is underwritten by Mitsui Sumitomo Insurance Company Limited (MSI), ABN 49 000 525 637, AFSL 240816. Europ Assistance Australia Pty Ltd, ACN 140 219 594, AFSL 552106, trading as Insure&Go and other brands, holds a binding authority from the insurer, MSI to issue contracts of insurance and to deal with or settle claims on MSI’s behalf and as MSI’s agent. Any advice is general advice only and does not take account of your particular circumstances. Before purchasing, decide whether this product is right for you. Consider the PDS and TMD at InsureandGo.com.au .

International travel is rivalling pre-pandemic levels, as figures show Australians took on average 1.45 international flights per person in the 2024 financial year, and the volume of travellers returning from international trips was 32 per cent higher than in 2022-23. [1] This renewed interest in travel is also led by an increase in discretionary spending on holiday-related services [2] – driven by a substantial 31.7 per cent year-over-year growth in international passenger movements [3] and a 6.0 per cent increase in the domestic market. [4]

Amid this travel resurgence, a leading travel insurance provider is advising Australians to remain cautious around travel risks. Even as more Australians embark on much anticipated holidays, many are still making common yet costly mistakes when purchasing travel insurance, potentially putting their trips—and their wallets—at risk.

E NDS

The experts at award-winning Australian travel insurance provider Insure&Go reveal the top things to consider ensuring you have added peace of mind on your next trip away.

Purchasing travel insurance after departure. Among the most common mistakes that travellers make is purchasing travel insurance after their holiday has already begun. For example, if you purchase insurance after you’ve boarded the plane, some insurance providers may invalidate the policy. Booking your travel insurance early can offer specific protection benefits like cancellation, from the moment you purchase the insurance.
Not declaring pre-existing conditions. Insurance companies often have different waiting periods to exclude pre-existing conditions. For example, if you fail to declare a critical illness such as cancer on your policy, and your policy waiting period has not passed, then you will not be able to claim for any event related to that illness. Always disclose truthfully so you are not refused cover at a time when it could be required most.
Assuming you’re covered for every activity. If you are planning adventurous activities such as skiing, scuba diving or motorcycle riding, they may not be covered under a general policy. Insure&Go recommends considering ahead of your trip any activities you will engage in, and obtaining relevant policy extras if necessary, so you are protected for these activities.
Ignoring the fine print on alcohol consumption. When it comes to accidents or injuries, having alcohol in your system could render your claim null and void by some insurance providers. Though this point is widely misunderstood, understanding the overall implications of drinking while travelling is crucial.
Overlooking trip duration. Travel insurance coverage can vary significantly based on the length of your stay. Insure&Go recommends reviewing policy limits carefully and ensuring your travel dates align with the coverage provided.
Ignoring government travel warnings. Your travel insurance can be invalidated immediately if you travel to a country with ‘Do Not Travel’ advice from SmartTraveller.gov.au. Remain on top of the latest government advice on high-risk countries to ensure you are safe and covered when travelling.

[1] https://www.abs.gov.au/media-centre/media-releases/number-aussies-travelling-overseas-reaches-pre-covid-levels

[2] https://www.abs.gov.au/statistics/economy/finance/monthly-household-spending-indicator/latest-release

[3] https://www.bitre.gov.au/statistics/aviation/international

[4] https://www.bitre.gov.au/statistics/aviation/domestic

Overwhelming support for Victorian energy efficiency laws to expand could see landlord costs increase Australia-wide

Thu, 24 Oct 2024 00:11:34 GMT

E NDS

[1] In 2023 the Australian Financial Review recognised Teho (now rebranded Green.com.au) as a Fast Starter, taking top position in the Agriculture, Mining and Utilities category, and 15th position overall.

[2 https://www.abs.gov.au/media-centre/media-releases/new-home-loans-rose-13-cent-june]

81% Australians support Victoria’s energy-efficient standards for rental properties
Renters show the highest support, with 67% wanting them rolled out nationally
Support for the reforms is especially strong among under-35s, at 91%

Proposed changes to the minimum energy efficiency standards for rental properties could see Victorian landlords hit with increased costs from next year, in a bid to help the state move to net zero emissions. Now, new research has discovered that 81 per cent of Australians support the move, and 61 per cent would support all State Governments adopting the same standards.

The findings were derived from survey of an independent, nationally representative panel of 1006 Australians commissioned by Australia’s fastest-growing renewable energy provider [1] , Green.com.au . Previously named Teho and rebranded to Green.com.au last year, the energy provider landed on the stage with Australia’s most talented business masterminds after taking out the top spot in the Australian Financial Review’s Fastest Growing Energy Company in Australia ranking, and spot 15 in the Fast Starters list overall.

From the survey, Green.com.au sought to find out what proportion of renters, rental providers and owner-occupiers support the reforms in Victoria, and whether they would support other states adopting the same reforms. The full research results can be found here: https://www.green.com.au/research/renters-and-landlords-divided-on-energy-efficiency-reforms

As background, recently the Victorian Government completed public consultation on proposed minimum energy efficiency standards for rental properties, with the aim of improving comfort and living costs for renters, and help navigate Victoria’s path to net zero emissions. The new standards would see landlords required to install ceiling insulation, improve door sealings, replace hot water and heating systems with energy-efficient appliances at the end of their lives, install four-star energy efficient shower heads and three-star cooling systems in the main living area from October 2025. Final standards are expected to be released October 2024.

Landlords least in favour of the standards

Green.com.au found that a staggering 81 per cent of Australians support the measures. While the changes are only set to impact Victoria, there is strong support for them to be implemented nation-wide. Renters show the strongest support, with more than two thirds (67%) in favour of the measures being adopted nationwide, and an additional 25 per cent preferring them to remain within Victoria only. Homeowner occupiers follow this, at 60 per cent for nationwide support and 17 per cent supporting the standards in Victoria only.

Among rental providers, around one third (36%) are in favour of the standards for Victoria and one third (33%) would support them across all other states. Despite increasing cost of living pressures, including high interest and inflation rates, recent reports from the Australian Bureau of Statistics shows investor lending growth continued to outpace the growth of owner-occupiers in June. The value of new investor loans was up by a staggering 30.2 per cent this August compared to a year ago [2] . The number of rental providers is growing across the country and with this comes an increased concern for the legislation and rules which impact them.

When Green.com.au analysed responses across age groups, it found a whopping 93 per cent of under 25s support the measures, with more than half (58%) wanting to see them rolled out nationally. Younger people are also the largest group of renters, with almost half (46%) of those aged between 25-34 years old and 55 per cent of under-25s renting.

These figures indicate that the younger generation are possibly more environmentally conscious than the older demographic, and are also not impacted by the upfront costs associated with implementing the changes.

The older demographics also showed strong support for the measures, with more than three quarters (78%) of respondents between the age of 55-64 supporting the measures. Similarly, 76 per cent of respondents aged 65+ and three quarters (75%) of respondents aged 45-54 years old also agreed with the measures.

About Green

ACT and WA residents most in support of the reforms

Green.com.au found that residents in Australia’s capital are most in favour of the new standards, at 87 per cent. Three quarters (74%) indicated the standards should be implemented nationally. West Australians followed closely behind, with 85 per cent in favour of the measures and nearly two thirds (62%) for the measures going national. Not far behind, 82 per cent of Queenslanders are in favour of the measures and nearly two thirds (62%) would agree with them expanding across the states and territories.

 The full survey results, including breakdowns across property ownership status, ages and States, can be found here : https://www.green.com.au/research/renters-and-landlords-divided-on-energy-efficiency-reforms .

Rugs, hugs and UX love: how a personal touch delivered a new mum an award-winning E-Commerce brand

Mon, 23 Sep 2024 21:57:59 GMT

About CouriersPlease

E NDS

The full survey results, including age and State and Territory breakdowns, can be found here .

A near-obsessive focus on the user experience and cracking the delivery code with the help of a friendly local courier has helped a new mum weave an award-winning and fast-growing baby rug brand – all from her pint-sized Bondi apartment.

Rugabub , a bespoke E-Commerce brand that delivers unique playmats that look like designer rugs to parents across the country, has soared from a pipedream to one of Australia’s top homegrown baby rug startups, thanks to owner Dana Weil’s unique business model. In the first full year of business, Rugabub had a year-on-year turnover of 700,000.

A year later in 2022, this figure had more than doubled, surpassing $1,400,000. Rugabub was also awarded an Australian Good Design Award in 2022, 1st Place and Editor’s Choice in the Baby Accessories Category of the Clean & Conscious Awards 2023, and a 2023 Parent & Baby Award.

Dana says the Rugabub model places user experience (UX) at the heart – an experience she says starts from the moment an order is placed, through to the parcel arriving in top condition on time to the customer’s doorstep. She insists it has not only helped her standout from a crowded baby mat market but has seen the mumpreneur make lifelong friends with some of her customers.

For Dana, the Rugabub journey began in Sydney in 2020 just weeks after COVID-19 led to global shutdowns, with borders closing and everyday life griding to a halt. Spurred to action after her husband lost his job as a helicopter pilot to the pandemic – when their baby was only two months old – the new mum launched the E-Commerce start-up that she says was born from a market gap and the inside scoop on what mums really want.

For Dana, the biggest hurdle to creating the perfect business model quickly became delivery partners, admitting she worked her way through just about every parcel and courier company in the country before finding one that was reliable and aligned with her own business model.

While a top UX experience isn’t necessarily always part of the E-Commerce business model, especially when you have low profit margins like we do – for us it has remained paramount.

CouriersPlease is Australia’s fastest growing franchised courier service and provides shipping solutions for E-Commerce retailers. CEO Richard Thame says being a vital part of an inspiring startup journey like Rugabub’s remains one of the best parts of his job and is fundamentally why the franchise is continuing to expand so exponentially.

Flight Centre Travel Group’s Stage and Screen reveals the gold-medal travel strategies for Australia’s Paris-bound athletes

Mon, 23 Sep 2024 09:55:08 GMT

ENDS

About Stage and Screen

With the Paris Games being this year’s biggest global event – one that requires detailed planning, high-stakes logistics, and seamless coordination – travel managers are the unsung heroes of getting thousands of people there in top form, as well as their equipment and support teams.

Flight Centre Travel Group’s Stage and Screen has been helping Australia’s top swimmers prepare for gold through meticulous travel management and quick problem-solving for their athletes, support teams, equipment and the media.

Stage and Screen has been managing Swimming Australia’s travel since 2020. It has organised travel for the Australian Swimming Championships in April and The Australian Swimming Trials in June. Now, the team is preparing for the Games’ swimming heats, semi-finals and finals, which launch on Saturday, July 27 and conclude on Sunday, August 4.

The 44 Dolphins will make history when they mount the starting blocks at La Defense Arena in Paris, the very city where Frederick Lane helped Australia collect its first swimming Olympic gold medal in 1900. Since then, hundreds of swimmers have followed in his wake to add 221 medals to the Games bank. [1]

This year, Swimming Australia is bringing a star-studded team that includes Ariarne Titmus, Kaylee McKeown and Cam McEvoy, the country’s incredible run looks set to continue with every athlete spending years working towards this moment. [2]

While the Australian Olympic Committee (AOC) is responsible for moving athletes to and from the Games itself, Stage and Screen know well what’s involved in transporting athletes, their support teams, equipment and the media. It’s a vital job that’s meant more than a few lightning-fast pivots and some medal-winning problem-solving skills, alongside the facilitation of flight and hotel bookings. And that’s because in the game of high-stakes logistics and travel management, one false move or one missed flight can spell disaster, says Stage and Screen General Manager, Adam Moon.

For Swimming Australia, minimum disruption to their athletes will indeed be key before the Dolphins take to the blocks, which they say means locking down the preferred venue for staging camps.

Richard McInnes from the Australian Sporting Commission agrees that travel managers are the unsung hero of getting thousands of people to an Olympics in tip top shape, and says later this month, up to 10,500 athletes and support staff will descend on the French capital.

It’s a role in the travel strategy orchestra that Swimming Australia says is crucial to its athletes’ success.

The Dolphins’ top 8 tactics that keeps them ‘race ready’ when travelling:

Pre-flight stretching: Stretching and exercising before a flight to minimise fatigue.
Compression gear: Changing into compression socks or leggings before boarding.
Adaptability: Being adaptable to flight delays and transportation disruptions that are not in their control.
Movement on the plane: Walking a few laps of the cabin every 30 minutes, stretching gently, and being aware of posture. Using pillows or props to support joints.
Resting on the plane: Choosing sleep times to adjust quickly to the destination’s time zone. Using eye masks, noise-cancelling headphones or ear plugs, neck pillows, and minimising light exposure to improve sleep quality.
Adjusting the body clock: Following a post-travel jetlag protocol, establishing a regular nighttime sleep routine on arrival, use short naps wisely, and staying awake during the day with natural light, light activity, and avoiding caffeine in the afternoon and evening.
Food and hydration: Getting into a normal meal pattern on arrival. Using carbohydrate meals to aid nighttime sleep, avoiding stimulants like caffeine after 12pm for the first three days, and not going to bed overhydrated.
Arrival routine: Trying to sleep close to a normal bedtime to adjust to the new time zone. If arriving in the evening, staying out in sunlight and staying awake until bedtime in the new destination.

[1] https://olympics.com/en/news/australia-swimmers-olympics-medal-winners-list

[2] https://www.swimming.org.au/articles/aoc-name-team-of-44-dolphins-for-paris-olympics-including-23-debutants

Flight Centre Travel Group’s Corporate Traveller survey reveals 55% of businesses are increasing offsite events to support flexible work

Mon, 23 Sep 2024 05:38:11 GMT

81% of employees still working in flexible or fully remote arrangements
55% are meeting in person more often – in social, team building or strategy days
78% of these events are held outside of the workplace or even the city

Survey results below:

About Corporate Traveller

[1] Working arrangements, August 2023 | Australian Bureau of Statistics (abs.gov.au)

ENDS

Employers are finding new ways to ensure their teams are working cohesively, in response to the 37 per cent of employed people who regularly work from home. [1] Research from Australia’s leading SME travel management provider has revealed that 81 per cent of businesses still have flexible or remote working arrangements in place, and 55 per cent are bringing their employees together in person more often through social events, team building days, and strategy and development sessions.

The findings come from a survey of an independent, nationally representative panel of 1,001 Australians, commissioned by Corporate Traveller , the flagship SME business of Flight Centre Travel Group (FCTG). Corporate Traveller asked respondents whether their employer was getting teams together more regularly through in-person social events, team building days, and strategy and business development sessions. It also explored whether these events were held close to the workplace or outside of their city.

Corporate Traveller found that 44 per cent of respondents in flexible working arrangements are coming together more often in person. Within this cohort, 17 per cent meet more often with their co-workers for social events. Social events allow team members to relax and interact away from the workplace setting. They can include anything from afternoon drinks and trivia nights to more elaborate parties and award balls.

Another 17 per cent have also been getting together with co-workers in team building days. Employers design such days to help teams bond and to create a culture of collaboration through structured but fun activities. They can include escape room challenges, fundraising activities, games or volunteering activities.

Nine per cent have been attending strategy sessions in person more often. Strategy and business development sessions are about identifying and planning business goals. They can be run by the company itself or by an independent facilitator.

Employers in Victoria are more likely than those in any other state to increase in-person meet-ups. Half (50%) of Victorian respondents said their bosses had organised more in-person team events, compared with 35 per cent of Queenslanders and 46 per cent of New South Wales respondents.

Corporate Traveller also asked respondents if these events are held outside of the workplace or city. Nearly three quarters (72%) of respondents said yes. Specifically, 48 per cent said their face-to-face events are held outside of the workplace. Almost a quarter (23%) said they are held outside the city, where employees need to fly to the location.

This trend is highest in New South Wales, where 78 per cent of respondents said such events are held outside the workplace and even the city, and lowest in South Australia, at 63 per cent and Victoria, at 64 per cent.

Dark web patrols: CouriersPlease reveals how it is keeping customers safe online

Mon, 05 Aug 2024 22:12:00 GMT

About CouriersPlease

E NDS

[1] https://us.norton.com/blog/how-to/what-is-the-dark-web

[2] https://preyproject.com/blog/dark-web-data-breaches#:~:text=Understanding%20Dark%20Web%20Data%20Breaches,the%20dark%20web%20for%20sale.

[3] https://cybercx.com.au/news/australia-one-of-the-top-ten-countries-targeted/

[4] https://www.accc.gov.au/media-release/accc-calls-for-united-front-as-scammers-steal-over-3bn-from-australians

[5] https://www.accc.gov.au/media-release/scam-losses-decline-but-more-work-to-do-as-australians-lose-27-billion

[6] https://www.cyber.gov.au/protect-yourself/securing-your-accounts/passphrases

[7] https://www.cyber.gov.au/protect-yourself/resources-protect-yourself/personal-security-guides/protect-yourself-multi-factor-authentication

[8] https://www.cyber.gov.au/protect-yourself/securing-your-email

[9] https://www.cyber.gov.au/learn-basics/watch-out-threats/types-scams

Delivery giant says monitoring customer data in dark web depths is now key
As text message scams soar, CouriersPlease is moving from SMS to email
Customers urged to update passwords to stay safe

Australia’s fastest growing franchised courier service, CouriersPlease , says the world of cyber security is increasingly descending into the dark web. It’s why a large part of its cyber safety strategy focusses on scanning the dark web for customer data.

The dark web refers to the internet’s hidden sites, services and products. Dark websites use encryption software to allow anonymity. While there are plenty of legitimate activities bubbling above its surface, the dark web remains a cesspool for illegal activity – including drug and weapon sales and stolen data transactions. [1]

Following an unprecedented wave of data breaches last year that saw the dark web marketplace swell with stolen data sales [2] , CouriersPlease, CEO, Richard Thame says many companies have stepped up their dark web monitoring, with the parcel and delivery service’s security team looking at new ways to keep their customers data secure.

Last year, Australia was revealed as one of the world’s top 10 countries targeted by cybercrime [3] , with the Australian Competition and Consumer Commission (ACCC) also reporting Australians lost more than $3 billion to scammers between 2022 and 2023 [4] . While the ACCC announced scam losses declined by 13.1 per cent this year, they warned text messages are the most reported contact method of scammers and resulted in the highest reported losses, at $116 million. [5]

CouriersPlease, Infrastructure and Security Manager, Sajit Sam says phishing websites are another common scam hurting Australians each year.

While CouriersPlease works tirelessly to monitor data breaches, identify fake websites and enhance communication methods to keep its customers safe, there are a few simple ways Australian’s can drastically reduce their chances of being hacked or scammed.

Don’t use the same password on your home and work devices. While strong passwords are frequently touted as a top cyber safety tactic, Sajit says an overwhelming number of the public still use the same passwords across all their devices – including their work and home computers.

In addition, he recommends using ‘passphrases’ instead of passwords. [6]

2. Change your password frequently and make it a strong one. Sajit advises a minimum of 10-plus characters, capitals and characters and he suggests using a password manager application to keep track of them.

3. Secure your accounts with multi-factor authentication. This means using two or more different types of action to verify your identity. The Australian Government’s Cyber Security Centre states this is the best way to add extra layers of protection against cybercriminals. [7]

4. Click on any links with care and caution. Always apply caution when opening any emails and SMS, says Sajit. “The minute you download an attachment or click on an SMS link that belongs to a cybercriminal, you’re opening the door to phishers and scammers,” he warns. [8] The Australian Cyber Security Centre put self-reported losses for business email compromise at around $81.45 million annually.

5. Be on the lookout for scams and use the Government’s ‘ have you been hacked tool ’. Sajit says familiarising yourself with common scams targeting Australians right now (such as phishing emails and texts, remote-access scams and identity theft) [9] is an effective way to stay vigilant. Remember scammers create a sense of urgency, so if you’re being forced to act fast on a text or email, treat it with extreme caution.

Flight Centre’s Corporate Traveller shows 123% spike in early business bookings to the Paris Games – expects 200% growth

Mon, 05 Aug 2024 05:50:53 GMT

[1] https://www.xe.com/currencyconverter (conversion rate as of 17 June 2024)

[2] https://olympics.com/ioc/news/independent-study-reveals-olympic-games-paris-2024-economically-beneficial-for-host-region

[3] https://www.bbc.com/news/world-europe-68018536

[4] https://olympics.com/ioc/news/tokyo-2020-one-year-on-ioc-thanks-the-people-of-tokyo-and-japan

[5] https://www.tiq.qld.gov.au/queensland-business/brisbane-2032

[6] https://www.corporatetraveller.com.au/news/australian-open-bigger-corporate-crowd-puller-afl-melbourne-cup-and-boxing-day-test

About Corporate Traveller

ENDS

Corporate travel bookings to Paris are surging throughout during the Olympic Games period, with data showing Australian businesses are capitalising on the quadrennial event despite the increasing cost of travel.

Corporate Traveller , the flagship SME division of Flight Centre Travel Group (FCTG), revealed flight bookings from Australia to Paris between Monday 22 July and Monday 12 August 2024 are 123 per cent higher than the same time last year – a spike that underscores the Games’ pulling power on the business world. With bookings to Paris still going strong, Corporate Traveller forecasts this growth to climb to 200 per cent.

While the Games will predominately be held in the French capital from Friday 26 July to Sunday 11 August, Corporate Traveller figures also show a rise in flight bookings Rome around those key dates, pointing to a trend among Australian travellers to blend business and leisure. Flights to Rome from Australia are 16 per cent higher from 22 July to 12 August 2024 year on year.

Accor, preparing for the influx, reports that 71 per cent of its hotel rooms in the Games host cities, including Paris, are already booked, with occupancy expected to reach 85 per cent during the event. Among Accor’s 650 hotels across France, a significant number are in Paris and other cities hosting the Games, ensuring a good selection of accommodations is still available for attendees.

The Games are expected to generate between Euro 6.7 and 11.1 billion (AUD $10.86 and $18 billion) [1] in net economic benefits to the Paris region [2] . An estimated 10,500 athletes are set to compete in 329 events with more than 15 million tourists expected to attend over the course of the event. [3] At the 2020 Tokyo Games, by comparison, heavy COVID-19 restrictions meant the event was virtually spectator-free. [4]

Tom Walley, Australia-based Global Managing Director for FCTG’s Corporate Traveller, said the sky-high corporate flight and hotel bookings revealed more than just a swelling appetite for bleisure travel among the nation’s business community.

Tom further attributes the surge in corporate bookings to the nation’s personal vested interest in the Games.

The Brisbane Games are forecast to drive $8.1 billion in benefits for Queensland and $17.61 billion across Australia. [5]

Despite the escalating cost of doing business, Tom says that Australians are increasingly seeing the value in ’bleisure’ travel, alongside a swelling trend of corporate hospitality around major Australian sporting events. [6]

Tom adds that Australians have an insatiable appetite for ‘bleisure’ travel, with recent Corporate Traveller flight figures revealing Aussie business travellers spend almost double the global average of nights away on work trips.

Research reveals big hotels are back in favour of Australian travellers

Mon, 05 Aug 2024 01:08:09 GMT

About InsureandGo

Insure&Go (insureandgo.com.au) is one of Australia’s leading, award-winning online travel insurance specialists. Since it was established in Australia in 2012, Insure&Go has covered more than 2 million Australian travellers. Owned by Europ Assistance, which operates in more than 200 countries, Insure&Go has an expansive, 24/7 global assistance network. Insure&Go Australia has won numerous awards and recommendations for its services including the 2024 WeMoney Award for ‘Best for Seniors’ award, 2023 Canstar award for ‘Outstanding Value – Seniors Travel Insurance’ and ‘Outstanding Value – International Travel Insurance’, 2023 Finder award for ‘Travel Insurance – Domestic. More information about Insure&Go’s awards can be found on its website: https://www.insureandgo.com.au/travel-insurance-awards/ .

Europ Assistance Australia Pty Ltd trading as Insure&Go as an authorised representative AR Number 424825 of the underwriter and insurer Mitsui Sumitomo Insurance Company, Ltd AFSL 240816. Any advice is general advice only and does not take account of your particular circumstances. Before purchasing, decide whether this product is right for you. Consider the PDS and TMD at Insure&Go.com.au.

59% of Australians plan to stay in a hotel on their next trip
Just 24% will choose peer-to-peer accommodation as popularity wanes
2 in 5 Aussies say affordability and reliability are the main accommodation considerations

E NDS

New figures have revealed that Australian travellers are abandoning peer-to-peer (P2P) stays and gravitating back to big hotels – more than travellers in Europe, the United States and Canada.

The research was commissioned by a leading global assistance company, Europ Assistance , the parent company of award-winning Australian travel insurance provider Insure&Go . The findings were derived from the Europ Assistance 2024 Holiday Barometer, an annual global survey of 21,000 respondents from 21 countries, designed to uncover travel trends. Australia was included in the research for the second consecutive year – with a panel of 1,000 respondents from Australia taking part in the survey.

The study provided a range of accommodation options and examined the driving forces behind those choices, including affordability, safety, familiarity, services and amenities, environmentally friendly accommodation and reliability.

The results revealed that almost 6 out of 10 Australian respondents (59%) will now choose a hotel for their next trip, compared with 50 per cent of Europeans and 53 per cent of North American respondents.

On the other end of the spectrum, Australians largely shied away from P2P stays, with just 24 per cent saying they would opt for these types of holiday rents – a figure that was lower than among European respondents (at 31%) and North Americans (at 27%).

Hotels with less than 20 rooms are also an unpopular option – with less than a quarter of all respondents from across the three continents choosing the accommodation type. Just 23 per cent of Australians, 20 per cent of North Americans and 24 per cent of Europeans plan on a small hotel stay.

Just 24 per cent of Australians will opt for free accommodation at a friend or family’s place, and a mere 10 per cent would consider camping or road trips in a campervan.

The Europ Assistance survey results show better bang for the buck and reliability are fuelling the Australian travel accommodation trend, with more than 2 out of 5 Aussies (42%) saying both affordability and reliability drive their trip stay choices.

For Europeans, affordability is less of a concern, at 32 per cent, with reliability ranking even lower on accommodation choices at 28 per cent. For 40 per cent of North Americans, affordability is a factor with just 35 per cent prioritising reliability.

Safety also ranks higher for Australians, with 31 per cent saying they value safe or well-protected accommodation, compared with 19 per cent of Europeans and 28 per cent of North Americans.

The figures emerge amid a backlash against P2P accommodation across the nation [1] , spurred by price hikes and fears such short-term stays have fuelled Australia’s rental crisis. As a result, a short-term stay levy is being introduced, with Victoria being the first State to officially roll out the 7.5 per cent Short Stay Levy. [2]

[1] https://au.finance.yahoo.com/news/airbnb-host-fumes-after-backlash-for-ridiculous-130-per-night-bed-002240636.html?guccounter=1&guce_referrer=aHR0cHM6Ly93d3cuZ29vZ2xlLmNvbS8&guce_referrer_sig=AQAAAGsrETmvVOX1N9PW9rc-6hmKuZc-vpxozZqTYvf94JwvK8CFfqyEIiHmtKw2j1hlT3vcLLWWssWxjmMLrkui5IkKh0lvnPOw68uflUGxElnLm6Q2lG8xzP7aa8SNxIoHv-wqXCQkY0YPyHh-9rnnmE9OZv26DHTbuuld7vjV7caQ

[2] https://www.vic.gov.au/cheaper-housing-closer-where-you-work

In Europe, where there’s far greater population density and a glut of short-stay accommodation on offer Jonathan says travellers may see vacation rentals and apartments more favourably, particularly considering travel distances between tourist sites and cities are typically far shorter.

The full report can be found here .

Brisbane takes lead as nation’s ‘bleisure’ capital, figures from Corporate Traveller reveal

Wed, 24 Jul 2024 06:24:36 GMT

[1] https://beda.brisbane.qld.au/news-and-events/state-of-the-city-launch

[2] https://www.abs.gov.au/statistics/people/population/regional-internal-migration-estimates-provisional/latest-release

[3] https://www.infrastructure.gov.au/infrastructure-transport-vehicles/brisbane-2032-olympic-paralympic-games

ENDS

Queensland’s sun-drenched capital has outstripped Sydney and Melbourne as Australia’s ‘bleisure’ epicentre off the back of soaring economic growth, new data shows.

Corporate Traveller , the flagship SME division of Flight Centre Travel Group (FCTG), today released the figures following exclusive analysis of flight booking data from October 2023 to March 2024, which revealed inbound travellers to Brisbane are now spending an average of 5.2 days, outpacing Sydney’s 4.1, and Melbourne’s 4.6 average days.

Brisbane has even trumped the Gold Coast and Sunshine Coast in the ‘bleisure’ stakes (at 4.5 and 4.6 days respectively), according to a year-on-year (YOY) comparison of business travel booking data collected by

Corporate Traveller, with the city’s buoyed economy a key factor. Brisbane currently has the highest density of innovation hubs per capita with manufacturing exports and growth outpacing the rest of the country. A recent economic report predicted its economy will further soar by 68 per cent over the next 20 years. [1]

The Corporate Traveller analysis further showed that business travellers in Queensland’s critical economic sectors such as mining, oil, and gas made up 17 per cent of bookings in the six months through the end of March, followed by those in the construction sector (16%), health care and social assistance (12%), services (10%), and manufacturing (9%).

Further figures show business bookings have swelled by seven per cent YOY.

With May being Small Business month in Queensland, Tom Walley, Australia-based Global Managing Director for FCTG’s Corporate Traveller, said the numbers reveal a unique opportunity for the city’s SMEs, especially given Brisbane’s ability to captivate visitors for durations that extend well beyond the work week.

Recent data from Corporate Traveller highlights that business travellers are increasingly focusing on maximising value and getting the most out of their ‘bleisure’ trips.

About Corporate Traveller

Flight Centre Travel Group’s Corporate Traveller cautions bleisure travellers amid ATO crackdown

Wed, 24 Jul 2024 06:15:12 GMT

[1] https://www.mgisq.com.au/ato-focus-areas-2024/#:~:text=This%20year%2C%20the%20ATO%20is,lodgment%20right%20the%20first%20time .

[2] https://www.corporatetraveller.com.au/news/bleisure-boom-australian-business-travel-almost-doubles-global-average

[3] https://www.gbta.org/business-travel-industry-anticipates-a-strong-but-challenging-2024-according-to-latest-gbta-poll/

[4] https://www.corporatetraveller.com.au/news/fares-fall-australia-air-travel-returns-pre-covid-capacity

Disclaimer: The advice given in this article is general in nature and not intended to influence readers’ decisions about financial products or specific personal tax considerations. Before making any financial decisions, readers should consider their own circumstances and seek advice from a registered tax agent or qualified financial adviser.

ENDS

As July marks the start of tax season and the Australian Taxation Office (ATO) sharpens focus on work-related expenses [1] , Corporate Traveller , in partnership with financial manager and tax agent Moneywise, is calling for ‘bleisure’ travellers, those who mix business with pleasure, to be extra vigilant during the 2023/2024 tax filing period.

Corporate Traveller, the flagship SME division of Flight Centre Travel Group (FCTG), believes the ATO’s focus will be particularly relevant for bleisure travellers, with flight bookings showing Australian business travellers now spend double the global average time on business trips, averaging six nights compared to the global average of just 3.5. [2]

In addition, Corporate Traveller’s flight bookings for FY24 reveal that January leads the year for bleisure travel, with travellers averaging 7.2 nights away. September follows, with an average of 6.5 nights away across all bookings. July is the third most popular month for bleisure travel, with an average of 6.2 nights away.

To help support Australian bleisure travellers claim the right expenses amid the latest advice from the ATO – particularly that any work-related expense must have a direct connection with the business earning an income – Corporate Traveller and FCTG’s Moneywise offer crucial guidance to business travellers.

A key tip from Moneywise Global General Manager John Tuohy is to hold off filing your taxes until you are fully prepared, otherwise you may risk being audited.

Mr Tuohy said in the area of tax regulations, especially for work travel deductions in the context of bleisure, there were five crucial insights business travellers need to know this year:

Bleisure travel is very popular with Australian travellers, and attending a conference and adding additional sightseeing is a good example of this trend.

1. A holiday is not a work trip and, sadly, it’s not a tax deduction either – but if you’re blending work and leisure, keep a travel diary for those work expenses.

2. Weekend accommodation can be deductible when business extends from Friday to Monday.

John adds that incidental and reasonable travel deductions can include Saturday and Sunday accommodation when necessary for business requirements on a Friday and the following Monday.

3. You can include legitimate client entertainment expenses – but only if the real purpose is business.

Tempted to take your client golfing while enjoying a bleisure trip? You can claim it, says Tuohy, but only if the purpose of the expense is income-generating business related.

4. You can’t claim day travel.

Even if it is interstate, the ATO will not give rise to a tax-deductible claim, he warns. Apart from work-related kilometre deductions in your personal vehicle, Tuohy adds that public transport, parking, tolls, taxi/rideshare, flights, meals and other incidental expenses that aren’t reimbursed by your employer, will only be tax deductible when they are associated with an overnight work trip. Again, he says, most employer arrangements will allow these as reasonable expense claims and you should only be lodging tax deduction claims for specific expenses which have not been reimbursed to you.

5. Don’t double dip on those travel work claims.

Tuohy says most out-of-pocket work expenses will indeed be reimbursed by your employer or the business, so avoid the temptation to ‘double dip’ and potentially attract ATO attention. However, when it comes to daily travel allowances (‘per diems’) and mileage travelled in your own car for work, make sure you do claim for your tax deduction entitlement. Employers will often code these as tax assessable allowances to the ATO and you do need to complete your tax return for actual expenses incurred using travel allowances, and lodge deductions for kilometres travelled for work in your own car.

C orporate Traveller FY2024 flight booking data

About Corporate Traveller

Travel budgets soar: High living costs can’t ground Australians, research reveals

Wed, 24 Jul 2024 01:25:44 GMT

About InsureandGo

Europe Assistance Australia Pty Ltd trading as Insure&Go as an authorised representative AR Number 424825 of the underwriter and insurer Mitsui Sumitomo Insurance Company, Ltd AFSL 240816. Any advice is general advice only and does not take account of your particular circumstances. Before purchasing, decide whether this product is right for you. Consider the PDS and TMD at Insure&Go.com.au.

E NDS

Australian travel budgets increase 35% in 12 months
Aussies now splash twice as much on travel as Europeans
Despite skyrocketing spending, 60% still plan to cut accommodation costs

[1] https://www.abs.gov.au/media-centre/media-releases/household-spending-growth-slows-march-0

[2] As of 17th June 2024, 1 AUD = 0.61 EUR (source: XE)

[3] https://www.rba.gov.au/inflation-overview.html

Australians are spending more than ever on travel, with new figures showing travel budgets in 2024 increased by 35 per cent year-over-year (YOY) to meet rising inflation, despite the cost-of-living crunch.

In a nod to the pulling power of ‘escapism’, the exclusive research has revealed that Australians are refusing to tighten their travel purse strings despite household spending growth slowing in the first quarter of the year, according to the Australian Bureau of Statistics. [1]

The research was derived from a global survey of 21,000 respondents commissioned by leading global assistance company, Europ Assistance , the parent company of award-winning Australian travel insurance provider Insure&Go . The Europ Assistance 2024 Holiday Barometer is an annual global survey that was conducted in 21 countries and is designed to uncover travel trends. The survey also included 1,000 Australians.

Respondents were asked about what factors would play a role in their choice of destination for their next trip – including weather, safety and budget – alongside the size of their travel purse and whether inflation would decrease their purchasing power and force them to adapt their travel plans.

The research found the average Australian travel budget is now AUD$6,145.01 (EUR€3792) [2] , compared with a significantly lower AUD$4,548.79 (EUR€2807)2 revealed in the Europ Assistance 2023 Holiday Barometer – a 35 per cent increase. Additional figures show Australians are now on average spending a whopping 55 per cent more than Europeans (whose budgets this year are AUD$3,963.79 or EUR€2446)2 and 15 per cent more than the budgets of North Americans (AUD$5,321.78 or EUR€3284).2 View the complete survey figures here :

While the figures indicate a love of travel could be inspiring Aussies to meet rising costs, the data shows many are nevertheless adapting their travel spending for their next trip to afford the higher costs of travel – more than their European and North American counterparts. More than a third (36%) of Australian respondents said inflation will impact their travel plans. Specifically, 60 per cent say they will book cheaper accommodation. A slightly lower 58 per cent of Europeans and 57 per cent of North Americans say the same.

More than half (55%) of Australians confess they will take cheaper means of transportation (compared with 47% of Europeans and 45% of North Americans), while 52 per cent will hunt for last-minute deals (higher than the 48% of Europeans and 53% North Americans who say the same). More than 1 in 2 Australians (53%) will reduce their food, visa and activity budgets and 43 per cent say they will select a closer destination to ease the travel budget. Just over 4 out of 10 (41%) will reduce their trip duration.

When it comes to what factors are playing a key role in Australians’ travel destination choices, their budget ranks highest, at 53 per cent, followed by opportunities for leisure or cultural activities, at 51 per cent. The weather has an impact on almost 2 in 5 Aussies (37%), while the quality of onsite tourist infrastructure and travel time also play a role, at 34 per cent and 31 per cent respectively. Australians are less concerned about both personal safety and terrorism than North American and European respondents, with just over a third saying it impacts their choice of destination.

2 in 3 Aussies say ‘I do’ to spending less on weddings and more on honeymoons

Wed, 24 Jul 2024 01:17:36 GMT

About InsureandGo

Insure&Go ( InsureandGo.com.au ) is one of Australia’s award-winning online travel insurance specialists. Since it was established in Australia in 2012, Insure&Go has covered more than 2 million Australian travellers. Owned by Europ Assistance, which operates in more than 200 countries, Insure&Go has an expansive, 24/7 global assistance network. Insure&Go Australia has won numerous awards and recommendations for its services including the 2023 Canstar Award for Outstanding Value for International Travel Insurance and Outstanding Value for Seniors Travel Insurance, 2023 Finder Award for Travel Insurance – Domestic, 2023 WeMoney Award for Best for Value Cruise Travel Insurance, 2023 WeMoney Award for Best for Seniors, 2022 Canstar Award for Outstanding Value for Seniors, and 2020 Feefo Gold Trusted Service Award. More information about Insure&Go’s awards can be found on its website: https://www.insureandgo.com.au/travel-insurance-awards/ .
Europe Assistance Australia Pty Ltd trading as Insure&Go as an authorised representative AR Number 424825 of the underwriter and insurer Mitsui Sumitomo Insurance Company Ltd, ABN 49 000 525 637, AFSL 240816. Any advice is general advice only and does not take account of your particular circumstances. Before purchasing, decide whether this product is right for you. Consider the PDS and TMD at insureandgo.com.au .

E NDS

As cost-of-living pressures continue, new research reveals that 88 per cent of Australians would spend, or wish they’d spent, less on their wedding, with 65 per cent saying they’d rather splash the cash on a bigger and better honeymoon.

The findings were derived from a survey of an independent panel of 1006 Australians [1] commissioned by award-winning travel insurance provider Insure&Go in a bid to discover how inflation has impacted wedding and honeymoon trends. It also comes after a recent Australian Bureau of Statistics dataset revealed an annual cost of living increase of 9 per cent last year [2] .

[1] Respondents had taken at least one travel holiday in 2023/24, including weekends away with paid accommodation, drive holidays, domestic flight holidays, cruises or overseas holidays.

[2] https://www.abs.gov.au/media-centre/media-releases/living-costs-rising-fastest-employee-households#:~:text=Living%20costs%20for%20employee%20households,Bureau%20of%20Statistics%20(ABS) .

[3] https://moneysmart.gov.au/family-and-relationships/getting-married

[4] https://abia.com.au/wedding-blog/how-much-does-a-wedding-cost-in-australia

[5] https://soho.com.au/articles/average-first-home-buyer-age-australia#:~:text=Average%20Age%3A%20Australians%20are%20typically,top%20spot%20at%2038.7%20years .

9 in 10 would, or wish they did, spend less on their wedding

The average Aussie forks out $36,000 for their nuptials, which forces 82 per cent to dip into their savings to cover the bill. [3] Not surprisingly, Australians typically exceed their wedding budget by 18 per cent. [4]

From the survey, Insure&Go found that over-50s are most in favour of ditching an extravagant wedding, with a whopping 90 per cent saying they would or wish they’d paid less for their big day. Within this cohort, four out of ten (41%) say they have spending remorse and wish they’d forked out less for their wedding, while almost half (49%) say if they were to tie the knot, they would keep the cost modest.

The Insure&Go survey also uncovered that the nation’s younger demographics would prefer to spend less on a big-budget wedding in the future, with 58 per cent of under-30s adults in favour of a modest affair when the time comes. By contrast, 44 per cent of 31-50s admit the same, while the result jumps to almost half (49%) of unmarried over-50s saying they’d eschew an extravagant wedding.

However, among those who are already married, it’s Millennials and Gen X who wish they’d reigned in the wedding spend, with 43 per cent confessing they regret not paying less. A slightly lower 41 per cent of older Aussies also suffer spending remorse, while only 26 per cent of those under 30 owned up to the same.

The survey additionally shows the highest proportion of respondents wanting to spend, or wishing they’d spent, less on a wedding are in South Australia, at 91 per cent. Queenslanders are least inclined, at 87 per cent.

2 in 3 Aussies would divert savings to a bigger honeymoon

Rather than pocketing the savings, Insure&Go found that Australians continue to prioritise travel, with younger respondents particularly keen to use the funds saved on a wedding on a better domestic or international honeymoon. Well over three-quarters (84%) of under-30s adults would prefer a bigger and better romantic trip. Half (50%) would prefer to head overseas for their honeymoon.

Australians aged between 31 and 50 are a little less likely to splash on a romantic trip than a one-day celebration of love, with a lower 68.5 per cent saying they’d prefer to fork out for a bigger and better domestic or international honeymoon. Of those, 39 per cent say they’d like to head overseas.

In comparison, 53 per cent of over-50s say the same, with 30 per cent saying they’d rather take a local honeymoon and just 23 per cent preferring to head abroad.

Data from Flight Centre’s Stage and Screen shows mud and money steering young Aussies away from festivals and toward stadium acts

Tue, 11 Jun 2024 10:04:08 GMT

ENDS

89% of young Australians said multiple reasons are deterring them from music festivals
31% would rather see a headline act in a city stadium
Flight bookings to Swift’s concerts grew 88-89%, while bookings to the last Splendour in the Grass grew 49% and this year’s BluesFest 1.6%

The shift away from festivals in their current form extends beyond Australia’s shores. The United States’s iconic Burning Man festival – where tickets cost between USD$575-2750 – witnessed a colossal popularity dip last year, with punters putting the shift down to cost-of-living strain and burnout. [7]

[1] https://bigredbash.com.au/home/#:~:text=Every%20July%2C%20Birdsville’s%20iconic%20Big,music%20festival%20on%20the%20planet .

[2] https://splendourinthegrass.com/

[3] https://splendourinthegrass.com/tickets/3-day/

[4] https://edition.cnn.com/2022/07/22/australia/australia-splendour-in-the-grass-byron-bay-festival-mud-intl-hnk/index.html

[5] https://www.forbes.com/sites/conormurray/2023/12/08/taylor-swifts-eras-tour-is-first-in-history-to-gross-over-1-billion-report-says/?sh=1698f1bc66c4

[6] https://festival-insider.com/only-half-of-australias-festivals-profitable-says-new-report/?utm_content=buffer32f37&utm_medium=social&utm_source=linkedin.com&utm_campaign=buffer

[7] https://sfstandard.com/2023/08/17/burning-man-tickets-easy-get-financial-stress/

In a seismic ‘Swift’ shift of Australia’s music scene, new figures have revealed soaring costs, logistics and the threat of rain are leading young adults to swap the once-hallowed festival grounds for big overseas acts like P!NK and Taylor Swift.
The insights are derived from exclusive survey and travel booking data commissioned by Stage and Screen – the nation’s leading specialist travel management provider for the sports, entertainment and creative industries and a division of Flight Centre Travel Group (FCTG).

The survey of an independent panel of 1000 18 to 35-year-old Australians revealed the once revered festivals are fast losing their lustre, with a whopping 89 per cent citing multiple reasons deterring them such events.

Almost a third (31%) of respondents now prefer a headline act, such as Taylor Swift and P!NK, in a city stadium to festivals that are increasingly costly and can fast become a mud-bath.

Two thirds (66%) cited ticket prices as a major deterrent. More than one third (35%) are put off by the sheer logistical challenges of getting to festival locations as well as the general ‘festival atmosphere’. Multiple-day festivals across the nation are typically held in regional locations for space considerations, with some held as far out as the Simpson Desert in Queensland, [1] which Adam speculates is now a tick in the wrong column for cash-strapped youth.

One third of 18-35s (33%) additionally want to avoid exposure to bad weather, with festivals generally having limited available shelter. Over half (58%) of female respondents cited safety concerns.

It comes just weeks after Byron Bay’s iconic Splendour in the Grass announced the 2024 event had been cancelled, with poor ticket sales a key reason. [2] A three-day Splendour pass cost $399 plus fees [3] . The Byron Bay event also made international headlines for all the wrong reasons two years ago when heavy rain turned the grounds into a hazardous mud pit [4] .

In conjunction with the survey, Stage and Screen analysed Flight Centre bookings to the Taylor Swift Eras Tour concerts in February. It discovered an 88 per cent increase in fare sales to Sydney around the concert dates (23-26 February) compared with the week prior. Flight bookings to Melbourne around Swift’s concert dates there (16-18 February) increased by 89 per cent on the week prior.

In comparison, Splendour in the Grass and BluesFest witnessed far lower flight booking volumes to their events. Flight bookings to Byron Bay’s Splendour in the Grass last year (specifically from 21-23 July) were 49 per cent higher than the week prior. Stage and Screen also compared flight volumes from to Byron Bay’s BluesFest this year (specifically 28 March to 1 April), and saw a mere 1.6 per cent increase in bookings on the week prior.

Stage and Screen General Manager Adam Moon believes the combined survey and flight data paints a compelling picture of a major music culture shift across the country, with rising costs, the elements and logistics fuelling the trend.

Swift’s Eras Tour was the first in history to gross over $1 billion USD, Pollstar figures showed. [5]

Airline CEO to reveal the future of regional aviation at Corporate Traveller event

Tue, 11 Jun 2024 09:01:52 GMT

ENDS

About Corporate Traveller

A leading voice in regional aviation, Nexus Airlines , Managing Director, Michael McConachy will call for the establishment of FIFO hubs in Broome and Geraldton to bolster Western Australia’s resource sector connectivity, at a business event.

Addressing industry leaders at the Corporate Traveller Unpacked Perth conference on Thursday, 16 May 2024, at Crown Perth, Michael will discuss the critical role these towns play in supporting efficient travel to the Pilbara. By advocating for the creation of these strategic hubs, Nexus Airlines seeks to illustrate the potential for enhanced regional development and improved transit solutions for FIFO workers.

Corporate Traveller , the flagship SME division of Flight Centre Travel Group (FCTG), is rolling out its Unpacked roadshow in Perth to connect industry leaders, travel agents, and general business managers enabling them to gain business insights from top speakers and experts.

Michael, who is also a board member of the Regional Aviation Association of Australia, will chart the pioneering journey of Nexus Airlines, Western Australia’s regional airline that launched in May 2023, and its transformative impact on regional connectivity. Starting with his career move to Kununurra and leading up to the airline’s current operations, he will discuss the development of critical Regular Public Transport (RPT) routes through Aviair and the strategic evolution leading to Nexus’ inception.

Tickets are still available to attend this session. Register online at: https://www.corporatetraveller.com.au/events-hub .

About Corporate Traveller Unpacked: Corporate Traveller’s Unpacked , offers customers travel insights and hacks through webinars and in-person events; and its regular market research uncovers business travel behaviours and needs to help businesses make informed decisions around travel, meetings and events.

Economic impact and regional development

Michael will discuss the creation of FIFO hubs in Broome and Geraldton and how airlines currently support over 8,500 daily passenger movements into the Pilbara—equivalent to the population of a small city flying every day. These FIFO hubs will significantly reduce transit times and costs, offering a direct economic benefit to the resources sector and regional communities.

Sustainable aviation practices

In alignment with global trends towards sustainability, Michael will discuss Nexus’ choice in aircraft selection that reduces carbon emissions and the airline’s views on sustainable aviation fuels.

Championing remote connectivity

A passionate advocate for remote community services, Michael will outline current and planned expansions in air services that enhance accessibility to some of Australia’s most isolated regions. He will provide statistics on passenger growth on these routes, demonstrating Nexus’ role in not just serving but also expanding the market.

This session is pivotal for those keen on understanding the nuances of aviation’s regional and environmental advancements. Michael’s insights will provide a deeper look into how Nexus Airlines is not only responding to current industry challenges but also shaping the future of regional aviation in Australia.

Sarah Ewenson | 0409 079 559 | sewenson@theideassuite.com.au

Former Facebook CEO calls for ‘ethical AI’ focus at Corporate Traveller event roadshow

Tue, 11 Jun 2024 08:33:26 GMT

[1] https://www.minister.industry.gov.au/ministers/husic/media-releases/supporting-australian-businesses-adopt-ai

ENDS

Global tech exec and AI expert Stephen Scheeler addresses big ethical questions at Flight Centre Travel Group’s Corporate Traveller ‘Unpacked’ event roadshow
Says gap remains in readiness for full-scale AI implementation across companies
Urges for policy initiatives to ensure a smooth workforce transition.

Corporate Traveller’s Unpacked series offers customers travel insights and hacks through webinars and in-person events; and its regular market research uncovers business travel behaviours and needs to help businesses make informed decisions around travel, meetings and events.

About Corporate Traveller

Stephen Scheeler, former CEO for Australia and New Zealand at Facebook and co-founder of a leading AI company, will call for a fresh look into ethical AI practices while headlining a national Australian business event roadshow.

Speaking at Corporate Traveller’s Unpacked event roadshow in Adelaide, Stephen, now CEO of Omniscient, will explore the current state of AI, unveiling its evolving landscape and potential in front of an audience of businesses and travel industry leaders. This comes just months after the Federal Government initiated a $17 million AI program to bolster Australian businesses [1] .

Corporate Traveller , the flagship SME division of Flight Centre Travel Group (FCTG), is rolling out its Unpacked event roadshow with Stephen as keynote speaker from 15-29 May across Sydney, Adelaide, Brisbane, and Melbourne.

The event connects industry leaders, travel agents, and businesses that travel to gain corporate insights from leading speakers and experts – with this specific series focusing on value-add and savings for Corporate Traveller customers.

During his exclusive presentation, Stephen will reveal that AI currently falls well short of alignment with human values on standardised ethical scores. He will then go on to say that while AI promises significant advancements in business travel, the ongoing debate about its ability to augment or replace human roles must persist.

Stephen will call for a stronger focus on ethical AI research to bridge existing gaps, stressing that the business travel sector must adhere to ethical standards when integrating new technologies. He points out that 26 per cent of customer contact automation is now managed by AI, though moral alignment remains inconsistent.

He also discussed research from Ipsos showing that 57 per cent of people globally believe AI will alter their job roles within five years, with 36 per cent fearing job replacement by AI in the same period.

Despite these statistics, Stephen believes AI holds boundless potential to enhance employee productivity through task automation, improved workflows, better communication, and innovation.

Tom Walley, Managing Director at Corporate Traveller, also advocated for responsible AI integration, highlighting the company’s success in augmenting concierge services without replacing human travel consultants.

Stephen Scheeler will speak at Corporate Traveller’s Unpacked event roadshow on 21 May in Melbourne, 22 May in Sydney and 29 May in Brisbane.

No price too high: the two biggest reasons that will keep Aussies heading overseas, despite high airfares

Tue, 11 Jun 2024 01:35:07 GMT

About InsureandGo

Europe Assistance Australia Pty Ltd trading as Insure&Go as an authorised representative AR Number 424825 of the underwriter and insurer Mitsui Sumitomo Insurance Company Ltd, ABN 49 000 525 637, AFSL 240816. Any advice is general advice only and does not take account of your particular circumstances. Before purchasing, decide whether this product is right for you. Consider the PDS and TMD at insureandgo.com.au .

E NDS

[1] Respondents had taken at least one travel holiday in 2023/24, including weekends away with paid accommodation, drive holidays, domestic flight holidays, cruises or overseas holidays.

[2] https://aci.aero/2023/09/27/latest-air-travel-outlook-reveals-2024-to-be-a-milestone-for-global-passenger-traffic/

[3] https://www.abs.gov.au/media-centre/media-releases/living-costs-rising-fastest-employee-households

[4] https://www.roymorgan.com/findings/millennials-plan-to-travel-more-than-other-australians

New research has revealed the trips that Aussies won’t cancel despite sky-high airfares, with three-quarters (74%) saying they would still attend the wedding of a family or friend and four in five (80%) a family funeral. Nine in ten (92%) would compromise on the timing or convenience of their flights to nab a cheaper fare.

The findings were derived from a survey of an independent panel of 1006 Australians [1] commissioned by award-winning travel insurance provider Insure&Go to glean the impact of high international airfares. The survey asked respondents which overseas trips they would postpone until airfares came down to pre-pandemic levels, listing occasions and events such as family and friends’ weddings, funerals, summer holidays in Europe, beach Christmas trips, and winter ski holidays.

While global fares are predicted to drop this year amid increased airport traffic and the reopening of the Chinese market [2] , international airfares remain higher. Despite the hikes, the survey shows Australians are still happy to foot the bill for some international travel.

Top reasons Aussies won’t cancel their travel

It’s not just family weddings and funerals that the majority of Aussies would fly to while fares are still high. The survey reveals people value a friend’s wedding almost as much as that of a family member, with a whopping 70 per cent saying they would take an international flight to watch their mates say: ‘I do’.

When it comes to celebrating major calendar events with overseas family such as Christmas, two-thirds say they will still make the yearly visit to family, travel for major family calendar events and take an overseas winter ski trip (at 64%, 66% and 65% respectively).

Aussies are a bit happier to soak up our own summer sun, the survey shows, with a slightly lower 61 per cent saying they’d still take that overseas Christmas holiday and 62 per cent saying the same for a summer holiday in Europe.

Across age groups, under-30s adults are least likely to cancel a trip amid high international fares – indicating travel is a major priority for Gen-Z. An incredible 83 per cent of this cohort say they wouldn’t miss an overseas funeral, compared with just over three-quarters (77%) of Aussies aged between 31 and 50. In fact, Millennials and Gen-X are among the most likely to ditch a trip for the sake of their hip pocket as a potential result of higher living cost.

Insure&Go Chief Commercial Officer Jonathan Etkind says children and mortgages have always had a profound impact on traveller demographics – with Australians juggling families and interest rate hikes most likely to eschew a costly trip right now.

According to the Insure&Go report, 31–50-year-olds are the happiest age group to forgo a Christmas overseas holiday to Bali or Fiji, with just six out of ten (58%) saying they’d still go despite high airfares.

Just over half (59%) of respondents aged 31-50 also say they’d still take a European summer holiday and 57 per cent say they’d still go overseas for an annual family visit. In comparison, 69 per cent of over-50s say they’d still go overseas for an annual family visit.

Only 27 per cent of respondents aged 18-30 say they’d avoid overseas winter ski trips in the face of increased fares, compared with 37 per cent of respondents aged over 31.

The top tactics Aussies will use to nab low airfares

The survey further asked respondents whether they would compromise on any aspect of their trips or flights to save on travel costs. A whopping 92 per cent of respondents would.

More than half (57%) would travel outside of school holidays. Half (49%) would choose a low season or an inconvenient departure time (such as 6am). Just less than half (48%) would book 6-12 months in advance to nab an affordable airfare.

Despite embracing these budget-friendly tactics, comfort is still key, with a whopping 74 per cent not willing to book a multi-stopover flight to nab an affordable fare, and only 13 per cent willing to stay in hostels, cheap stays or accommodation far from tourist hotspots to curb costs. Just 41 per cent would opt for a low-cost carrier.

Less than one in ten (8%) of all travellers say they wouldn’t make any compromises at all.

Under-30s travellers are the least likely cohort to book in advance to save money, with just 38 per cent saying they would do so, compared with 53 per cent of over-50s. However, both under-30s and over-50s are most likely to travel off-season (at 50%) and Boomers are the demographic happiest to travel outside of school holidays or at an inconvenient departure time, at 64 and 57 per cent respectively.

Record Corporate Crowds at Australian Grand Prix Despite Rising Costs

Wed, 22 May 2024 09:13:31 GMT

[1] 2024 Australian Grand Prix race day tickets sell out in two hours (raceweek.com.au)

[2] https://www.rba.gov.au/publications/fsr/2023/oct/pdf/02-household-business-finances-in-australia.pdf

[3] https://www.rba.gov.au/publications/fsr/2023/oct/pdf/02-household-business-finances-in-australia.pdf

[4] https://creditorwatch.com.au/blog/business-conditions-ease-further-maintaining-a-slow-downward-trend/

[5] https://www.cosboa.org.au/post/resilience-amidst-challenges-cosboa-and-square-release-2023-small-business-data-report

[6] Red Bull Energy Station | FORMULA 1 ROLEX AUSTRALIAN GRAND PRIX 2024

[7] The Park | FORMULA 1 ROLEX AUSTRALIAN GRAND PRIX 2024

[8] Record Melbourne crowds attend chaotic 2023 Formula One Australian Grand Prix – Drive

[9] 2024 Formula One Australian Grand Prix race day tickets sold out – Drive

ENDS

Australian Grand Prix pulls record corporate crowds despite escalating cost of business
Corporate travel bookings to the Australian Grand Prix are up 146% on last year.
Domestic corporate bookings account for 90%, with Canberra bookings jumping by a massive 300% on last year.
Corporates are paying up to $4595 per ticket to host clients for a single day.

About Corporate Traveller

Despite the soaring cost of operating a business, corporates are still finding the cash to splash out on Grand Prix tickets in record numbers. Corporate hospitality experiences costing $1550 to $4595 per person for the main race day only, or up to $6550 per person for two to three-day passes were almost sold out two weeks in advance, while air travel data showed a 146 per cent jump in bookings around the four-day event compared with last year. General admission sold out within two hours [1] . The figures demonstrate the value of investing in major events as a way of retaining key business connections and developing new relationships, even in uncertain economic conditions.

The findings were released by Corporate Traveller , the flagship SME division of Flight Centre Travel Group. The Australian Grand Prix is held annually in Melbourne over four days at Albert Park Lake. This year, it’s on from Thursday, 21 March to Sunday, 24 March. Corporate Traveller compared corporate inbound and outbound flight bookings from 20-25 March to capture travel to the four-day event. It found the Thursday is the busiest day, with 25 per cent of all bookings scheduled for this day.

Networking and marketing a priority

With the focus firmly on networking and brand exposure, corporate bookings between 20-25 March this year were up 146 per cent on bookings for the six days before, during and after the 2023 Grand Prix (29 March to 3 April). Of those, only 9 per cent were international and 91 per cent were local. Of local bookings in 2024 compared with 2023, Canberra jumped by 300 per cent, Adelaide by 226 per cent, Brisbane by 191 per cent, Perth by 177 per cent, and Sydney by 194 per cent. Sydneysiders made up 36 per cent of all bookings.

Corporate travellers have a variety of exclusive events to choose from, and none of them come cheap. The Grand Prix offers a choice of 19 exclusive experiences, including a three-day Red Bull Energy Station experience at the top price of $6550 per person. The Red Bull Energy Station is held in a two-storey facility with views of the pit exit and main straight. The experience includes dining, drinks, DJs, entertainment and appearances from the Red Bull racing team [6] .

The least expensive three-day experience was The Park at $2195 per ticket, including dining, DJs and an outdoor viewing deck [7] .

Businesses under financial pressure

Over the past two years, businesses have been hit by much of the same financial pressures as Australian households [2] with multiple interest rate rises and increases in the cost of fuel and materials. Cautious consumers and efforts to retain staff in a competitive environment of skills shortages have added to the pressure. Increasingly, businesses facing profitability challenges are drawing down on cash buffers to support their operations or service debts [3] , with the failure rate of businesses is expected to rise from 4.2 per cent to 5.8 per cent of all businesses by November this year [4] .

Amid the widespread downturn, the travel, hospitality, and entertainment sectors might outperform other sectors in 2024. With food and drink, entertainment, and travel and experiences noted as categories where individuals are most inclined to increase their spending. [5]

Crowd-breaking records and a stellar line-up

In 2023, 444,631 people attended the Grand Prix over four days, a record attendance for Melbourne [8] . Higher numbers are expected to flock to the Albert Park Lake circuit this year with race-day tickets selling out in a couple of hours [9] . The Albert Park circuit can hold an estimated 125,000 people per day, including 44,000 seated.

Luxury Australian Publisher Launches Prestige Property Title in Middle East

Mon, 20 May 2024 23:15:44 GMT

About Kanebridge

Kanebridge group of companies was established by Marwan Rahme in 1999. Kanebridge Ltd offers a full suite of property, growth, media, and wealth solutions. Kanebridge Ltd includes Kanebridge Finance, Kanebridge Wealth Advisory, Kanebridge Property and Kanebridge Media. Kanebridge Media Pty Ltd A CN 611 370 846

E NDS

[1] https://stv.vc/insights/en

[2] https://www.oxfordeconomics.com/resource/the-long-term-outlook-for-middle-eastern-cities/

In a landmark move, Australian luxury publisher Kanebridge Media is expanding into the Middle East, launching a quarterly magazine for investors and property developers in one of the globe’s most dynamic business landscapes.

Launching on 6 May, Kanebridge Quarterly Middle East (ME) – pictured right – is positioned to become the region’s leading go-to reference on property, finance and lifestyle news both locally and internationally. Anticipating a print run of 50,000 by July, the title will speak to an educated, engaged readership active in the market. With a unique blend of beautiful design and truly useful information, it is the perfect companion publication for people on the way up, including professionals, frequent flyers, and other high net worth individuals.

In Australia, Kanebridge Media publishes luxury titles Robb Report Australia & New Zealand , Kanebridge Quarterly magazine and (kanebridgenews.com), which have a combined reach of 120,000 readers. Kanebridge Media has a robust partnership with Dow Jones brands The Wall Street Journal, Mansion Global, Barron’s and Penta.

Kanebridge Quarterly ME will be the Sydney-based publisher’s first print foray into the business-rich region, after recently launching Kanebridge News Middle East ( https://kanebridgenewsme.com/ ).

Robb Report ANZ edition was launched in 2016 and is published under license from Penske Media Corporation. Robb Report ANZ is considered the authoritative luxury title in its market. Kanebridge Quarterly magazine launched in 2022, and focuses on local real estate, personal finance, building and design, while kanebridgenews.com provides daily updates on local property and finance news. In addition to its Australian news content, all titles include paywall-free news from The Wall Street Journal, Penta, Mansion Global and Barron’s through Kanebridge Media’s commercial partner, Dow Jones.

The Middle Eastern marketplace, and particularly the United Arab Emirates, Saudi Arabia and Qatar, has been earmarked by economists as a strong region for businesses looking to expand. The region has a high youth population, at around 28 per cent, with strong digital adoption. Some countries, such the UAE, offer high incomes, an abundance of entrepreneurship supported by government and a strong expat population. The Middle Eastern region experienced a breakthrough in its venture capital sector in 2018 following an influx in tech investors, which led to the funding of more than 2000 startups over the past five years [1] .

Recent research briefings have further revealed that key Middle Eastern cities are forecast to clock some of the fastest rates of employment and population growth moving forward, with Gross Domestic Product growth expected to average 1.9 per cent between 2024 and 2050. [2]

Kanebridge ME was launched by Marwan Rahme, Kanebridge Ltd Managing Director, Rony Chiha, Founder and Director of Born Creators – a group of digital and communications agencies – and Jihad Geagea, Riyadh-based CEO of PFC international. The magazine will hit newsstands across from Egypt to the United Arab Emirates, Jordan, Kuwait, Qatar, Saudi Arabia, Bahrain.

Mr Rahme a long-time advocate for luxury print publications – says the recent expansion marks a significant step in transforming the way readers engage with investment, property, and lifestyle topics in the burgeoning Middle Eastern region.

While Kanebridge ME is the media house’s first print magazine in the region, it is no stranger to delivering breaking news across the region, with the publication designed to complement Kanebridgenewsme.com which launched at the start of the year. The online platform serves up daily insights and updates on regional and international topics across property, finance and luxury lifestyle trends.

Tallawong apartments with coveted LDI hit the market

Mon, 20 May 2024 23:00:18 GMT

About KDMC

KDMC is a leading Australian provider of property development, management, and capital services. KDMC was one of the first developers to identify Sydney’s North West as a potential for future growth back in 2009, and among the first to make applications to the Blacktown City Council for high-density residential projects in the area.

E NDS

[1] https://www.domain.com.au/research/house-price-report/december-2023/

[2] https://www.nsw.gov.au/housing-and-construction/strata/ten-year-defect-insurance-for-apartment-buildings

[3] https://www.abs.gov.au/statistics/people/population/regional-population/latest-release#:~:text=Greater%20Sydney%20increased%20by%2037%2C300,both%20up%20by%204%2C200%20people

[4] https://newsroom.unsw.edu.au/news/business-law/when-good-time-purchase-your-first-home-australia#:~:text=In%202023%2C%20housing%20affordability%20declined,report%20by%20ANZ%20and%20CoreLogic.

With limited availability, KMDC recommends attendees on the day RSVP by providing contact details here https://ophora.com.au/contact/ .

Dr Andrew Wilson said Sydney’s apartment market recorded solid price growth over 2023, driven by clear value opportunities for local buyers, rising investment returns, surging first home buyers and record immigration.

KMDC launches sales on 17 February
‘Ophora’ will offer Sydney’s most affordable apartments with Latent Defects Insurance
Starting prices are almost half of Sydney’s median unit price.

The first-ever apartment building in Blacktown City Council with a 10-year Latent Defects Insurance (LDI) and one of Sydney’s most affordable apartment buildings – will officially hit the market this month.

First-release apartments will be available to market at an inaugural open day for a boutique Tallawong development on 17 February, offering buyers a rare selection of affordable abodes for up to 45 per cent less than the citywide unit median of $795,994 [1] .

Ophora , a chic residential development that’s currently under construction through prominent Sydney developer KDMC, is due for completion this year and will boast one-bedroom apartments from $475,000, two-bedroom units from $625,000, and three-bedroom homes from $745,000. The complex, which sits just two kilometres from the new Tallawong Metro Station and Schofields Train Station, and a two-minute walk from a bus station, is also one of Sydney’s most affordable apartment complexes to offer the coveted 10-year Latent Defects Insurance (LDI). LDI is a post-completion policy covering all structural elements of the building [2] .

The Information day coincides with the display suite launch and will offer buyers an insight into Ophora’s rich list of features that span rooftop terraces and barbecue spaces, contemporary styling, lush gardens, ducted air-conditioning, high-speed fibre internet and EV charging stations.

Due to high interest, buyers are recommended to RSVP to ensure they don’t miss out.

The event will feature presentations from LDI insurer SHC Insurance Brokers, Strata Defect Specialist Services, the Developer, KDMC and acclaimed Chief Economist at My Housing Market, Dr Andrew Wilson.

KDMC Development Manager, Ronnie Rahme, said the sales launch offers a chance for buyers to get a foot on the property ladder in a stunning complex close to key amenities and in an area identified by the Australian Bureau of Statistics as one of the capital’s fastest growing regions [3] .

The top suburbs & states forecasted to drive online shopping by year-end

Mon, 20 May 2024 22:41:45 GMT

About CouriersPlease

E NDS

[1] https://www.abs.gov.au/media-centre/media-releases/capital-cities-approach-pre-pandemic-population-growth

[2] https://www.abs.gov.au/census/find-census-data/quickstats/2016/SSC20223#:~:text=In%20the%202016%20Census%2C%20there,up%200.4%25%20of%20the%20population.&text=The%20median%20age%20of%20people%20in%20Berwick%20was%2036%20years

[3] https://www.abs.gov.au/census/find-census-data/quickstats/2021/SAL20224

[4] https://abs.gov.au/census/find-census-data/quickstats/2021/SAL22086

[5] https://www.cbre.com.au/press-releases/cbd-occupancy-rates-spike-as-more-australians-return-to-the-office

[6] https://www.statista.com/statistics/1341056/australia-average-working-days-and-wfh-days-by-state/

[7] https://www.abs.gov.au/statistics/people/population/regional-population/latest-release#:~:text=Greater%20Sydney%20increased%20by%2037%2C300,both%20up%20by%204%2C200%20people

[8] https://worldpopulationreview.com/world-cities/coffs-harbour-population

[9] https://www.moretonbay.qld.gov.au/Services/Reports-Policies/Regional-Growth-Management-Strategy-2041

[10] https://profile.id.com.au/gold-coast/population-estimate?WebID=540#:~:text=The%20population%20estimate%20for%20Southport,Gold%20Coast%20City%20was%202.13%25.

[11] https://abs.gov.au/census/find-census-data/quickstats/2021/SAL22027

[12] https://www.abs.gov.au/census/find-census-data/quickstats/2016/SSC22015

[13] https://www.cardinia.vic.gov.au/info/93/planning/518/growth_area_precincts_in_cardinia_shire

[14] https://www.domain.com.au/news/how-adelaide-became-australias-unstoppable-property-market-1245779/

[15] https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mount_Barker,_South_Australia

New data reveals that five suburbs in Melbourne will be among the biggest drivers of online shopping through this year to December. Melbourne CBD, Pakenham, Berwick, Point Cook and Sunbury are on the list of the top eight suburbs where online shoppers are expected to reign supreme. Even so, NSW is predicted to be the number one State for online shopping volumes.

The findings come from CouriersPlease , which often examines historical data on parcel volumes to forecast the top suburbs for online shopping in Australia and each State. As Australia’s fastest-growing franchised courier and parcel delivery service, CouriersPlease has 1200 couriers Australia-wide, and is the trusted courier partner for Australia’s leading retailers. It recently won the NORA (National Online Retailers Association) Solution Partners Best Carrier Award in 2023.

The population there climbed to just over 54,000 in 2021 [11] , compared with 46,400 in 2016 [12] , and it was named as one of the fastest growing regions in Australia [13] .

The CouriersPlease data showed that Adelaide CBD collected almost as many deliveries as Sydney last year, and is likely to do so this year. Adelaide clocked some of the biggest property price growth among the Australian capitals last year, suggesting strong interstate migration boosting the population. [14] ”

In NSW, Sydney’s Hills district (its north-west) is expected to continue dominating the ranking of parcel deliveries by suburb. Epping, Baulkham Hills, Castle Hill and Blacktown will take out top spots this year. Sydney’s north-west is the city’s fastest-growing region [7] .

Coffs Harbour, which saw a whopping 9.2 per cent growth from 2016-2021 [8] , according to the most recent census data, could again this year be the only non-Sydney suburb making the NSW ranking.

In Queensland, northern Brisbane suburb Caboolture topped the rankings for parcel deliveries, followed by the Gold Coast’s Southport and Moreton Bay’s Morayfield. Both suburbs collected substantial population growth in recent years [9] [10] , with Richard predicting they’ll again top the package delivery list for 2024.

Top States for online shopping

Based on its parcel deliveries, CouriersPlease compiled its ranking of parcel deliveries by State for 2024. NSW claimed the State crown for most deliveries last year – receiving 21 per cent more deliveries than Victoria – and CouriersPlease predicts NSW will keep its top ranking this year, even though Victoria’s population is expected to grow 1.5 per cent compared with 1 per cent for NSW [1] .

Top suburbs Australia-wide and by State

Drawing on the same data, CouriersPlease is forecasting that Melbourne suburbs are predicted to claim this year’s online shopping crown after the capital’s CBD and outer suburbs topped a national suburb list for most packages delivered last year, with five out of the top eight spots dominated by the southern city.

Melbourne is tipped as the parcel delivery favourite, with Melbourne CBD receiving almost double the amount of deliveries than Australia’s third-ranked suburb, Sydney CBD. Melbourne’s Berwick, Point Cook and Sunbury made the top eight, with the three pockets all located more than 20km from the Melbourne CBD. Berwick, which sits 41km from the city, added almost 3000 residents according to ABS census data for 2016 and 2021 [2] [3] and doesn’t have its own major shopping centre – a fact that may have fuelled rising online retail appetite. Point Cook added a whopping 16,852 people to its population according to the latest census [4] data, which now sits at 66,781. The suburb, which lies 22km from the CBD, is also sans major shopping centres. Adelaide was the fifth city for parcel deliveries while Sydney’s Epping came in eighth.

CouriersPlease’s analysis further revealed the top suburbs in NSW, Victoria, Queensland, South Australia and Western Australia that are likely to shop the most this year. It expects Melbourne CBD, Sydney CBD and Adelaide CBD to be the top suburbs in their states, pointing to an upswing of workers in city offices last year. Figures from last year [5] showed the nation’s CBD occupancy rate rose to 71 per cent of pre-pandemic levels, compared with 54 per cent in 2022. Sydney’s rose to 75 per cent, Melbourne’s to 56 per cent and Adelaide’s to 85 per cent.

9 in 10 Retailers Face Major Challenges as Consumer Spending Dips

Mon, 20 May 2024 22:28:43 GMT

About CouriersPlease

E NDS

[1] https://www.abs.gov.au/statistics/economy/finance/monthly-household-spending-indicator/latest-release

[2] https://www.abs.gov.au/statistics/economy/price-indexes-and-inflation/consumer-price-index-australia/latest-release

[3] https://www.abs.gov.au/statistics/economy/finance/monthly-household-spending-indicator/latest-release

[4] https://www.retail.org.au/retailinsightsreport/online#:~:text=9.2%20Million,19.3%25%20of%20overall%20retail%20spend

[5] https://www.findershopping.com.au/online-shopping-statistics

[6] https://business.pureprofile.com/more-aussies-taking-advantage-of-loyalty-programs/

[7] https://www.findershopping.com.au/online-shopping-statistics

After a nationwide drop in non-discretionary spending, 50% of retailers fear a sales decline
Small businesses brace for biggest hit, with 97% expecting no increase in sales revenue
Close to 40% of all retailers anticipate cashflow concerns this year

As discretionary consumer spending took a 0.2 per cent dip [1] in the year-over-year to January 2024 and labour costs swelled, new research has revealed 50 per cent of retailers expect a slump in sales revenue and an eyewatering 91 per cent of the nation’s online retailers fear a raft of business challenges are set to strike.

The findings were derived from a survey of an independent panel of 200 Aussie retailers commissioned by Australia’s fastest-growing franchised parcel delivery service, CouriersPlease . The survey identifies the challenges facing retailers after inflation and rising interest rates infringed consumer spending, with CouriersPlease surveying owners and senior decision makers from micro retailers (1-15 employees) to large businesses with staff of more than 200. The full survey results are available here .

From the survey, CouriersPlease found that, with a drop in consumer spending, 50 per cent of retailers expect a drop in sales revenue, and 40 per cent expect their sales to stagnate. Just 10 per cent expect an increase in sales.

By business size, the data showed that small retailers are the most concerned about inflation and rising interest rates having a financial knock-on effect, with 57 per cent expecting a drop in sales. Medium-sized businesses are the least concerned, with 42 per cent saying the same.

Just 10 per cent of micro retailers expect a jump in sales revenue this year, and only 3 per cent of small businesses forecasting the same. Large businesses are the most confident about clocking a sales revenue jump, at 18 per cent of respondents.

CouriersPlease also explored further impacts to retailers that a drop in consumer spending will bring. Across all businesses, the report found cash flow availability ranks as the biggest concern among retailers, with almost 4 out of 10 (36%) of online retailers saying a drop in customer spending would exacerbate this challenge. Just over a third (33%) expect to face customer retention challenges, while 1 in 3 (29%) anticipate overhead cost struggles.

CourierPlease CEO Richard Thame’s top 5 tips for online retailers looking to fuel ecommerce success amid economic headwinds

Richard says social media and tech will be key to retaining consumers and boosting cashflow in the coming financial year, and encourages micro and small businesses to embrace social platforms.

Know who is shopping and when – and what those buyers want. Australian online shopping reports show people are buying more during the day than ever before, with most online shoppers purchasing from 2-5pm and Aussies now spending an average of four hours online shopping a week [5] . Shoppers also value sustainable retailers and Gen Y customers (aged 27-43) spend the most. By boosting sustainable practices, offering click and collect options, easier returns and shorter waiting times, you’ll immediately deliver what most shoppers want in 2024.
Strategically time your sales with the help of AI. It’s more important than ever to leverage data analytics to find the best time to run a promotion and tailor the deals to your audience to maximise relevance and engagement. And this can be done quickly and cost-effectively with AI sales tools. For small businesses with limited manpower and budgets, AI for content marketing is a game-changer with many options now available for writing copy, creating images, scheduling time and more.
Boost customer retention with loyalty programs. Don’t have a loyalty program? Then get one. Figures released this year show that 95 per cent of Aussies are members of one or more loyalty program, with 18 per cent reporting increased usage over the past year. Another 45 per cent say loyalty programs make them visit retailers more [6] . He adds that loyalty program software is a great way to implement this cheaply and easily. Small businesses could offer rewards for members who make fewer returns, for example.
Get an omnichannel presence through pop-ups. Social media is king for Ecommerce retailers with Australians shopping through social media channels more than ever. [7] But a pop-up store can help businesses get a physical presence without the immense overheads. They’re also a great way to test potential new markets, market stalls are an inexpensive solution and said creating a unique point of difference – such as a freebies or even Insta-friendly pic opportunities – could build brand recognition.
Use final sales as a cost-saving strategy. Buyers love a bargain, and final sales are a great way to help savvy shoppers nab a deal and for businesses to clear inventory. Industry data shows only a third of businesses utilise this tactic but it’s important not to throw sustainability out the window. A lot of businesses have a ‘no returns’ policy with final sales but this adds stress to customers and can mean a jump in landfill for unwanted items. Consider bringing back a customer and environmentally friendly refund policy and consider even offering rewards to customers who trade in pre-loved items.

While goods price inflation was indeed weaker than expected, Richard pointed to a non-discretionary spend jump of 6.9 per cent in the year leading up to January, which was driven largely by transport, food and health spending [3] . Additional data shows online shopping continues to attract consumers with 9.52 million households (which equates to 81% of Aussie households) receiving a parcel last year – a figure that was up 1.4 per cent year on year [4] .

Sustainability forecasted to be a growing priority in retail, as 84% shoppers make ‘green’ choices

Mon, 20 May 2024 22:19:55 GMT

About CouriersPlease

E NDS

[1] https://web.archive.org/web/20190527023635/https://wastenot.org.au/history-of-waste

[2] https://www.wasteauthority.wa.gov.au/images/resources/files/Strategic_Direction_Waste_Avoidance_and_Resource_Recovery_Strategy_2030.pdf

84% of Aussies take environmentally friendly choices in their online shopping journey
Recycling of packaging ranks highest for all Aussies – at 47% – and increases with shopper age
Choosing sustainable retailers decreases consistently with shopper age: 45% of under-30s seek out such retailers

New research has revealed the most – and least – popular ‘green’ choices that Aussies make in their online shopping journey, giving retailers insights into the potential return on investment in their own sustainability initiatives. The good news is that a whopping 84 per cent of Aussies are making efforts to shop sustainably, from choosing sustainable retailers with ethical policies to recycling packaging. The study also shows older Aussies are leading the charge on some environmentally friendly practices such as reusing and recycling, while younger shoppers care most about ethical policies.

The findings were derived from a survey of an independent panel of 1005 Australian adults commissioned by Australia’s fastest-growing franchised parcel delivery service, CouriersPlease , to glean the rates of sustainable choices made by consumers while shopping online. CouriersPlease presented respondents with seven of the most popular environmentally friendly practices such as choosing retailers with sustainable practices, with just 16 per cent confessing they take no such actions at all.

While climate change concerns are often considered a greater issue for younger Aussies, the data shows that over 50s are the most concerned about recycling, which could indicate better habits and education.

For the full survey results, click here:

https://www.couriersplease.com.au/Media/Environmentally_Friendly_White_Paper_2024_PREVIEW_1_02_0353079e91.pdf

Recycling came out as the most popular environmentally friendly choice among respondents, with 47 per cent saying they recycle their product and parcel packaging. Avoiding impulse buys and re-using and re-wearing items multiple times came out as the equal second most favoured green choice, chosen by 34 per cent.

Disappointingly, just 29 per cent of respondents return items in the same satchel they arrived in. An even lower 20 per cent say they return unwanted items rather than keeping them unused or disposing of them.

An impressive 34 per cent sometimes or always shop at retailers boasting sustainably sourced fabrics and ethical labour practices, with 10 per cent exclusively making that choice.

Boomers boom in recycling but Gen-Z are most ethical shoppers

The CouriersPlease survey shows that the older the shopper, the more likely they are to recycle their packaging: 56 per cent of over-50s do so, compared with just 36 per cent of under-30s, while 43 per cent aged 31-50 make the effort.

However, the younger the shopper the more likely they are to choose ethical or sustainable retailers and return items in the same satchel they arrived in, to save on packaging. Almost half (45%) of Gen-Z sometimes or always choose ethical or sustainable retailers, compared with just 25 per cent of over-50s. One third (36%) of Gen-Z also returns items in the same satchel, compared with 27 per cent and 25 per cent of 31-50s and over-50s respectively.

CouriersPlease CEO Richard Thame says the figures showcase the rise of sustainability concerns for all Aussies, with a study revealing Australians are more worried about climate change than most other issues.

West Australians take the sustainability crown

Among the mainland Aussie states, WA shoppers shirk impulse buys the most and correctly dispose of packaging, with 40 per cent prioritise reusing items over impulse purchases, and 53 per cent recycle their packaging. Queenslanders were the second most likely to recycle with almost 1 in 2 (49 per cent) making the effort to correctly dispose of packaging.

Richard adds that greater corporate responsibility on environmentally friendly practices must be increasingly embraced across the nation.

CouriersPlease is prioritising sustainability in its own business by opening three new depots in Sydney, Melbourne and Perth that are built to a Green Star Standard, to support the growth of its customers and franchisees.

Corporate Traveller’s Top Cost-Saving Tactics for Business Travel

Mon, 20 May 2024 09:35:23 GMT

[1] Flight Centre’s Corporate Traveller forecasts business travel trends for 2024 | Corporate Traveller

[2] https://www.bitre.gov.au/statistics/aviation/domestic

[3] https://www.statista.com/outlook/mmo/shared-mobility/shared-rides/ride-hailing/australia

ENDS

About Corporate Traveller

FCTG’s Corporate Traveller reveals the top cost-saving tactics used by its savviest business travellers

Booking more than two weeks ahead, asking for last room availability, and choosing fares that offer like-for-like credit options with cancellations. These are just some of the top hacks that helped the savviest businesses shave hundreds of thousands of dollars off their travel spend last year, as revealed by Corporate Traveller .

Flight Centre Travel Group’s flagship SME travel management business has lifted the lid on the best travel tactics that have helped some of their most strategic business customers save more than 30 per cent on corporate travel over 2023. And with a recent survey revealing that 91 per cent of SMEs would continue to travel regardless of economic pressures this year [1] , Tom Walley, Corporate Traveller’s Australian-based Global Managing Director, says these tips could put thousands back in the company coffers.

Corporate Traveller reveals the top seven cost-saving travel hacks from its savviest customers:

Ditch the myth of last-minute travel deals and ensure you book those flights more than two weeks out from the travel date.

Last-minute travel deals are a myth, says Tom, with the cheapest airfares now typically available at least two weeks out from the travel date, but booking as soon as six months in advance would see the largest savings. He further adds that organisation is key when it comes to nabbing the cheapest deals.

Airlines offer their cheapest rates on any given flight more than 14 days out, as their algorithms work to seat availability, and as seats get snapped up, the price of the remaining spots tend to increase. Additionally, says Tom, Corporate Travellers’ savviest clients frequently book on the quarter or half hour to nab cheaper fares, with companies that opt for a flexible departure time able to secure the best deals.

“But, as is the nature of business travel, advance organisation of meetings and events is not always as easy as it may sound. Travel Management Companies exist to help corporate travellers secure the best deal for those unavoidable last minute travel scenarios.

2. Maximise travel value adds by signing up for a travel programs

Alongside utilising a travel management partner such as Corporate Traveller to help you secure the most competitive rates, Tom says many of their business customers also enjoy increased value in their travel through travel programs. Corporate Traveller’s SmartStay program, for instance, offers exclusive hotel deals, with add-ons including free breakfast, late checkout, and upgrades.

3. Book a flight that offers the best terms and conditions for changes, credits or cancellations

Not all airline Terms and conditions were created equal, Tom says, and by purchasing a flight that lets you get a full credit that can be used on the same economy flight type has the potential to save you thousands in the long run when those corporate travel plans change. Smart travellers and bookers should always check the terms and conditions of a fare, as some economy tickets may appear to allow flight credits in the case of cancellation, but it may come with restrictions.

4. Encourage a carry-on luggage culture

During domestic travel, encouraging staff to fly with just carry-on luggage for short trips can save a company significantly over the course of a year. Some of the more budget-conscious businesses are educating their travellers about what they can pack and how to do it efficiently, leading to savings of up to $90 per airfare.

By taking travel-sized toiletries, separating electronic devices and carrying your laptop separately, Tom says the carry-on luggage limits have proven to be ample on two-to-four-day trips.

5. Always ask for last room availability

Hotel rates vary wildly based on the time of year and city events, says Tom, but by utilising ‘last room availability’, Corporate Traveller’s budget-conscious customers get a guaranteed set contracted rate at the hotel they partner with. Last room availability is a contract between a company and a hotel that ensures a hotel sells their rooms to the company at a contracted price, regardless of how many rooms are left or whether a rare event, such as a concert, has inflated prices.

6. Package your flight, hotel and airport pick-up and drop-off service

Some business travellers make the mistake of booking each component of their travel separately in the hopes of snagging a better deal, but by bundling the trip, their customers usually pay the same, Tom says. This means less time spent organising a car rental or a rideshare, less hassle, and less room for error – after all, for busy business travellers, time is money.

7. Select hotels that are in close proximity to the CBD, transport and meetings

Businesses that booked hotels in walking distance to major amenities and meeting locations also clocked major savings last year by cutting down on rideshares and even restaurant expenses. By booking a hotel in the city centre, Tom says corporate travellers enjoyed more dining options and less need for a rental car or taxi.

Two thirds of Australians Back Tourism Taxes as Travel’s Environmental Impact Intensifies

Mon, 20 May 2024 01:45:06 GMT

About InsureandGo

E NDS

[1] https://www.smartraveller.gov.au/destinations/asia/indonesia

[2] https://www.science.org/content/article/tourism-four-times-worse-planet-previously-believed

[3] https://www.weforum.org/agenda/2023/04/survey-of-travelers-finds-76-want-more-sustainable-options/

[4] https://www.lonelyplanet.com/news/new-tourist-taxes-fees

[5] https://www.lonelyplanet.com/news/amsterdam-raising-tourist-tax

[6] https://www.euronews.com/travel/2024/01/05/tourist-taxes-all-of-the-countries-you-will-have-to-pay-to-enter-in-2022

[7] https://www.abs.gov.au/statistics/industry/tourism-and-transport/overseas-arrivals-and-departures-australia/dec-2023

[8] https://tourism.sa.gov.au/insights/south-australian-visitor-economy#:~:text=International%20visits%20and%20expenditure%20in,per%20cent%20to%2012.0%20million .

Just weeks after Bali introduced a new tourism tax [1] , a new survey from award-winning travel insurance provider InsureandGo , reveals that almost two-thirds (63%) of Aussies support countries introducing the tax to combat the rising environmental toll visitors take [2] .

The survey, which follows a growing number of nations implementing taxes to fund cultural and environmental protection, also reveals that 60% of respondents want Australia to introduce its own tourism tax, with 63% of NSW residents particularly supporting the levy.

The findings were taken from a survey of an independent panel of 1006 Australians commissioned by InsureandGo, which sought to gauge how residents feel about rising tourism taxes – particularly amid increased sustainability concerns [3] . The research also found that younger Australians, aged between 18 and 30, are the most eco-conscious travellers, with a whopping 73% saying yes to tourism taxes.

Bali implemented the tax recently in February [4] , with all arrivals now required to pay 15 AUD (150,000 IDR) before arrival. The popular Indonesian beach destination joins a growing cohort of countries imposing the tax, including Amsterdam in the Netherlands. The European city has the highest tourism tax across the continent – with the former 7% hotel tourist levy rising to 12.5% this year [5] . That equates to an additional $36 a night on the average room rate of $289. Closer to home, New Zealand charges international visitors a 32.64 AUD levy (35 NZD) to address current challenges created by tourism in its conservation areas. Tourism taxes are usually indirectly paid through accommodation providers, holiday companies or visas.

InsureandGo found that more than half (52%) of Aussies were happy to pay the tourist taxes at the current rates, however a smaller 11% of all respondents said they would gladly pay higher levies.

Aussies from visitor hot spots most in favour of tourist tax at home and abroad

While 6 out of 10 respondents say yes to an Australian tourism levy, residents from NSW and South Australia were among the highest at 63% and 61% respectively.

Respondents from NSW were the most in favour of paying a tourist tax abroad, with a whopping 66% supporting overseas levies at the current or an even higher rate.

In other states, Queenslanders and South Australians are tied for second place, with 62% in favour of the taxes. Following closely behind are Western Australians, with 61% and Victorians, with 60% in favour.

For a tax at home, 63% of NSW residents say yes, compared with 59% of Victorians, 57% of Queenslanders, 61% of South Australians and 56% of West Australians.

Bleisure Boom: Australian Business Travel Doubles Global Average

Sun, 19 May 2024 10:15:58 GMT

[1] GBTA Beyond Rebound: Charting the next course for global business travel. March 2024

[2] https://markwideresearch.com/bleisure-travel-market/

ENDS

About Corporate Traveller

Global average for business travellers is 3.5 nights compared to Australia’s six nights
Nights away by Australian business travellers increases by 5%.

Australian business travellers officially spend almost double the global average of nights away on work trips as new data reveals bleisure travel has reached a new peak of six nights on average. This contrasts sharply with global counterparts, with an average business trip spanning only 3.5 nights. [1]

Corporate Traveller, the flagship SME division of Flight Centre Travel Group (FCTG), today released the figures following exclusive analysis of flight booking data from October 2023 to March 2024, which revealed a five per cent rise in the average bleisure stay length.

Fuelled by flexible working trends and a continued appetite for travel following the pandemic, the figures show Australian’s are combining business and travel far more compared with the same period in the previous year.

Additional figures from the Global Business Travel Association reveal that more than six out of 10 (62%) of travellers blend business and travel more than they did in 2019, with 79 per cent choosing to stay at the same accommodation for both work and play.

Australia’s Total Business Travel Spending (BTS) forecast for 2023 was put at $23,519 million USD, up from $18,538 million USD in 2022, which highlights Australia as an important market in the global business travel industry, while further reflecting recovery and growth in business travel spending.

Australia-based Global Managing Director for FCTG’s Corporate Traveller, Tom Walley, says the figures reveal more than just a homegrown love of travel, but the growing flexible working trend that accommodates bleisure feasibility.

Corporate Traveller’s insights reveal that education professionals are leading this trend domestically, with sectors like utilities, construction, and transportation also showing strong inclination towards bleisure. Conversely, industries such as real estate, retail, and finance are less likely to blend work trips with leisure time.

Tom says that cost of living pressures could also be behind Australian business travellers embracing bleisure trips as it offers a cost-effective way to enjoy a destination while saving on expenses. Organisations are also benefiting from this trend as it is leads to higher employee productivity, satisfaction, and retention – without additional costs to the company [2] .

Corporate Traveller provides regular insights for customers through their comprehensive online Business Support Hub , which for years has provided businesses with a wealth of prescriptive information.

In addition, Corporate Traveller’s travel event series, Unpacked , offers customers bleisure travel insights and hacks through webinars and in-person events; and its regular market research uncovers business travel behaviours and needs to help businesses make informed decisions around travel, meetings and events.

Who benefits from work-related travel?

Sun, 19 May 2024 10:10:16 GMT

[1] 2021 Census shows Millennials overtaking Boomers | Australian Bureau of Statistics (abs.gov.au)

[2] 2021 Census shows Millennials overtaking Boomers | Australian Bureau of Statistics (abs.gov.au)

[3] 2021 Census shows Millennials overtaking Boomers | Australian Bureau of Statistics (abs.gov.au)

[4] 2021 Census shows Millennials overtaking Boomers | Australian Bureau of Statistics (abs.gov.au)

ENDS

About Corporate Traveller

A new study shows it’s a win-win for businesses and employees

54% of employees said business travel would influence the way they used annual leave
56% of Gen Z would use less annual leave if they could travel for work
32% of 35-54-year-olds would turn business trips into ‘bleisure’ trips, saving money on travel costs and reducing leave-related business disruptions the rest of the year
55% of Queenslanders and 56% of 55-64-year-olds would not be influenced by travel benefits.

New research indicates that offering travel to under-55s workers could benefit employers by nurturing more committed employees and more predictable annual leave patterns. Gen Z is likely to take less time off work in 56 per cent of cases, while around 32 per cent of Millennials and Gen X are more likely to tack personal holidays onto business trips – all resulting in cost savings for employees and less leave-related disruptions for businesses.

The latest research into how corporate travel influences annual leave decisions comes from a survey of an independent, nationally representative panel of 1001 Australians, commissioned by Corporate Traveller , the flagship SME business of Flight Centre Travel Group. Corporate Traveller asked respondents how they would use annual leave if they could travel more for work, which circumstances would influence their decisions, such as the type of destination, whether the location was new to them, and the season that work trips were scheduled in.

Travelling for work would influence annual leave decisions for 1 in 2 Australians

Fifty-four (54) per cent of respondents said business travel would influence the way they used annual leave, with an equal 27 per cent saying they would take more or less leave if they travelled for work.

Gen Z would take less leave if they could travel for work

At 56 per cent, Generation Z adults (aged 18-24 [1] ), are most likely to minimise their annual leave if they travelled for work. This contrasts with responses by Baby Boomers (ages 55-69 [2] ), in which 56 per cent of 55-64s said travel for work would have no influence on their annual leave habits. The findings suggest that Gen Z, which includes school leavers, tertiary graduates and early-career or junior employees, still find travel new and exciting, and work-related travel provides opportunities that would otherwise be out of reach. With Gen Z satisfied with the experiences of work-related travel, businesses are less likely to see disruptions and staff shortages outside of these trips.

Millennials and Gen X more likely than Gen Z to take more leave if they could travel for work

Millennials and Generation X (ages 25-39 and 40-54 respectively [3] ) are more likely to be at the peak of their careers, starting families or in the midst of raising a family. A third of each generation (32 per cent and 31 per cent respectively) said they would extend business trips to include leisure time, saving on flights, food and accommodation, and holidaying to destinations they may not have chosen otherwise. This compares with 23 per cent of Generation Z respondents who said the same. With leave tacked onto business travel or trips extended into weekends, businesses can expect rested workers and fewer leave-related disruptions at other times of the year.

Travel for work least likely to impact annual leave decisions of Baby Boomers and Queenslanders

For Baby Boomers (ages 55-69 [4] ), the novelty of business travel and the desire or need to save on travel costs may be redundant. More than half of respondents (56%) aged 55-64 said travel for work would have no influence on their annual leave habits. This compares with 21 per cent of Generation Z and 35 per cent of Millennials who said the same. The findings indicate that older workers are more likely to have financial reserves to take holidays as they please.

Queenslanders are also less likely to be swayed, with 55 per cent saying work travel would have no impact on their annual leave use. Year-round sunshine and active, outdoor lifestyles are likely to be behind this trend. By comparison, 41 per cent of respondents living in the cooler state of Victoria said business travel benefits would not impact their annual leave use.

Australian Open: Premier Corporate Event Beats AFL, Melbourne Cup

Sun, 19 May 2024 10:02:42 GMT

[1] Corporate Traveller collected flight, ground travel and hotel bookings to Melbourne (1) from 25-30 September 2023 to capture business travel to the AFL Grand Final on 30 September 2023 (2) from 2-8 November 2023 to capture business travel to Melbourne Cup on 7 November 2023 (3) from 23 December 2022-1 January 2023 to capture business travel to Boxing Day Test on 26 December 2023 (4) from 14-29 January 2023 and 12-28 January 2024 to capture business travel to Australian Open across the multi-day event.

[2] https://mcc.org.au/whats-on/latest-news/2023/september/september-stories-at-the-g—huge-crowds-and-thrilling-finals

[3] Crowds enjoy the big race on warm Melbourne Cup day at Flemington Racecourse – ABC News

[4] Track records and attendances at Victoria Racing Club (vrc.com.au)

[5] https://www.sportsbusinessjournal.com/Daily/Morning-Buzz/2023/01/31/australian-open-sets-attendance-record.aspx

[6] https://www.austadiums.com/sport/event/27186

[7] Melbourne Park | Austadiums

[8] https://www.sportsbusinessjournal.com/Articles/2023/10/03/australian-open-late-night-finishes.aspx

ENDS

About Corporate Traveller

Transport and hotel booking data from Flight Centre’s Corporate Traveller shows the Australian Open attracted 725% more bookings than to the Boxing Day Test in 2023
There were 73% more Australian Open bookings than to the AFL Grand Final and 56% more than to the Melbourne Cup in 2023
Corporate Traveller forecasts 21% more Australian Open bookings in 2024 than in 2023
Australian Open also tops international corporate bookings across all events

Despite AFL being our national sport, tennis has come out on top as Melbourne’s most popular sporting event among corporate travellers. New flight, ground transport and hotel booking data has revealed that Australian Open crowds will continue to grow, with forecast bookings at 21 per cent on last year (2023).

The finding comes from Corporate Traveller , the flagship SME division of Flight Centre Travel Group. The company compared corporate inbound and outbound bookings in the days around the Australian Open, the AFL Grand Final, Melbourne Cup and Boxing Day Test [1] .

Australian Open wins by a landslide across local and international corporate bookings

Corporate Traveller recorded 725 per cent more bookings to the 2023 Australian Open than to the 2023 Boxing Day Test, 73 per cent more than to the AFL Grand Final and 56 per cent more than to the Melbourne Cup.

When it comes to international corporate bookings to the four main events, the Australian Open is also a clear winner. Corporate Traveller recorded 89 per cent more international bookings for Melbourne during the Australian Open than the Melbourne Cup, 46 per cent more than the AFL Grand Final and nine per cent more than the Boxing Day Test.

AFL Grand Final and Melbourne Cup vie for second place

Corporate Traveller recorded 11 per cent more domestic corporate bookings to the 2023 Melbourne Cup than to the AFL Grand Final. However, when it came to international corporate bookings, the AFL Grand Final trumped Melbourne Cup, with 30 per cent more bookings. The 2023 Grand Final between the Brisbane Lions and Collingwood drew capacity crowds of 100,024 to the MCG for the second year in a row [2] . Media reports estimated more than 80,000 people attended Melbourne Cup 2023 [3] , up on 73,816 in 2022 [4] .

Australian Open 2024 predicted to grow in popularity as event extended

Bookings for the 2024 Australian Open are already 21 per cent higher than Corporate Traveller’s 2023 bookings. The Australian Open broke attendance records in 2023, welcoming 839,192 [5] fans through the gates over the tournament. Day six attracted the biggest crowd, with 94,854 [6] people flocking to Melbourne Park – the largest crowd since 2003 [7] . Players on that day were Andy Murray, Roberto Bautista Agut, Novak Djokovic, Belinda Bencic, Aryna Sabalenka and Dan Evans. In 2024, the tournament will be extended by one day to reduce late matches [8] .

Corporate travellers by city of origin

Among those arriving in Melbourne during the Australian Open this year, the highest proportion of bookings from a single city came from Sydney (29% of total bookings), followed by Brisbane (16%), Adelaide (9%), Perth (9%), Canberra (2%), and outside of Australia (14%). Sydney also tallied the most bookings during Melbourne’s other three big-ticket sporting events.

This year, the top international origin cities attracting corporate travellers to the Australian Open – in order of booking volumes – are Auckland, Dubai, Singapore, Los Angeles, Doha, Christchurch and Wellington.

Corporate Traveller Reports 42% YoY Rise in Easter Holiday Bookings

Sun, 19 May 2024 09:54:32 GMT

[1] Easter holiday spending up amid big overseas spend | Australian Retailers Association

[2] Aviation rescue firefighters will not strike over Easter – Australian Aviation

ENDS

About Corporate Traveller

Holiday bookings by business travellers projected to increase 42% this Easter
Brisbane has surged ahead as top domestic destination, with 50% more bookings than Sydney and 46% more than Melbourne
47% of holidayers will fly out on Wednesday 27 March

Holiday booking volumes among business travellers is expected to be 42 per cent higher this Easter than last Easter, with almost half (47%) of travellers taking off on the Wednesday before Easter and more than a third (37%) starting their holidays on the Thursday. The growth in bookings and trend towards earlier departures highlight an increased appetite for bleisure travel and an increased confidence in travel overall.

The forecast comes from Corporate Traveller , the flagship SME division of Flight Centre Travel Group, which compared flight and hotel bookings from Wednesday 27 to Easter Sunday 30 March to Wednesday 5 to Easter Sunday 9 April in 2023. Between the two time periods, bookings have already grown 29 per cent this year, with Corporate Traveller forecasting a total increase of 42 per cent by 27 March.

The Easter long weekend is arguably the busiest travel period after Christmas. Australians are expected to spend $9.6 billion on domestic and international travel this Easter, a $500 million increase in travel spend during Easter last year. [1] This comes as aviation firefighters announce a postponement to industrial action that was threatening chaos at airports over the Easter break. [2]

Corporate Traveller’s analysis of flight bookings found that 47 per cent of bookings over the five-day period this Easter were made for Wednesday, 27 March – two days before the start of the Easter long weekend. Bookings for Thursday, 28 March, were also high (at 37%), before a sharp decline on Good Friday (8% of bookings) through to Easter Sunday.

Brisbane tops Easter destinations in 2024

This year, Brisbane is surpassing Sydney and Melbourne as the top destination this Easter, with 46 per cent more travellers visiting there than Melbourne, and 50 per cent more than Sydney. In 2023, Sydney was the most popular Easter destination, with Brisbane and Melbourne in equal second.

Not only are almost half of business travellers starting their holiday on Wednesday, they are also preferring Queensland’s capital city over nearby coastal destinations. These findings point to potential bleisure trend this year. Brisbane’s proximity to the Gold Coast and Sunshine Coast – just an hour away – means professionals can easily switch from work mode to enjoying leisure activities with family, including world class beaches and theme parks, or simply remain in the city to enjoy all Brisbane has to offer.

New Zealand cities dominate international Easter destinations

Auckland, Christchurch and Wellington have emerged as the top international destinations, showing a clear preference for shorter international trips on the long weekend. New Zealand’s proximity to Australia makes it an ideal destination for maximising the limited time available on a long weekend by reducing time spent in the air and avoiding jetlag associated with destinations further afield.

The 2023 Easter long weekend saw longer-haul destinations appearing in the top three, with London was the third most popular spot behind Auckland and Singapore.

Corporate Traveller Reveals Most In-Demand Hotel Amenities

Sat, 20 Apr 2024 09:43:02 GMT

[1] ‘Beyond Rebound: Charting the Next Course for Global Business Travel’. Global Business Travel Association, 6 March 2024.

[2] https://www.fcmtravel.com/en-au/resources/white-papers/business-travel-trends-and-forecasts-q4-2023#form

ENDS

About Corporate Traveller

Flight Centre’s Corporate Traveller reveals the most in-demand hotel amenities

Amidst an estimated 27 per cent surge in Australian business travel expenditure last year, [1] fuelled by an uptick in travel and rising costs for airfares and hotel accommodation, business travellers are becoming more discerning in their hotel selection. Australian hotel room rates averaged AUD$250 (USD$163) in 2023 – a 5.8 per cent rise from 2022 and are predicted to increase by three per cent in 2024. [2] Given these escalating costs, business travellers are increasingly prioritising value, and booking hotels not only for comfort, but also for productivity and well-being amenities.

The findings come from a new survey of an independent, nationally representative panel of 1,001 Australians, commissioned by Corporate Traveller , the flagship SME division of Flight Centre Travel Group (FCTG). The survey found hotels which provide an ‘office away from the office’ experience, alongside facilities conducive to health and relaxation, will be favoured in the current climate of heightened fiscal awareness among business travellers.

Corporates want an office away from the office when travelling

Major hotel chains offer basic in-room business facilities such as a desk, complimentary Wi-Fi and a business centre – but is it enough? Corporate Traveller found that most respondents are looking for accommodation that offers business amenities and rooms equipped to serve as efficient workspaces within the hotel’s standard rate. Three quarters (73%) want free and fast Wi-Fi, and 41 per cent want free printing facilities. While 35 per cent of respondents want larger or better-equipped workspaces in their hotel room including phone chargers and charging banks, and 37 per cent want more electrical outlets and USB ports.

The survey indicates a strong preference for in-room office amenities over communal business centres or separate meeting rooms, indicating that guests travelling for business value the ability to work privately within their hotel room. Just 21 per cent of respondents want on-site co-working spaces or offices, only 18 per cent said they would seek a separate meeting room, and 13 per cent want the hotel to extend its concierge services to organising business meetings, transport, and dining options.

Hotels supporting workers in staying healthy is another top priority

Corporate Traveller’s research underscores the importance for hotels to enhance their breakfast offerings with health-conscious options, as a significant 44 per cent deemed it essential. Additionally, one in four respondents (25%) expressed a preference for hotels that include comprehensive, well-equipped fitness facilities. The study also revealed that over a third (36%) of business travellers seek amenities that facilitate relaxation outside of their hotel rooms.

2025 and beyond: side hustle economy and digital delivery revolution CouriersPlease CEO forecasts

Sun, 06 Mar 2022 20:15:54 GMT

About CouriersPlease

E NDS

[1] Selected Living Cost Indexes, Australia, December 2024 .
[2] Half of Aussies eye side hustles
[3] Australian report finds the changing nature of work provides new opportunities for workplace gender equality
[4] TikTok Shopping: Everything You Need To Know To Start Selling (2024) – Shopify Australia
[5] Temu & Shein’s Australian customer base keeps growing – as more Australians continue to trade down in the first half of 2024 in response to the cost-of-living crisis – Roy Morgan Research
[6] �� The Fashion Marketplace: Buy & Sell Online with BUSHPOP
[7] Shop Secondhand Clothes at #1 Online Thrift Store Australia
[8] eCommerce Insights | ECDB.com
[9] Factors Driving Small Business Start-Ups in Australia
[10] Escaping the rat race and rental rut of city life, millennials are on the move again

Following a transformative year for the online shopping and the growing appetite for personalised convenience, the CEO of Australia’s fastest-growing franchised courier service, CouriersPlease , Richard Thame forecasts side hustles, cutting-edge digital delivery, seamless returns, and regional expansions will redefine E-Commerce and parcel delivery sector in 2025.

Off the back of continued growth of E-Commerce giants Temu and Shein, [5] Richard forecasts a major shift toward digital-first delivery in 2025, with real-time tracking and priority services at the forefront.

He points to the surge in Australians leveraging platforms like Etsy, eBay, and Shopify, where creative entrepreneurs can launch businesses with minimal startup costs, with Shopify taking social commerce to the next level by recently integrating TikTok Shop to enable in-app shopping. [4]

Furthermore, Richard predicts the resale commerce trend will surge locally following growing appetite for sustainable second-hand fashion. While platforms like Vinted, a major player in Europe where users buy and sell pre-loved clothing, lead the charge internationally, Australian alternatives like Bushpop [6] and SwapUp [7] are gaining traction.

Richard Thame’s 7 trends shaping E-Commerce and parcel deliveries in 2025 and beyond:

Side hustle economy booms

Australians will increasingly turn to E-Commerce side hustles to supplement incomes, driving demand for flexible logistics solutions like CouriersPlease’s CPDirect platform to support their growing ventures. Research has found that 38 per cent of Aussies are considering starting a side hustle alongside their existing job in the next five years, with 68 per cent motivated by the potential to earn extra income. [9]

Digital-first delivery

Retail and carrier digital integrations will continue to be enhanced. Customers should expect to see more than real-time tracking, proactive updates and day-specific delivery windows that align with hybrid work schedules as consumers prioritise control and convenience.

Resale commerce takes off

With Australia’s fast-fashion consumption under scrutiny, resale commerce will rise as more shoppers opt for second-hand options.

Regional expansion for metro-level convenience

As regional areas grow off the back of Australians being priced out of capital cities amid property price hikes, [10] city-level delivery services will ramp up for regional Australians, creating more franchise opportunities in the industry and supporting local economies.

Sustainability front and centre

In response to consumer demand for eco-friendly practices, major retailers and delivery services will deepen their commitment to green logistics. We’ll see accelerated investments in eco-friendly facilities, optimised delivery routes to reduce emissions, green-rated warehouses, and green-procurement policies.

Seamless returns and PUDO options

Next year will see a major shift towards hassle-free, flexible returns. As consumers increasingly value simplicity and efficiency, logistics providers will ramp up partnerships with local businesses to expand Pick-Up and Drop-Off (PUDO) networks, allowing customers to return items at convenient spots like cafes, pharmacies, and parcel lockers. CouriersPlease is leading this shift with its fast-growing CP PUDO network, in partnership with HUBBED, which already spans over 2,800 locations nationwide, making e-commerce returns easier than ever before.”

Factory-first shopping

Driven by online platforms, the trend of shopping direct enables entrepreneurs to sell directly to consumers, cutting out traditional retail middlemen and streamline the buying process. A recent CouriersPlease survey of 1000 Australian online shoppers found that 71 per cent had made a purchase through Amazon and 55 per cent through Temu in the September 2024 quarter.

the-ideas-suite

Eliminate trigger foods to beat fatigue and feel lighter this summer

Top tips from FoodFit for feeling your best this summer:

About FoodFit

ENDS

From headaches in Millennials to joint pain in Gen X: how food reactions impact each generation

FoodFit’s analysis found the top 10 symptoms and incompatible foods (after bread and milk) across each generation.

About FoodFit

Top 10 symptoms by age group:

Top 10 household products linked to migraines, anxiety and skin flare-ups in thousands of Australians

FoodFit explains the body’s reaction to products in common 5 categories:

Top 10 items aggravating symptoms in individuals [1] ( see top 30 items in FoodFit’s report )

About FoodFit

Bloating, brain fog and fatigue? The real culprit might be your morning toast

About FoodFit

Top 10 symptoms reported to FoodFit from a sample of 2856 individuals, July 2024-July 2025:

CORPORATE TRAVELLER

INSUREANDGO

WORLDFIRST

DAVIE GROUP – THE OODIE

GEMINI

MENULOG

COMPARE THE MARKET

HOTELSCOMBINED

HATCH

INSTANTSCRIPTS

MONEY.COM.AU

AUST PAYROLL ASSOCIATION

WORLDFIRST

WESLEY

POINT HACKS

+HEMP

KANEBRIDGE

MENULOG INFLUENCER ENGAGEMENT

PRODUCTREVIEW.COM.AU

TrueLocal

Red Balloon

Ochre Health

CouriersPlease

GAVL

ALI Group

HOW PR AND SEO HARMONISE WITH ONE ANOTHER

So, how did this change occur?

The shared goals of PR and SEO

Managing the intersection of PR and SEO strategies

Using PR and SEO in concert

FIVE TYPES OF STORIES THAT GIVE YOU THE BEST RETURN ON INVESTMENT

1. Customer case studies

2. Major radio interviews

3. Evening current affairs programs

4. Localised media placements

INHOUSE OR AGENCY? WHAT TO CONSIDER WHEN YOU’RE APPLYING FOR A JOB IN PR

In-house roles

Pros:

Agency:

Pros:

Cons:

HOW TO CHOOSE THE RIGHT PR AGENCY FOR YOU

HOW TO GET THE MOST FROM YOUR PR AGENCY

HOW MUCH MEDIA COVERAGE SHOULD YOU EXPECT FROM YOUR PR BUDGET?

WHY YOUR PR AGENCY SHOULD BE YOUR SOCIAL AGENCY

WHY INCLUDE THOUGHT LEADERSHIP IN YOUR PR PROGRAM?

A DAY IN THE LIFE: THE INTERN EDITION

HOW PR CAN MEET YOUR SEO GOALS

THE IDEAS SUITE REBRANDS

THE IDEAS SUITE LAUNCHES SOCIAL MEDIA

GUIDE TO GETTING STARTED ON THE SPEAKING CIRCUIT

DO YOU SEEK PAYMENT?

HOW YOU CAN GET STARTED

FOUR TIPS TO SECURE A SPEAKING ENGAGEMENT:

﻿

HIGHLY TARGETED MEDIA LIST OR BROAD LIST?

KNOW YOUR MEDIA CHANNELS AND CATEGORIES

RELEVANCE

SMALL, TARGETED MEDIA LIST OR LONGER LIST?

Could contributor pieces help meet your PR goals?

ARE BYLINED ARTICLES FOR ME?

WHICH MEDIA OUTLETS TO TARGET

WHAT TO WRITE ABOUT

BENEFITS OF INFLUENCERS FOR YOUR BRAND